Parameterization of the 5 SIMOCODE ES V12 Online Help · SIMOCODE ES V12 Online Help Programming...

SIMOCODE ES Online Help

___________________

___________________

___________________

___________________

___________________

___________________

___________________

___________________

SIMOCODE pro

SIMOCODE ES V12 Online Help

Programming and Operating Manual

08/2013 A5E34383465002A/RS-AA/001

Tooltips SIRIUS + SIMOCODE

1

General information 2

Device configuration 3

Diagnostics & Online 4

Parameterization of the modules

5

Commissioning 6

Working with continuous function charts (CFCs) for SIMOCODE

7

Migrating a SIMOCODE pro project

8

Additional information 9

Siemens AG Industry Sector Postfach 48 48 90026 NÜRNBERG GERMANY

Ⓟ 07/2014 Subject to change

Copyright © Siemens AG 2013. All rights reserved

Legal information Warning notice system

This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.

If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage.

Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.

Proper use of Siemens products Note the following:

WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.

Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions.


Programming and Operating Manual, 08/2013 3

Table of contents

1 Tooltips SIRIUS + SIMOCODE ..................................................................................................... 13

1.1 Tooltips SiriusPLAT without links ............................................................................................ 13 1.1.1 Device .................................................................................................................................... 13 1.1.1.1 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Order number ..................................................... 13 1.1.1.2 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Short code .......................................................... 13 1.1.1.3 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Manager ............................................................. 13 1.1.1.4 Module parameter - Identification - Device - PI profile ............................................................. 13 1.1.1.5 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Device family ...................................................... 13 1.1.1.6 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Device subfamily................................................. 13 1.1.1.7 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Device class ....................................................... 13 1.1.1.8 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Ident No. ............................................................. 13 1.1.1.9 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Hardware revision level ....................................... 14 1.1.1.10 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Firmware revision level ....................................... 14 1.1.1.11 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Revision counter ................................................. 14 1.1.1.12 Module parameter - Identification - Device - IaM version ......................................................... 14 1.1.1.13 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Supported IaM data ............................................ 14 1.1.1.14 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Time stamp ......................................................... 14 1.1.2 Fieldbus interface ................................................................................................................... 14 1.1.2.1 Fieldbus interface - Start-up parameter block .......................................................................... 14 1.1.2.2 Fieldbus interface - DP address .............................................................................................. 14 1.1.2.3 Fieldbus interface - PROFIsafe address ................................................................................. 15 1.1.2.4 Fieldbus interface - Transmission speed ................................................................................. 15 1.1.2.5 Fieldbus interface - Basic type ................................................................................................ 15 1.1.2.6 Fieldbus interface - Diagnosis for process messages .............................................................. 15 1.1.2.7 Fieldbus interface - Diagnosis for process warnings................................................................ 15 1.1.2.8 Fieldbus interface - Diagnosis for process faults ..................................................................... 15 1.1.2.9 Fieldbus interface - Diagnosis for device faults ....................................................................... 15

1.2 Tooltips SiriusPLAT ................................................................................................................ 16 1.2.1 Device .................................................................................................................................... 16 1.2.1.1 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Order number ..................................................... 16 1.2.1.2 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Short code .......................................................... 16 1.2.1.3 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Manager ............................................................. 16 1.2.1.4 Module parameter - Identification - Device - PI profile ............................................................. 16 1.2.1.5 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Device family ...................................................... 16 1.2.1.6 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Device subfamily................................................. 17 1.2.1.7 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Device class ....................................................... 17 1.2.1.8 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Ident No. ............................................................. 17 1.2.1.9 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Hardware revision level ....................................... 17 1.2.1.10 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Firmware revision level ....................................... 17 1.2.1.11 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Revision counter ................................................. 17 1.2.1.12 Module parameter - Identification - Device - IaM version ......................................................... 18 1.2.1.13 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Supported IaM data ............................................ 18 1.2.1.14 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Time stamp ......................................................... 18 1.2.2 Fieldbus interface ................................................................................................................... 18 1.2.2.1 Fieldbus interface - Start-up parameter block .......................................................................... 18

Table of contents


4 Programming and Operating Manual, 08/2013

1.2.2.2 Fieldbus interface - DP address...............................................................................................19 1.2.2.3 Fieldbus interface - PROFIsafe address ..................................................................................19 1.2.2.4 Fieldbus interface - Transmission speed ..................................................................................19 1.2.2.5 Fieldbus interface - Basic type .................................................................................................19 1.2.2.6 Fieldbus interface - Diagnosis for process messages...............................................................20 1.2.2.7 Fieldbus interface - Diagnosis for process warnings ................................................................20 1.2.2.8 Fieldbus interface - Diagnosis for process faults ......................................................................20 1.2.2.9 Fieldbus interface - Diagnosis for device faults ........................................................................20

1.3 Module parameters without links .............................................................................................21 1.3.1 Identification ............................................................................................................................21 1.3.1.1 Marking ...................................................................................................................................21 1.3.2 Configuration...........................................................................................................................21 1.3.2.1 Configuration - Selection of an initialization module .................................................................21 1.3.2.2 Configuration - Application (control function) - SIMOCODE pro C basic unit .............................21 1.3.2.3 Configuration - Application (control function) - SIMOCODE pro V basic unit .............................21 1.3.2.4 Configuration - Application (control function) - SIMOCODE pro S basic unit .............................22 1.3.2.5 Configuration - Thermistor .......................................................................................................22 1.3.2.6 Configuration - Removal error when operator panel is removed ...............................................23 1.3.3 Motor protection ......................................................................................................................23 1.3.3.1 Overload/Unbalance/Stalled rotor ............................................................................................23 1.3.4 Motor control ...........................................................................................................................27 1.3.4.1 Control stations .......................................................................................................................27 1.3.4.2 Control function .......................................................................................................................28 1.3.5 Machine monitoring .................................................................................................................31 1.3.5.1 Ground fault ............................................................................................................................31 1.3.5.2 Current limits ...........................................................................................................................33 1.3.5.3 Operation monitoring ...............................................................................................................34 1.3.5.4 Voltage monitoring ..................................................................................................................36 1.3.5.5 Cos phi monitoring ..................................................................................................................37 1.3.5.6 Active power monitoring ..........................................................................................................38 1.3.5.7 0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring ..........................................................................................................40 1.3.5.8 Temperature monitoring ..........................................................................................................43 1.3.5.9 Monitoring interval for mandatory testing .................................................................................43 1.3.6 Inputs ......................................................................................................................................44 1.3.6.1 Digital module inputs ...............................................................................................................44 1.3.6.2 Basic unit inputs ......................................................................................................................44 1.3.6.3 Analog module inputs ..............................................................................................................44 1.3.6.4 Temperature module inputs .....................................................................................................45 1.3.7 Outputs ...................................................................................................................................45 1.3.7.1 Basic unit outputs ....................................................................................................................45 1.3.7.2 Cyclic send data ......................................................................................................................45 1.3.7.3 Acyclic send data ....................................................................................................................46 1.3.7.4 Operator panel LED ................................................................................................................46 1.3.7.5 Digital module outputs .............................................................................................................46 1.3.7.6 Analog module - output ...........................................................................................................47 1.3.8 Standard functions ..................................................................................................................47 1.3.8.1 OPO - Positioner response ......................................................................................................47 1.3.8.2 Test/Reset ..............................................................................................................................47 1.3.8.3 Test position feedback, TPF ....................................................................................................48 1.3.8.4 External fault ...........................................................................................................................49 1.3.8.5 Emergency start ......................................................................................................................50 1.3.8.6 Safety-related tripping .............................................................................................................50

Table of contents



1.3.8.7 Watchdog (PLC/PCS monitoring) ........................................................................................... 53 1.3.8.8 Operational protection OFF .................................................................................................... 54 1.3.8.9 Power failure monitoring ......................................................................................................... 54 1.3.8.10 Time stamping........................................................................................................................ 55 1.3.9 Logic modules ........................................................................................................................ 56 1.3.9.1 Counters ................................................................................................................................ 56 1.3.9.2 Timer ..................................................................................................................................... 56 1.3.9.3 Signal conditioning ................................................................................................................. 57 1.3.9.4 Non-volatile element ............................................................................................................... 58 1.3.9.5 Flashing ................................................................................................................................. 58 1.3.9.6 Flicker .................................................................................................................................... 59 1.3.9.7 Limit monitor .......................................................................................................................... 60 1.3.9.8 Truth table 2I/1O .................................................................................................................... 61 1.3.9.9 Truth table 3I/1O .................................................................................................................... 61 1.3.9.10 Truth table 5I/2O .................................................................................................................... 62 1.3.9.11 Calculators ............................................................................................................................. 62 1.3.10 3UF50 compatibility mode ...................................................................................................... 64 1.3.10.1 3UF50 compatibility mode ...................................................................................................... 64 1.3.10.2 3UF50 basic type ................................................................................................................... 64 1.3.10.3 3UF50 operating mode ........................................................................................................... 64 1.3.11 Analog value recording ........................................................................................................... 64 1.3.11.1 Analog-value recording - Trigger edge .................................................................................... 64 1.3.11.2 Analog-value recording - Pre-trigger ....................................................................................... 64 1.3.11.3 Analog-value recording - Sampling rate .................................................................................. 64 1.3.11.4 Analog-value recording - Assigned analog value..................................................................... 64 1.3.11.5 Analog-value recording - Trigger input .................................................................................... 65 1.3.12 Online parameters .................................................................................................................. 65 1.3.12.1 Online - status command start pause...................................................................................... 65 1.3.12.2 Online - event short circuit ...................................................................................................... 65 1.3.12.3 Online - event open circuit ...................................................................................................... 65 1.3.12.4 Online - event InM deleted...................................................................................................... 65 1.3.12.5 Online - event InM programmed ............................................................................................. 65 1.3.12.6 Online - event InM read-in ...................................................................................................... 65 1.3.12.7 Online - event InM Ident Data readonly ................................................................................... 65 1.3.12.8 Online - event InM readonly .................................................................................................... 66 1.3.12.9 Online - event MeM readonly .................................................................................................. 66 1.3.12.10 Online - status InM readonly Change not possible ............................................................. 66 1.3.12.11 Online - warning EMplus short circuit ................................................................................. 66 1.3.12.12 Online - warning EMplus open circuit ................................................................................. 66 1.3.12.13 Online - trip EMplus short circuit ........................................................................................ 66 1.3.12.14 Online - trip EMplus open circuit ........................................................................................ 66 1.3.12.15 Online - E module P ground-fault current ........................................................................... 66 1.3.12.16 Online - E module P last .................................................................................................... 66

1.4 Module parameters ................................................................................................................ 67 1.4.1 Identification ........................................................................................................................... 67 1.4.1.1 Marking .................................................................................................................................. 67 1.4.2 Configuration .......................................................................................................................... 67 1.4.2.1 Configuration - Selection of an initialization module ................................................................ 67 1.4.2.2 Configuration - Application (control function) - SIMOCODE pro C basic unit ............................ 67 1.4.2.3 Configuration - Application (control function) - SIMOCODE pro V basic unit ............................ 68 1.4.2.4 Configuration - Application (control function) - SIMOCODE pro S basic unit ............................ 69 1.4.2.5 Configuration - Thermistor ...................................................................................................... 69

Table of contents



1.4.2.6 Configuration - Removal error when operator panel is removed ...............................................69 1.4.3 Motor protection ......................................................................................................................70 1.4.3.1 Overload/Unbalance/Stalled rotor ............................................................................................70 1.4.4 Motor control ...........................................................................................................................75 1.4.4.1 Control stations .......................................................................................................................75 1.4.4.2 Control function .......................................................................................................................77 1.4.5 Machine monitoring .................................................................................................................82 1.4.5.1 Ground fault ............................................................................................................................82 1.4.5.2 Current limits ...........................................................................................................................86 1.4.5.3 Operation monitoring ...............................................................................................................89 1.4.5.4 Voltage monitoring ..................................................................................................................91 1.4.5.5 Cos phi monitoring ..................................................................................................................93 1.4.5.6 Active power monitoring ..........................................................................................................95 1.4.5.7 0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring ..........................................................................................................97 1.4.5.8 Temperature monitoring ........................................................................................................102 1.4.5.9 Monitoring interval for mandatory testing ...............................................................................103 1.4.6 Inputs ....................................................................................................................................104 1.4.6.1 Digital module inputs .............................................................................................................104 1.4.6.2 Basic unit inputs ....................................................................................................................104 1.4.6.3 Analog module inputs ............................................................................................................104 1.4.6.4 Temperature module inputs ...................................................................................................105 1.4.7 Outputs .................................................................................................................................106 1.4.7.1 Basic unit outputs ..................................................................................................................106 1.4.7.2 Cyclic send data ....................................................................................................................106 1.4.7.3 Acyclic send data ..................................................................................................................107 1.4.7.4 Operator panel LED ..............................................................................................................107 1.4.7.5 Digital module outputs ...........................................................................................................108 1.4.7.6 Analog module - output .........................................................................................................108 1.4.8 Standard functions ................................................................................................................109 1.4.8.1 OPO - Positioner response ....................................................................................................109 1.4.8.2 Test/Reset ............................................................................................................................109 1.4.8.3 Test position feedback, TPF ..................................................................................................111 1.4.8.4 External fault .........................................................................................................................111 1.4.8.5 Emergency start ....................................................................................................................113 1.4.8.6 Safety-related tripping ...........................................................................................................113 1.4.8.7 Watchdog (PLC/PCS Monitoring) ..........................................................................................117 1.4.8.8 Operational Protection Off .....................................................................................................118 1.4.8.9 Power failure monitoring ........................................................................................................118 1.4.8.10 Time stamping ......................................................................................................................120 1.4.9 Logic modules .......................................................................................................................120 1.4.9.1 Counter .................................................................................................................................120 1.4.9.2 Timer ....................................................................................................................................121 1.4.9.3 Signal conditioning ................................................................................................................122 1.4.9.4 Non-volatile element..............................................................................................................123 1.4.9.5 Flashing ................................................................................................................................124 1.4.9.6 Flicker ...................................................................................................................................125 1.4.9.7 Limit monitor .........................................................................................................................126 1.4.9.8 Truth table 2I/1O ...................................................................................................................128 1.4.9.9 Truth table 3I/1O ...................................................................................................................129 1.4.9.10 Truth table 5I/2O ...................................................................................................................129 1.4.9.11 Calculators ............................................................................................................................130 1.4.10 3UF50 compatibility mode .....................................................................................................132

Table of contents



1.4.10.1 3UF50 compatibility mode .................................................................................................... 132 1.4.10.2 3UF50 basic type ................................................................................................................. 133 1.4.10.3 3UF50 operating mode ......................................................................................................... 133 1.4.11 Analog value recording ......................................................................................................... 133 1.4.11.1 Analog-value recording - Trigger edge .................................................................................. 133 1.4.11.2 Analog-value recording - Pre-trigger ..................................................................................... 133 1.4.11.3 Analog-value recording - Sampling rate ................................................................................ 133 1.4.11.4 Analog-value recording - Assigned analog value................................................................... 134 1.4.11.5 Analog-value recording - Trigger input .................................................................................. 134 1.4.12 Online parameters ................................................................................................................ 134 1.4.12.1 Online - status command start pause.................................................................................... 134 1.4.12.2 Online - event short circuit .................................................................................................... 134 1.4.12.3 Online - event open circuit .................................................................................................... 135 1.4.12.4 Online - event InM deleted.................................................................................................... 135 1.4.12.5 Online - event InM programmed ........................................................................................... 135 1.4.12.6 Online - event InM read-in .................................................................................................... 135 1.4.12.7 Online - event InM Ident Data readonly ................................................................................. 135 1.4.12.8 Online - event InM readonly .................................................................................................. 136 1.4.12.9 Online - event MeM readonly ................................................................................................ 136 1.4.12.10 Online - status InM readonly Change not possible ........................................................... 136 1.4.12.11 Online - warning EMplus short circuit ............................................................................... 136 1.4.12.12 Online - warning EMplus open circuit ............................................................................... 136 1.4.12.13 Online - trip EMplus short circuit ...................................................................................... 137 1.4.12.14 Online - trip EMplus open circuit ...................................................................................... 137 1.4.12.15 Online - E module P ground-fault current ......................................................................... 137 1.4.12.16 Online - E module P last .................................................................................................. 137

1.5 Help texts for function blocks and connection blocks in the CFC Editor ................................. 138 1.5.1 Protection/Control................................................................................................................. 138 1.5.2 Extended protection ............................................................................................................. 138 1.5.3 Extended control .................................................................................................................. 138 1.5.4 Control stations .................................................................................................................... 138 1.5.5 Thermistor ............................................................................................................................ 139 1.5.6 Analog value recording ......................................................................................................... 139 1.5.7 Ground fault ......................................................................................................................... 139 1.5.8 Current limits ........................................................................................................................ 139 1.5.9 Voltage................................................................................................................................. 140 1.5.10 Power factor (cos phi)........................................................................................................... 140 1.5.11 Active power ........................................................................................................................ 140 1.5.12 0/4-20 mA (analog module 1) ............................................................................................... 140 1.5.13 Operation monitoring ............................................................................................................ 141 1.5.14 Monitoring interval for mandatory testing .............................................................................. 141 1.5.15 Temperature (TM1) .............................................................................................................. 141 1.5.16 BU inputs ............................................................................................................................. 141 1.5.17 OP buttons ........................................................................................................................... 142 1.5.18 DM1 inputs, DM2 inputs ....................................................................................................... 142 1.5.19 TM1 inputs ........................................................................................................................... 142 1.5.20 AM1 inputs ........................................................................................................................... 142 1.5.21 Cycl. receive byte 0, cycl. receive byte 1, cycl. receive byte 2/3, cycl. receive byte 4/5 .......... 143 1.5.22 BU outputs ........................................................................................................................... 143 1.5.23 OP LED................................................................................................................................ 143 1.5.24 DM1 outputs, DM2 outputs ................................................................................................... 143 1.5.25 AM1 output........................................................................................................................... 144

Table of contents



1.5.26 Cycl. send byte 0, cycl. send byte 1, cycl. send byte 2/3, cycl. send byte 4/9, cycl. send byte 10/19 .............................................................................................................................144

1.5.27 Test 1....................................................................................................................................144 1.5.28 Test 2....................................................................................................................................144 1.5.29 Reset 1,2,3 ...........................................................................................................................144 1.5.30 TPF .......................................................................................................................................145 1.5.31 External fault 1,2,3,4,5,6........................................................................................................145 1.5.32 OPO .....................................................................................................................................145 1.5.33 UVO ......................................................................................................................................145 1.5.34 Emergency start ....................................................................................................................146 1.5.35 Safety-related tripping ...........................................................................................................146 1.5.36 Watchdog..............................................................................................................................146 1.5.37 Time stamping ......................................................................................................................146 1.5.38 Truth table TT 1 to 9, 3I/1O ...................................................................................................146 1.5.39 Counters 1 to 4 .....................................................................................................................147 1.5.40 Timers 1 to 4 .........................................................................................................................147 1.5.41 Signal conditioning 1 to 4 ......................................................................................................147 1.5.42 Non-volatile elements 1 to 4 ..................................................................................................147 1.5.43 Flashing 1, 2, 3 .....................................................................................................................148 1.5.44 Flicker 1, 2, 3 ........................................................................................................................148 1.5.45 Limit monitors 1 to 4 ..............................................................................................................148 1.5.46 Calculator 1 to 2 ....................................................................................................................148 1.5.47 Device o.k. ............................................................................................................................149 1.5.48 Current flowing ......................................................................................................................149 1.5.49 Device test active ..................................................................................................................149 1.5.50 General fault .........................................................................................................................149 1.5.51 General warning ....................................................................................................................149 1.5.52 Remote mode .......................................................................................................................149 1.5.53 Hardware fault basic unit .......................................................................................................149 1.5.54 Module fault ..........................................................................................................................150 1.5.55 Temporary components.........................................................................................................150 1.5.56 Configuration error ................................................................................................................150 1.5.57 Parameterization ...................................................................................................................150 1.5.58 '0' ..........................................................................................................................................150 1.5.59 '1' ..........................................................................................................................................150 1.5.60 Fixed level .............................................................................................................................150 1.5.61 Configured operator panel missing ........................................................................................150 1.5.62 Phase unbalance ..................................................................................................................150 1.5.63 Voltage U_min .......................................................................................................................151 1.5.64 Power factor (cos phi) ...........................................................................................................151 1.5.65 Thermal motor model ............................................................................................................151 1.5.66 Time to trip ............................................................................................................................151 1.5.67 Remaining cooling down period .............................................................................................151 1.5.68 Last trip current (% of le) .......................................................................................................151 1.5.69 Stop time...............................................................................................................................151 1.5.70 Max. current I_max (% of Ie) ..................................................................................................151 1.5.71 Current I_L1 (% of Ie), current I_L2 (% of Ie), current I_L3 (% of Ie) .......................................151 1.5.72 Number of overload trips .......................................................................................................152 1.5.73 Int. number of overload trips ..................................................................................................152 1.5.74 Number of parameterizations ................................................................................................152 1.5.75 Phase voltage UL1-N, phase voltage UL2-N, phase voltage UL3-N .......................................152 1.5.76 Motor operating hours (H word), motor operating hours (L word) ...........................................152

Table of contents



1.5.77 Int. motor operating hours (H word), int. motor operating hours (L word) ............................... 152 1.5.78 Motor operating hours (H word), motor operating hours (L word) .......................................... 152 1.5.79 Number of starts (H word), number of starts (L word) ............................................................ 152 1.5.80 Int. number of starts clockwise (H word), int. number of starts clockwise (L word) ................. 152 1.5.81 Int. number of starts counterclockwise (H word), int. number of starts counterclockwise

(L word)................................................................................................................................ 153 1.5.82 Consumed energy (H word), consumed energy (L word) ...................................................... 153 1.5.83 Active power P (H word), active power P (L word) ................................................................ 153 1.5.84 Apparent power S (H word), apparent power S (L word) ....................................................... 153 1.5.85 Max. current I_max (10 mA) ................................................................................................. 153 1.5.86 Current I_L1 (10 mA), current I_L2 (10 mA), current I_L3 (10 mA) ......................................... 153 1.5.87 Max. current I_max (100 mA)................................................................................................ 153 1.5.88 Current I_L1 (100 mA), current I_L2 (100 mA), current I_L3 (100 mA) ................................... 153

2 General information ................................................................................................................... 155

2.1 SIMOCODE ES - Online Help............................................................................................... 155

2.2 System manuals for SIMOCODE pro .................................................................................... 156

3 Device configuration .................................................................................................................. 157

4 Diagnostics & Online.................................................................................................................. 161

4.1 General information .............................................................................................................. 161

4.2 Diagnostics status ................................................................................................................ 163

4.3 Channel diagnostics ............................................................................................................. 164

5 Parameterization of the modules ................................................................................................. 165

5.1 Identification ......................................................................................................................... 165 5.1.1 Device .................................................................................................................................. 165 5.1.2 Marking ................................................................................................................................ 165

5.2 Libraries ............................................................................................................................... 166

5.3 Application selection ............................................................................................................. 167

5.4 Fieldbus interface ................................................................................................................. 169 5.4.1 Device parameters ............................................................................................................... 169 5.4.2 PROFIBUS address ............................................................................................................. 171

5.5 Motor protection ................................................................................................................... 173 5.5.1 Motor protection introduction ................................................................................................ 173 5.5.2 Overload protection .............................................................................................................. 174 5.5.3 Unbalance protection ........................................................................................................... 179 5.5.4 Blocking protection ............................................................................................................... 180 5.5.5 Thermistor protection ........................................................................................................... 181

5.6 Motor control ........................................................................................................................ 183 5.6.1 Control stations .................................................................................................................... 183 5.6.2 Operating modes .................................................................................................................. 185 5.6.3 Mode selector ...................................................................................................................... 186 5.6.4 Enables ................................................................................................................................ 186 5.6.5 Enables and enabled control command schematic ............................................................... 187 5.6.6 Control function .................................................................................................................... 188 5.6.7 Contactor controls ................................................................................................................ 189 5.6.8 Lamp controls and status information ................................................................................... 190

Table of contents



5.6.9 Non-maintained command mode ...........................................................................................191 5.6.10 Saving change-over command ..............................................................................................191 5.6.11 DM-F LOCAL/DM-F PROFIsafe - Separate function from control function ..............................191 5.6.12 Load type ..............................................................................................................................192 5.6.13 Feedback time ......................................................................................................................192 5.6.14 Execution time ......................................................................................................................192 5.6.15 Interlocking time ....................................................................................................................193 5.6.16 Change-over pause ...............................................................................................................193 5.6.17 Max. star time .......................................................................................................................193 5.6.18 Current measuring module built into the delta circuit or the supply cable ................................193 5.6.19 Scope and application ...........................................................................................................194

5.7 Machine monitoring ...............................................................................................................195 5.7.1 Ground fault ..........................................................................................................................195 5.7.2 Internal ground-fault monitoring .............................................................................................195 5.7.3 External ground-fault monitoring ............................................................................................196 5.7.4 Current limits .........................................................................................................................198 5.7.5 Current limits I> (upper limit)..................................................................................................198 5.7.6 Current limits I< (lower limit) ..................................................................................................199 5.7.7 Voltage monitoring ................................................................................................................201 5.7.8 Cos phi monitoring ................................................................................................................203 5.7.9 Active power monitoring ........................................................................................................204 5.7.10 0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring ........................................................................................................205 5.7.11 Hysteresis 0 / 4 - 20 mA ........................................................................................................207 5.7.12 Operation monitoring .............................................................................................................207 5.7.13 Operating hours monitoring ...................................................................................................209 5.7.14 Stop time monitoring .............................................................................................................209 5.7.15 Number of starts monitoring motor.........................................................................................210 5.7.16 Temperature monitoring (analog) ..........................................................................................211 5.7.17 Hysteresis for temperature ....................................................................................................213 5.7.18 Monitoring interval for mandatory testing ...............................................................................213

5.8 Inputs ....................................................................................................................................215 5.8.1 Inputs ....................................................................................................................................215 5.8.2 Basic unit inputs ....................................................................................................................215 5.8.3 Operator panel buttons ..........................................................................................................216 5.8.4 Digital module inputs .............................................................................................................218 5.8.5 Temperature module inputs ...................................................................................................221 5.8.6 Analog module inputs ............................................................................................................223 5.8.7 Cyclic receive ........................................................................................................................225 5.8.8 Acyclic receive ......................................................................................................................226 5.8.9 Analog value recording ..........................................................................................................227 5.8.10 3UF50 compatibility mode .....................................................................................................229

5.9 Outputs .................................................................................................................................231 5.9.1 Basic unit ..............................................................................................................................231 5.9.2 Operator panel LED ..............................................................................................................233 5.9.3 Digital module .......................................................................................................................234 5.9.4 Analog module ......................................................................................................................236 5.9.5 Cyclic send data ....................................................................................................................238 5.9.6 Acyclic send data ..................................................................................................................240

5.10 Standard functions ................................................................................................................242 5.10.1 Test/Reset ............................................................................................................................242

Table of contents



5.10.2 Test position feedback (TPF) ................................................................................................ 245 5.10.3 External fault ........................................................................................................................ 247 5.10.4 Operational protection OFF (OPO) ....................................................................................... 250 5.10.5 Power failure monitoring (UVO) ............................................................................................ 251 5.10.6 Emergency start ................................................................................................................... 253 5.10.7 Safety-related tripping .......................................................................................................... 254 5.10.8 Watchdog (Bus monitoring, PLC/PCS monitoring) ................................................................ 258 5.10.9 Time stamping...................................................................................................................... 259

5.11 Logic modules ...................................................................................................................... 262 5.11.1 Truth table 2I/1O .................................................................................................................. 262 5.11.2 Truth table 3I/1O .................................................................................................................. 262 5.11.3 Truth table 5I/2O .................................................................................................................. 264 5.11.4 Counter ................................................................................................................................ 265 5.11.5 Timer ................................................................................................................................... 267 5.11.6 Signal conditioning ............................................................................................................... 268 5.11.7 Non-volatile element ............................................................................................................. 270 5.11.8 Flashing ............................................................................................................................... 272 5.11.9 Flicker .................................................................................................................................. 273 5.11.10 Limit monitor ........................................................................................................................ 274 5.11.11 Calculators ........................................................................................................................... 276 5.11.11.1 Calculator 1 ..................................................................................................................... 276 5.11.11.2 Calculator 2 ..................................................................................................................... 279

5.12 3UF50 compatibility mode .................................................................................................... 282 5.12.1 3UF50 compatibility mode - diagram of the data ................................................................... 282

6 Commissioning ......................................................................................................................... 287

6.1 Control/status information ..................................................................................................... 287

6.2 Faults ................................................................................................................................... 288

6.3 Warnings .............................................................................................................................. 294

6.4 Messages ............................................................................................................................ 298

6.5 Measured values .................................................................................................................. 300

6.6 Service data - statistical data ................................................................................................ 302

6.7 Error buffer/error protocol ..................................................................................................... 304

6.8 Test...................................................................................................................................... 305

6.9 Command ............................................................................................................................ 306

6.10 Password ............................................................................................................................. 308

6.11 Parameter comparison ......................................................................................................... 308

6.12 Actual configuration .............................................................................................................. 309

6.13 Analog value recording ......................................................................................................... 310

7 Working with continuous function charts (CFCs) for SIMOCODE..................................................... 313

7.1 Description ........................................................................................................................... 313

7.2 Overview - Toolbar - Menu commands ................................................................................. 314

7.3 Calling the graphic editor ...................................................................................................... 314

Table of contents



7.4 Functions ..............................................................................................................................315 7.4.1 Connecting ............................................................................................................................315 7.4.2 Selecting a function block or connection block and using it in the plan ...................................316 7.4.3 Select all ...............................................................................................................................316 7.4.4 Move plan .............................................................................................................................316 7.4.5 Monitoring .............................................................................................................................317 7.4.6 Representations ....................................................................................................................317 7.4.6.1 Position blocks according to data flow ...................................................................................317 7.4.6.2 Set colors ..............................................................................................................................318 7.4.6.3 Switching the grid on and off .................................................................................................318

7.5 Functions of the toolbar .........................................................................................................319 7.5.1 Transferring the online data to the hardware ..........................................................................319 7.5.2 Transferring the online data to the offline project ...................................................................319 7.5.3 Insert text field .......................................................................................................................319 7.5.4 Highlight signal flow...............................................................................................................320 7.5.5 Select view ............................................................................................................................321 7.5.6 Zoom in .................................................................................................................................321 7.5.7 Show all ................................................................................................................................321 7.5.8 Adapting the selection to the size of the work area ................................................................321 7.5.9 Zoom out...............................................................................................................................322 7.5.10 Show/hide unused connections .............................................................................................322 7.5.11 Activate/deactivate monitoring ...............................................................................................322 7.5.12 Delete ...................................................................................................................................322

8 Migrating a SIMOCODE pro project.............................................................................................. 323 8.1 Migrating projects ..................................................................................................................323 8.2 Launching the migration ........................................................................................................324

9 Additional information ................................................................................................................. 325

9.1 Service ..................................................................................................................................325 9.1.1 Active control stations, contactor controls and lamp controls ..................................................325 9.1.2 Diagnostics via LED display ..................................................................................................325 9.1.3 Restoring factory settings ......................................................................................................330 9.1.4 Setting the PROFIBUS DP address .......................................................................................331 9.1.5 Backing up and saving parameters ........................................................................................332 9.1.6 Configuring the diagnostics response ....................................................................................333 9.1.7 Setting the safety relay functions ...........................................................................................333 9.1.8 Replacing SIMOCODE pro components ................................................................................334 9.1.8.1 Replacing the basic unit ........................................................................................................334 9.1.8.2 Replacing the expansion module ...........................................................................................334 9.1.8.3 Replacing a DM-F .................................................................................................................335 9.1.8.4 Replacing the current measuring module and the current/voltage measuring module .............335

9.2 Data sets...............................................................................................................................336 9.2.1 Data set 92 - Device diagnostics ...........................................................................................336 9.2.2 Data set 94 - Measured values ..............................................................................................336 9.2.3 Data set 95 - Service and statistical data ...............................................................................336

9.3 Examples ..............................................................................................................................337 9.3.1 Examples for the conversion factor ........................................................................................337 9.3.2 Limit monitor example ...........................................................................................................338 9.3.3 Calculator examples ..............................................................................................................338

Index ........................................................................................................................................ 341



Tooltips SIRIUS + SIMOCODE 1 1.1 Tooltips SiriusPLAT without links

1.1.1 Device

1.1.1.1 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Order number Display of order number (MLFB) of the device (MLFB = Machine-readable product designation).

1.1.1.2 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Short code Short code of the device.

1.1.1.3 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Manager Name of the manufacturer.

1.1.1.4 Module parameter - Identification - Device - PI profile Corresponds to the I&M 0 value: Profile_ID

1.1.1.5 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Device family Name of the overall device family, e.g. switching devices.

1.1.1.6 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Device subfamily Name of the subfamily subordinate to the device family. e.g. Motor Management System.

1.1.1.7 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Device class Name of the device class subordinate to the subfamily, e.g. SIMOCODE pro C.

1.1.1.8 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Ident No. Vendor-internal information.

Tooltips SIRIUS + SIMOCODE 1.1 Tooltips SiriusPLAT without links



1.1.1.9 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Hardware revision level Corresponds to the I&M 0 value: Hardware_Revision.

1.1.1.10 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Firmware revision level Corresponds to the I&M 0 value: Software_Revision.

1.1.1.11 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Revision counter Corresponds to the I&M 0 value: Rev_Counter.

1.1.1.12 Module parameter - Identification - Device - IaM version Corresponds to the I&M 0 value: IM_Version.

1.1.1.13 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Supported IaM data Corresponds to the I&M 0 value: IM_Support.

1.1.1.14 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Time stamp Vendor-internal information.

1.1.2 Fieldbus interface

1.1.2.1 Fieldbus interface - Start-up parameter block Activate the "Startup parameter block active" checkbox if you want to prevent the parameter data that is currently stored by SIMOCODE pro being overwritten by the PROFIBUS DP master during startup. In this case, you can only modify parameter data using the SIMOCODE ES software.

Default setting:

● Activated: When parameterizing in SIMOCODE ES directly

● deactivated: In accordance with factory setting or when integrated via SIMOCODE pro.

1.1.2.2 Fieldbus interface - DP address Selection of the PROFIBUS DP address. A node's address must be unique within a PROFIBUS DP network. Select a unique DP address here. Address 126 is generally assigned to a factory-set device.

Tooltips SIRIUS + SIMOCODE 1.1 Tooltips SiriusPLAT without links



1.1.2.3 Fieldbus interface - PROFIsafe address Displays the set PROFIsafe address.

Notice

At this point, only the PROFIsafe address set on the module is displayed. You must set the PROFIsafe address direct via the DIP switch of the PROFIsafe digital module!

1.1.2.4 Fieldbus interface - Transmission speed No setting possible. The device detects the transmission speed (baud rate on PROFIBUS DP) automatically. Baud rates of up to 12 Mbit/s are possible.

1.1.2.5 Fieldbus interface - Basic type Select the basic type (1 or 2). The basic type selected determines the structure and length of the cyclic data exchanged between the PROFIBUS DP master and the PROFIBUS DP slave. You will find basic type selection tables in the SIMOCODE pro System Manual, in the section titled "Telegram description and data access".

1.1.2.6 Fieldbus interface - Diagnosis for process messages Activated: Event messages are transferred via PROFIBUS DP in the form of an alarm.

Deactivated: Event messages are not transferred via PROFIBUS DP.

1.1.2.7 Fieldbus interface - Diagnosis for process warnings Activated: Warning messages are transferred via PROFIBUS DP in the form of an alarm.

Deactivated: Warning messages are not transferred via PROFIBUS DP.

1.1.2.8 Fieldbus interface - Diagnosis for process faults Activated: Trip messages are transferred via PROFIBUS DP in the form of an alarm.

Deactivated: Trip messages are not transferred via PROFIBUS DP.

1.1.2.9 Fieldbus interface - Diagnosis for device faults Activated: Device faults are transferred via PROFIBUS DP in the form of a diagnostic alarm.

Deactivated: Device faults are not transferred via PROFIBUS DP.

Tooltips SIRIUS + SIMOCODE 1.2 Tooltips SiriusPLAT



1.2 Tooltips SiriusPLAT

1.2.1 Device

1.2.1.1 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Order number Display of order number (MLFB) of the device (MLFB = Machine-readable product designation).

See also Device (5)

1.2.1.2 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Short code Short code of the device.

See also Device (Page 165)

1.2.1.3 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Manager Name of the manufacturer.


1.2.1.4 Module parameter - Identification - Device - PI profile Corresponds to the I&M 0 value: Profile_ID


1.2.1.5 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Device family Name of the overall device family, e.g. switching devices.





1.2.1.6 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Device subfamily Name of the subfamily subordinate to the device family. e.g. Motor Management System.


1.2.1.7 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Device class Name of the device class subordinate to the subfamily, e.g. SIMOCODE pro C.


1.2.1.8 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Ident No. Vendor-internal information.


1.2.1.9 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Hardware revision level Corresponds to the I&M 0 value: Hardware_Revision.


1.2.1.10 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Firmware revision level Corresponds to the I&M 0 value: Software_Revision.


1.2.1.11 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Revision counter Corresponds to the I&M 0 value: Rev_Counter.





1.2.1.12 Module parameter - Identification - Device - IaM version Corresponds to the I&M 0 value: IM_Version.


1.2.1.13 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Supported IaM data Corresponds to the I&M 0 value: IM_Support.


1.2.1.14 Module parameter - Identification - Device - Time stamp Vendor-internal information.


Time stamping (Page 259)

1.2.2 Fieldbus interface

1.2.2.1 Fieldbus interface - Start-up parameter block Activate the "Startup parameter block active" checkbox if you want to prevent the parameter data that is currently stored by SIMOCODE pro being overwritten by the PROFIBUS DP master during startup. In this case, you can only modify parameter data using the SIMOCODE ES software.

Default setting:

● Activated: When parameterizing in SIMOCODE ES directly

● deactivated: In accordance with factory setting or when integrated via SIMOCODE pro.

See also Fieldbus interface (Page 169)




1.2.2.2 Fieldbus interface - DP address Selection of the PROFIBUS DP address. A node's address must be unique within a PROFIBUS DP network. Select a unique DP address here. Address 126 is generally assigned to a factory-set device.


1.2.2.3 Fieldbus interface - PROFIsafe address Displays the set PROFIsafe address.

Notice

At this point, only the PROFIsafe address set on the module is displayed. You must set the PROFIsafe address direct via the DIP switch of the PROFIsafe digital module!


1.2.2.4 Fieldbus interface - Transmission speed No setting possible. The device detects the transmission speed (baud rate on PROFIBUS DP) automatically. Baud rates of up to 12 Mbit/s are possible.


1.2.2.5 Fieldbus interface - Basic type Select the basic type (1 or 2). The basic type selected determines the structure and length of the cyclic data exchanged between the PROFIBUS DP master and the PROFIBUS DP slave. You will find basic type selection tables in the SIMOCODE pro System Manual, in the section titled "Telegram description and data access".





1.2.2.6 Fieldbus interface - Diagnosis for process messages Activated: Event messages are transferred via PROFIBUS DP in the form of an alarm.

Deactivated: Event messages are not transferred via PROFIBUS DP.


1.2.2.7 Fieldbus interface - Diagnosis for process warnings Activated: Warning messages are transferred via PROFIBUS DP in the form of an alarm.

Deactivated: Warning messages are not transferred via PROFIBUS DP.


1.2.2.8 Fieldbus interface - Diagnosis for process faults Activated: Trip messages are transferred via PROFIBUS DP in the form of an alarm.

Deactivated: Trip messages are not transferred via PROFIBUS DP.


1.2.2.9 Fieldbus interface - Diagnosis for device faults Activated: Device faults are transferred via PROFIBUS DP in the form of a diagnostic alarm.

Deactivated: Device faults are not transferred via PROFIBUS DP.


Tooltips SIRIUS + SIMOCODE 1.3 Module parameters without links



1.3 Module parameters without links

1.3.1 Identification

1.3.1.1 Marking

Module parameter - Identification - Designation Entry of any text, e.g. for plant documentation.

1.3.2 Configuration

1.3.2.1 Configuration - Selection of an initialization module Selection of an initialization module.

The initialization module allows all system parameter settings to be backed up and transferred to a new system (in the case of device replacement, for example) without the need for additional resources or detailed specialist expertise.

Note

The SIMOCODE pro S and SIMOCODE pro V basic units from product version *E09* and higher do not support the initialization module.

1.3.2.2 Configuration - Application (control function) - SIMOCODE pro C basic unit Selection of one of the following applications (control functions) for the SIMOCODE pro C basic unit:

● Overload relay

● Direct starter

● Reversing starter

● Molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB)

1.3.2.3 Configuration - Application (control function) - SIMOCODE pro V basic unit Selection of one of the following applications (control functions) for the SIMOCODE pro V basic unit:

● Overload relay

● Direct starter





● Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)

● Star-delta starter

● Star-delta reversing starter

● Dahlander

● Dahlander reversing starter

● Pole-changing starter

● Pole-changing reversing starter

● Valve

● Positioner 1

● Positioner 2

● Positioner 3

● Positioner 4

● Positioner 5

● Soft starter with reversing contactor

● Soft starter.

1.3.2.4 Configuration - Application (control function) - SIMOCODE pro S basic unit Selection of one of the following applications (control functions) for the SIMOCODE pro S basic unit:

● Overload relay

● Direct starter




● Soft starter

1.3.2.5 Configuration - Thermistor Activate the "Thermistor" checkbox if you want to use the thermistor (binary PTC) to monitor motor temperature. When the checkbox is activated, the "Thermistor" motor protection dialog appears. Here you can define the response when the trip level is reached and the response in the event of a sensor fault.




1.3.2.6 Configuration - Removal error when operator panel is removed If "Yes" is set in the dropdown menu, the message "Removal error" will be output if a configured operator panel without display is removed.

If "No" is set, the message "Removal error" will not be displayed if the operator panel is removed during operation. Use this setting if an operator panel is connected temporarily.

Notice

If the operator panel is the motor's only active control station, the motor might not shut down again!

1.3.3 Motor protection

1.3.3.1 Overload/Unbalance/Stalled rotor

Motor protection - Voltage measurement - Load type Here you select whether SIMOCODE pro is to protect a 1-phase or a 3-phase load (default setting: 3-phase). For a "1-phase" type of load, proceed as follows:

● Deactivate the internal ground-fault detection and unbalance protection

● Route just one of the two conductors through any feed-through opening on the current measuring module.

Phase failure monitoring is deactivated automatically.

Overload protection - Type of load Here you select whether SIMOCODE pro is to protect a 1-phase or a 3-phase load (default setting).

For a "1-phase" type of load, proceed as follows:

● If necessary, deactivate internal ground-fault detection.

● Route just one of the two conductors through any feed-through opening on the current measuring module. Phase failure monitoring is deactivated automatically.

Overload protection - Reset Manual (default setting): Faults must be acknowledged by a reset signal:

● Via the "Reset" button on the basic unit or

● Via the "Reset" button on the operator panel or

● Via "Standard functions -> Reset" (the "Reset - Input" inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, e.g. using a reset via the bus).




Motor protection - Thermistor - Response when trip level reached Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the thermistor trip level is exceeded (default setting: tripping).

Motor protection - Thermistor - Response to sensor fault Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond in the event of a short circuit or if an open circuit occurs in the thermistor cable (default setting: warning).

Motor protection - Blocking protection - Delay Selection of the delay time (0 to 25.5 s, default setting: 0.5 s) for the set response (signaling, warning, tripping). This setting can be modified during operation.

Overload protection - Cooling down period Time setting (60 to 6553.5 s, default setting: 300 s), after which an overload trip can be reset. This setting can be modified during operation.

Overload protection - Pause time Time setting (0 to 6553.5 s, default setting: 0 s) for the cooling down response of the motor when tripped under normal operating conditions (not in the case of an overload trip). This setting can be modified during operation. After this time the "thermal motor model" will be deleted and a new cold start will be possible. This means that many startups can be performed in a short space of time.

Motor protection - Response when trip level reached Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the trip level is exceeded in the event of an overload (default setting: tripping).

Motor protection - Overload protection - Response when prewarning threshold reached Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the prewarning level (I> 115 % Is) is exceeded in the event of an overload (default setting: warning).

Motor protection - Overload protection - Response to unbalance Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond to a phase unbalance (default setting: warning).




Overload protection - Class The Class (tripping class) defines the maximum time within which SIMOCODE pro must trip from cold at 7.2 times the setting current (motor protection to IEC 60947). You can choose between 8 different settings (Class 5 to Class 40). Please note that with startups > Class 10, the permissible AC3 current of the contactor may have to be reduced (derated), i.e. you must select a larger contactor. The tripping class can be modified during operation.

Motor protection - Delay in the event of overload operation (delay prewarning) Define how long (default setting: 0.5 s) the prewarning level (1.15 x Is) must be constantly exceeded before SIMOCODE pro executes the desired response. If no setting is made, there will be no response. In the event of a loss of phase or an unbalance > 50%, the prewarning level will be reached earlier, at approximately 0.85 x Is. You can change this setting during operation.

Motor protection - Unbalance protection threshold Setting of the unbalance protection level (0 to 100%, default setting: 40%), which must be exceeded for SIMOCODE pro to respond. Loss of one phase corresponds to an unbalance of 100%. This setting can be modified during operation.

Overload protection - Blocking protection threshold Setting of a blocking threshold for the motor current (0 to 1020% of the set current Is in 4% increments, default setting: 0) at which SIMOCODE pro will react as per the selected response. The response is triggered as soon as the motor current exceeds this threshold. This setting can be modified during operation.

Overload protection - Set current Is1 Setting of the motor rated current. This value can be found on the rating plate of the motor. The overload trip characteristic is calculated based on this value. The setting range depends on the current measuring module or current/voltage measuring module selected. This setting can be modified during operation.

Overload protection - Is1-Is2 transformation ratio active Activate this checkbox if you are using an interposing transformer or looping the main current lines through the current measuring module or the current/voltage measuring module several times. If the checkbox is activated, you can enter a transformation ratio.

Overload protection - Is1 transformation ratio - Numerator Enter the transformation ratio of the interposing transformer (primary) here, with the "Is1 transformation ratio - Active" checkbox activated. Range: 0 to 8191.875 (default: 0).




Overload protection - Is1 transformation ratio - Denominator Enter the transformation ratio of the interposing transformer (secondary) here, with the "Is1 transformation ratio - Active" checkbox activated. Range: 0 to 15 (default: 0).



Overload protection - Set current Is2 Set current Is2 can only be set for control functions with two speeds (Dahlander, Dahlander reversing starter, pole-changing starter, pole-changing reversing starter) as a way of ensuring that appropriate overload protection is also provided for the higher of the two speeds. Is2 is usually set to a value higher than Is1. The setting range depends on the selected current measuring module or current/voltage measuring module. This setting can be modified during operation.

Motor protection - Overload protection - Delay in the event of unbalance Selection of the delay time (0 to 25.5 s, default setting: 0.5 s) for the set response (signaling, warning, tripping).

Motor protection - Blocking protection - Response when blocking threshold reached Here you can select how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the blocking threshold is exceeded (default setting: deactivated).




1.3.4 Motor control

1.3.4.1 Control stations

Control stations - Operation mode switch S1, S2 You can use the operation mode switch to change over between the following operating modes using any signals (any sockets, e.g. device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits, etc.):

● Local 1

● Local 2

● Local 3

● Remote/Automatic

Input S1: Local 1 (0), Local 2 (0), Local 3 (1), Remote/Auto (1)


Control stations - Activate enables Enables, which must be activated, are assigned to the "ON" and "OFF" control commands for each control station in every operating mode. Activate the enables for the "ON" and "OFF" control commands ("ON" only, "OFF" only, or "ON" and "OFF") for each control station, depending on whether the control station is to be able to only switch the motor on, only switch it off, or switch it on and off.

Control station - PLC/PCS Select any socket (typically the sockets of the "Cyclic receive" function blocks).

Control station - PC This control station is primarily intended for switching commands on any PC which, along with the automation system, is used as a second master on the PROFIBUS DP.

The control commands are received from the PROFIBUS DPV1 via the acyclic control telegram.

No connection needs to be established if the SIMOCODE ES Professional or SIMATIC PDM PC software is connected to SIMOCODE pro via PROFIBUS DP. In this case, the control commands will be implemented automatically via the PC control station [DPV1].

Control station - Operator panel Select any socket (typically the sockets of the "Operator panel buttons" function block).

Since the operator panel only has four buttons for controlling the motor feeder, one button must be used as a speed change-over button for control functions with two speeds and two directions of rotation. For this purpose, this button must be assigned to the internal control command "[OP]<>/<<>>".




If the SIMOCODE ES PC software on a PC is connected to SIMOCODE pro via the system interface, its control commands are implemented automatically via the "Operator panel (OP)" control station and must be enabled here as applicable.

Control station - Local control Select any socket (typically the sockets of the "BU inputs" and "DM1 inputs" or "DM2 inputs" function blocks).

The OFF command "LC OFF" is 0-active. This ensures that SIMOCODE pro shuts the motor down if an open circuit occurs in the incoming cable, for example. The precondition is that the control station is active.

1.3.4.2 Control function

Control function - Auxiliary control input FC The "Auxiliary control input FC" function block is an expanded status message for the "Positioner" or "Valve" control functions.

PC (Feedback Close) can be connected to any socket, though usually with that of an input to which the limit switch is wired.

Control function - Auxiliary control input FO The "Auxiliary control input FO" function block is an expanded status message for the "Positioner" or "Valve" control functions.

PO (Feedback Open) can be connected to any socket, though usually with that of an input to which the limit switch is wired.

Control function - Auxiliary control input TC The "Auxiliary control input TC" function block is an expanded status message for the "Positioner" or "Valve" control functions.

TC (Torque Closed) can be connected to any socket, though usually with that of an input to which the torque switch is wired.

Control function - Auxiliary control input TO The "Auxiliary control input TO" function block is an expanded status message for the "Positioner" or "Valve" control functions.

TO (Torque Open) can be connected to any socket, though usually with that of an input to which the torque switch is wired.




Control function - Control commands Plugs of the "Control stations" function block. Connect these plugs to any sockets (e.g. binary inputs on the basic unit, PROFIBUS DP control bits) so that the control commands can be implemented. Each control station can output up to five different control commands (via the plugs ON <<, ON <, OFF, ON >, ON >>).

The number of active plugs depends on the control function selected. With a direct-on-line starter, for example, only the plugs "ON >" and "OFF" are active.

Control function - Auxiliary control input Feedback ON SIMOCODE pro monitors statuses using the "Feedback ON" auxiliary control channel, which is usually derived directly from the current flow in the main circuit, via the current measuring modules. Select any socket (usually the preset socket, "Status - Current flowing").

Control function "Star-delta starter" and "Star-delta reversing starter" - Max. time for star mode Setting of the maximum time for star mode when switching over from star to delta if the current-dependent reversing point could not be detected (0 to 255 s, default setting: 20 s).

Control function "Star-delta starter" and "Star-delta reversing starter" - Integrated current measuring module

● Select "Incoming cable" if the current measuring module is integrated in the motor supply cable.

● Select "In delta" if the current measuring module is integrated in the star-delta circuit's delta. The set current Is is reduced to Irated x √3.

Control function - Type of load Select either "motor" (default setting) or "resistive load" (e.g. heating). If "Motor" is selected, following an ON command "Status - Start active" will be set for the duration of the "Class" that has been set. All current-dependent monitoring functions (stalled rotor, current limits, cos phi, active power) only become active once the set "Class" time has elapsed. If "Resistive load" is selected, "Status - Start active" will not be set. All current-dependent monitoring functions (stalled rotor, current limits, cos phi, active power) become active immediately after the start.

Control function - Save switching command ● Deactivated: Change-over commands from one direction of rotation/speed to the other

are only implemented if "OFF" has previously been set and once the interlocking time/change-over pause has elapsed. This setting is the default and the one which is normally used.

● Activated: Change-over commands from one direction of rotation/speed to the other are implemented without a previous "OFF", once the interlocking time/change-over pause has elapsed.




Control function - DM-F LOCAL/PROFIsafe - Separate function from control function ● Deactivated: A safety-related disconnection by the DM-F modules is also effected by the

SIMOCODE pro control function, avoiding additional follow-on fault messages. Select this setting for applications where the safety-related disconnection directly affects the motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.

● Activated: A safety-related disconnection by the DM-F modules does not affect the SIMOCODE pro control function. Select this setting for applications where the safety-related disconnection is not in any way linked to the motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.

Control function - Jog mode ● Deactivated (default setting): Normal mode: In this operating mode, a control command

(ON <, ON <<, ON >, ON >>) is saved (corresponds to contactor locking).

● Activated: If you want to switch a motor on and off, either just the one time or on a repeated temporary basis, activate the "Jog mode" checkbox. In this operating mode, a control command (ON <, ON <<, ON >, ON >>) only remains active as long as a "high signal" is present at the corresponding plugs.

Control function - Change-over pause ● Control functions "Dahlander" and "Pole-changing starter": The change-over from the fast

speed to the slow speed can be delayed by the time set for the change-over pause (0 to 655.35 s, default setting: 0).

● Control function "star/delta": The time that elapses between switching off the star contactor and switching on the delta contactor is extended by the time set for the change-over pause (0 to 655.35 s, default setting: 0). This setting can be modified during operation.

Control function - Execution time Selection of the execution time (0 to 6553.5 s, default setting: 1.0 s) for monitoring the start and shutdown cycle. The start and shutdown cycle must be completed within the set time, otherwise a fault message will be output. Following an "ON" control command, SIMOCODE pro must measure the current in the main circuit within the execution time, otherwise the "Fault - Execution ON command" error message will be output. Following an "OFF" control command, SIMOCODE pro must not measure any current in the main circuit once the execution time has elapsed, otherwise the "Fault - Execution OFF command" error message will be output. This setting can be modified during operation.

Control function - Interlocking time Setting an interlocking time (0 to 255 s, default 0 s) for the line contactors in the case of the control functions with reversing function and pole-changing function. With the interlocking time, the change-over of the direction of rotation or the change-over of the speed from fast to slow can be time-delayed. This setting can be modified during operation.




Control function - Check-back time Setting of a feedback time (0 to 25.5 s, default setting: 0.5 s) for monitoring the status of the feeder (ON or OFF). If the status is "ON", the current flow may be interrupted for the duration of the feedback time, which will then be followed by "Fault - Feedback ON". If the status is "OFF", current may flow for the duration of the feedback time, which will then be followed by "Fault - Feedback (FB) OFF". This setting can be modified during operation.

1.3.5 Machine monitoring

1.3.5.1 Ground fault

EMplus - Response to sensor fault Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond in the event of a sensor fault (default setting: deactivated).

EMplus - Monitoring - Warning Unless deactivated, this function is always active, independent of whether the motor is running or not (operating state "ON").

Here you can specify in which motor operating states the warning level is to take effect:

● always (on) (default setting): warning level always active, regardless of whether the motor is running or at a standstill

● if motor is running, except TPF (run): warning level only active if motor is running

● if motor is running, except with TPF, with startup override (run+): warning level only active if motor is running and the start procedure has been completed.

EMplus - Monitoring Unless deactivated, this function is always active, independent of whether the motor is running or not (operating state "ON").

Here you can specify in which motor operating states the trip level is to take effect:

● always (on) (default setting): trip level always active, regardless of whether the motor is running or at a standstill

● if motor is running, except TPF (run): trip level only active if motor is running

● if motor is running, except with TPF, with startup override (run+): trip level only active if motor is running and the start procedure has been completed.

EMplus - Hysteresis Here you can set the hysteresis for the ground-fault current (0 to 15% of the threshold value in 1% increments, default setting: 5 %)




EMplus - Delay - Warning Selection of the delay time (0 to 25.5 s, default setting: 0.1 s) for the set response (signaling, warning). Can be modified during operation.

EMplus - Trip level Setting a trip level for the ground-fault current (30 mA to 40 A in 10 mA increments, default: 1000 mA). If the ground-fault current exceeds the trip level, the ground-fault current monitor responds. This setting can be modified during operation.

EMplus - Warning level Setting a warning level for the ground-fault current (20 mA to 40 A in 10 mA increments, default: 500 mA). If the ground-fault current exceeds the warning level, the ground-fault current monitor responds. This setting can be modified during operation.

EMplus - Response to warning of an external ground fault Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the warning level for the ground-fault current is undershot (default setting: deactivated).

EMplus - Response to an external ground fault Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the trip level for the ground-fault current is undershot (default setting: signaling)

EMplus - Delay - Trip/warning level Selection of the delay time (0 to 25.5 s) for the set response (signaling, warning, tripping).

Setting range for the delay time if the trip level is undershot: 0 to 25.5 s (default setting: 0.5 s) 1)

Setting range for the delay time if the warning level is undershot: 0 to 25.5 s (default setting: 0.1 s) 1)

The delay time can be modified during operation. 1) Extension of the residual current transformer delay

External ground-fault monitoring - Delay Selection of the delay time (0 to 25.5 s, default setting: 0.5 s), which is an additional delay to that for the summation current transformer, for the set response (signaling, warning, tripping). The delay time can be modified during operation.

Internal ground-fault monitoring - Response Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond to an internal ground fault (default setting: deactivated).




External ground-fault monitoring - Response Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond to an external ground fault (default setting: signaling).

Internal ground-fault monitoring - Delay Selection of the delay time (0 to 25.5 s, default setting: 0.5 s) for the set response (signaling, warning, tripping). The delay time can be modified during operation.

1.3.5.2 Current limits

Monitoring current limits - Trip level I> (high limit) Setting of a trip level I> for the motor current (0 to 1020% of setting current Is in 4% increments, default setting: 0), at which SIMOCODE pro will generate a message or trip the motor. The response is triggered as soon as the current of one or more phases exceeds this level. This setting can be modified during operation.

Monitoring current limits - Response when trip level I> reached Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the trip level I> is exceeded (default setting: deactivated).

Monitoring current limits - Warning level I> (high limit) Setting of a warning level I> for the motor current (0 to 1020% of setting current Is in 4% increments, default setting: 0), at which SIMOCODE pro will generate a message or an alarm. The message or alarm is generated as soon as the current of one or more phases exceeds this level. This setting can be modified during operation.

Monitoring current limits - Response when warning level I> reached Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the warning level I> is exceeded (default setting: deactivated).

Monitoring current limits - Trip level I< (low limit) Setting of a trip level I< for the motor current (0 to 1020% of setting current Is in 4% increments, default setting: 0), at which SIMOCODE pro will generate a message or trip the motor. The response is triggered as soon as the current of one or more phases undershoots this level. This setting can be modified during operation.

Monitoring current limits - Response when trip level I< not reached Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the trip level I< is undershot (default setting: deactivated).




Monitoring current limits - Warning level I< (low limit) Setting of a warning level I< for the motor current (0 to 1020% of setting current Is in 4% increments, default setting: 0), at which SIMOCODE pro will generate a message or an alarm. The message or alarm is tripped as soon as the current undershoots one or more phases of this level. This setting can be modified during operation.

Monitoring current limits - Response when warning level I< not reached Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the warning level I< is undershot (default setting: deactivated).

Monitoring current limits - Trip I> delay (high limit) Selection of the delay time (0 to 25.5 s, default setting: 0.5 s) for the set response (signaling, tripping). The delay time can be modified during operation.

Monitoring current limits - Warning I> delay (high limit) Selection of the delay time (0 to 25.5 s, default setting: 0.5 s) for the set response (signaling, warning). The delay time can be modified during operation.

Monitoring current limits - Trip < delay (low limit) Selection of the delay time (0 to 25.5 s, default setting: 0.5 s) for the set response (signaling, tripping). The delay time can be modified during operation.

Monitoring current limits - Warning I< delay (low limit) Selection of the delay time (0 to 25.5 s, default setting: 0.5 s) for the set response (signaling, warning). The delay time can be modified during operation.

Monitoring current limits - Hysteresis Here you can set the hysteresis for current limits (0 to 15% of the threshold value in 1% increments, default setting: 5%).

1.3.5.3 Operation monitoring

Operating hours monitoring - Threshold Setting of the response threshold (0 to 1,193,046 hours, default setting: 0) for monitoring a motor's operating hours (service life). This setting can be modified during operation.

Monitoring of operating hours - Response to overshoot Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the set threshold (0 to 1,193,046 h) is exceeded (default setting: deactivated).




Stop time monitoring - Response to overshoot Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the set motor stop time (0 to 65535 h) is exceeded (default setting: deactivated).

Stop time monitoring - level Setting of the threshold, i.e. the length of the permissible motor stop time (0 to 65535 hours, default setting: 0). If the permissible motor stop time is exceeded, SIMOCODE pro reacts as per the response which has been selected. The threshold setting can be modified during operation.

Monitoring the number of starts - Interlocking time Setting of an interlocking time (00:00:00 to 18:12:15 hh:mm:ss, default setting: 00:00:00). If a new start command is issued within the start period after the last permitted start, it will not be executed if "Response to overshoot - Tripping" is set. The "Fault - No. of starts >" fault message is displayed and the set interlocking time is activated. This setting can be modified during operation.

Monitoring the number of starts - Start period Setting of a start period (00:00:00 to 18:12:15 hh:mm:ss, default setting: 00:00:00) for the permissible startup procedures. Once the parameterized start period has elapsed, the maximum number of starts is available once more. This setting can be modified during operation.

Monitoring the number of starts - Permissible starts Entry of the maximum number of permissible starts (1 to 255, default setting: 1). The set "start period" starts to elapse when the first start is executed. The setting of the maximum number of permissible starts can be modified during operation.

Monitoring the number of starts - Response to prewarning Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond following the penultimate start (default setting: deactivated).

Monitoring the number of starts - Response to overshoot Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the number of starts is exceeded during the start period (default setting: deactivated).




1.3.5.4 Voltage monitoring

Voltage monitoring - Response when trip level not reached (low limit) Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the voltage of one or more phases has undershot the trip level U< (default setting: deactivated).

Voltage monitoring - Response when warning level not reached (low limit) Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the voltage of one or more phases has undershot the warning level U< (default setting: deactivated).

Voltage monitoring - Trip level (low limit) Setting of a trip level U< for the line voltage (0 to 2040 V in 8 V increments, default: 0), at which SIMOCODE pro will generate a message or trip the motor. The response is triggered as soon as the voltage of one or more phases undershoots this level. This setting can be modified during operation.

Voltage monitoring - Warning level (low limit) Setting of a warning level U< for the line voltage (0 to 2040 V in 8-V increments, default: 0), at which SIMOCODE pro will trip the motor. The response is triggered as soon as the voltage of one or more phases undershoots this level. This setting can be modified during operation.

Voltage monitoring - Trip level delay (low limit) Selection of the delay time (0 to 25.5 s, default setting: 0.5 s) for the set response (signaling, tripping). Can be modified during operation.

Voltage monitoring - Warning level delay (low limit) Selection of the delay time (0 to 25.5 s, default setting: 0.5 s) for the set response (signaling, warning). Can be modified during operation.




Voltage monitoring - Activity of trip level Definition of the motor operating states in which the trip level is to be active:

● always (on) 1): trip level always active, regardless of whether the motor is running or at a standstill

● always, except in the case of TPF (on+) (default): trip level always active, regardless of whether the motor is running or at a standstill; exception: "TPF", that is, motor feeder is in test position

● if motor is running, except TPF (run): trip level only active if the motor is ON and not in the test position

1) When using basic unit 2 (product version *E03* and higher) with a current/voltage measuring module.

Voltage monitoring - Activity of warning level Definition of the motor operating states in which the warning level is to be active:

● always (on) 1): warning level always active, regardless of whether the motor is running or at a standstill

● always, except in the case of RMT (on+) (default): warning level always active, regardless of whether the motor is running or at a standstill; exception: "TPF", i.e. motor feeder is in test position

● if motor is running, except TPF (run): warning level only active if the motor is ON and not in the test position

1) When using basic unit 2 (product version *E03* and higher) with a current/voltage measuring module

Voltage monitoring - Hysteresis for voltage, cos phi, power Here you can set the hysteresis for the voltage, cos phi and power (0 to 15% of the threshold value in 1% increments, default setting: 5%).

1.3.5.5 Cos phi monitoring

Cos phi monitoring - Response to trip level (lower limit) Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the cos phi has undershot the trip level cos phi< (default setting: deactivated).

Cos phi monitoring - Response to warning level (lower limit) Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the cos phi has undershot the warning level cos phi< (default setting: deactivated).




Cos phi monitoring - Trip level cos phi< (lower limit) Setting of a trip level cos phi< (lower limit) for the cos phi (0 to 100% of Is in 1% increments, default setting: 0) at which SIMOCODE pro will generate a message or trip the motor. This setting can be modified during operation.

Cos phi monitoring - Warning level cos phi< (lower limit) Setting of a warning level cos phi < (lower limit) for the cos phi (0 to 100% of Is in 1% increments, default setting: 0) at which SIMOCODE pro will generate a message or a warning. This setting can be modified during operation.

Cos phi monitoring - Trip level delay (lower limit) Selection of the delay time (0 to 25.5 s, default setting: 0.5 s) for the set response (signaling, tripping). Can be modified during operation.

Cos phi monitoring - Warning level delay (lower limit) Selection of the delay time (0 to 25.5 s, default setting: 0.5 s) for the set response (signaling, warning). Can be modified during operation.

1.3.5.6 Active power monitoring

Active power monitoring - Response when trip level reached (high limit) Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the active power has exceeded the trip level P> (default setting: deactivated).

Active power monitoring - Response when warning level reached (high limit) Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the active power has exceeded the warning level P> (default setting: deactivated).

Active power monitoring - Response when trip level not reached (low limit) Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the active power has undershot the trip level P< (default setting: deactivated).

Active power monitoring - Response when warning level not reached (low limit) Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the active power has undershot the warning level P< (default setting: deactivated).




Active power monitoring - Trip level delay (high limit) Selection of the delay time (0 to 25.5 s, default setting: 0.5 s) for the set response (signaling, tripping). Can be modified during operation.

Active power monitoring - Warning level delay (high limit) Selection of the delay time (0 to 25.5 s, default setting: 0.5 s) for the set response (signaling, warning). Can be modified during operation.

Active power monitoring - Trip level delay (low limit) Selection of the delay time (0 to 25.5 s, default setting: 0.5 s) for the set response (signaling, tripping). Can be modified during operation.

Active power monitoring - Warning level delay (low limit) Selection of the delay time (0 to 25.5 s, default setting: 0.5 s) for the set response (signaling, warning). Can be modified during operation.

Active power monitoring - Trip level P> (high limit) Setting of a trip level P> for the active power (0.000 to 4,294,967.295 kW, default setting: 0.000) at which SIMOCODE pro will generate a message or trip the motor. This setting can be modified during operation.

Active power monitoring - Warning level P> (high limit) Setting of a warning level P> for the active power (0.000 to 4,294,967.295 kW, default setting: 0.000) at which SIMOCODE pro will generate a message or a warning. This setting can be modified during operation.

Active power monitoring - Trip level P< (low limit) Setting of a trip level P< for the active power (0.000 to 4,294,967.295 kW, default setting: 0.000) at which SIMOCODE pro will generate a message or trip the motor. This setting can be modified during operation.

Active power monitoring - Warning level P< (low limit) Setting of a warning level P< for the active power (0.000 to 4,294,967.295 kW, default setting: 0.000) at which SIMOCODE pro will generate a message or a warning. This setting can be modified during operation.




1.3.5.7 0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring

0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring (upper limit) - Trip level activity Definition of the motor operating states in which the trip level is to be active:


● always, except TPF (on+): trip level is always active regardless of whether the motor is running or at a standstill, with the exception of "TPF", i.e. motor feeder is in the test position


● if motor is running, except TPF, with startup override (run+): trip level only active if the motor is running, the startup procedure has been completed, and no test position (TPF) is detected.

0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring (upper limit) - Warning level activity Definition of the motor operating states in which the warning level is to be active:


● always, except TPF (on+): warning level is always active regardless of whether the motor is running or at a standstill, with the exception of "TPF", i.e. motor feeder is in the test position


● if motor is running, except TPF, with startup override (run+): warning level only active if the motor is running, the startup procedure has been completed, and no test position (TPF) is detected.

0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring (lower limit) - Trip level activity Definition of the motor operating states in which the trip level is to be active:


● always, except TPF (on+): trip level always active, regardless of whether the motor is running or at a standstill; exception: "TPF", i.e. motor feeder is in test position






0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring (lower limit) - Warning level activity Definition of the motor operating states in which the warning level is to be active:


● always, except TPF (on+): warning level always active, regardless of whether the motor is running or at a standstill; exception: "TPF", i.e. motor feeder is in test position



0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring - Response to trip level (upper limit) Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the analog signal 0 / 4-20 mA has overshot trip level 0 / 4-20 mA (default setting: deactivated).

0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring - Response to warning level (upper limit) Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the analog signal 0 / 4 - 20 mA has overshot warning level 0 / 4 - 20 mA (default setting: deactivated).

0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring - Response to trip level (lower limit) Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the analog signal 0 / 4-20 mA has undershot trip level 0 / 4-20 mA (default setting: deactivated).

0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring - Response to warning level (lower limit) Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the analog signal 0 / 4 - 20 mA has undershot warning level 0 / 4 - 20 mA (default setting: deactivated).

0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring - Trip level (upper limit) Setting of a trip level 0 / 4 - 20 mA> for the 0 / 4 - 20 mA output signal (0.0 to 23.6 mA, default setting: 0.0 mA) at which SIMOCODE pro will generate a message or trip the motor. This setting can be modified during operation.

0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring - Warning level (upper limit) Setting of a warning level 0 / 4 - 20 mA> for the 0 / 4 - 20 mA output signal (0.0 to 23.6 mA, default setting: 0.0 mA) at which SIMOCODE pro will generate a message or an alarm. This setting can be modified during operation.




0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring - Trip level (lower limit) Setting of a trip level 0 / 4 - 20 mA< for the 0 / 4 - 20 mA output signal (0.0 to 23.6 mA, default setting: 0.0 mA) at which SIMOCODE pro will generate a message or trip the motor. This setting can be modified during operation.

0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring - Warning level (lower limit) Setting of a warning level 0 / 4 - 20 mA< for the 0 / 4 - 20 mA output signal (0.0 to 23.6 mA, default setting: 0.0 mA) at which SIMOCODE pro will generate a message or an alarm. This setting can be modified during operation.

Monitoring 0 / 4 - 20 mA - Trip level delay (high limit) Selection of the delay time (0 to 25.5 s, default setting: 0.5 s) for the set response (signaling, tripping). The delay time can be modified during operation.

Monitoring 0 / 4 - 20 mA - Warning level delay (high limit) Selection of the delay time (0 to 25.5 s, default setting: 0.5 s) for the set response (signaling, warning). The delay time can be modified during operation.

Monitoring 0 / 4 - 20 mA - Trip level delay (low limit) Selection of the delay time (0 to 25.5 s, default setting: 0.5 s) for the set response (signaling, tripping). The delay time can be modified during operation.

Monitoring 0 / 4 - 20 mA - Warning level delay (low limit) Selection of the delay time (0 to 25.5 s, default setting: 0.5 s) for the set response (signaling, warning). The delay time can be modified during operation.

Monitoring 0 / 4 - 20 mA (high limit) - Marking The marking is saved in the device and assigned and displayed in the "Faults/Warnings" online dialog box. Optional marking for identifying the message, e.g. "0 / 4 to 20 mA >"; range: maximum 10 characters.

0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring - Hysteresis Here you can set the hysteresis for the 0 / 4 - 20 mA analog signal (0 to 15% of the threshold value in 1% increments, default setting: 5%).

0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring (low limit) - Marking The marking is saved in the device and assigned and displayed in the "Faults/Warnings" online dialog box. Optional marking for identifying the message, e.g. "0 / 4 to 20 mA<"; range: maximum 10 characters.




1.3.5.8 Temperature monitoring

Temperature monitoring - Response when trip level T> reached Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the temperature has exceeded the trip level T> (default setting: tripping).

Temperature monitoring - Response when warning level T> reached Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the temperature has exceeded the warning level T> (default setting: warning).

Temperature monitoring - Hysteresis Here you can set the hysteresis for the temperature (0 to 255 °C in 1 °C increments, default setting: 5 °C).

Temperature monitoring - Trip level T> Setting of a trip level T> for the temperature at the temperature sensors (-273 °C to 65,262 °C) at which SIMOCODE pro will generate a message or shut the motor down. This setting can be modified during operation.

Temperature monitoring - Warning level T> Setting of a warning level T> for the temperature at the temperature sensors (-273 °C to 65,262 °C) at which SIMOCODE pro will generate a message or an alarm. This setting can be modified during operation.

Temperature monitoring - Trip level marking - Warning level Optional marking for identifying the message, e.g. "Temperature>"; range: maximum 10 characters.

1.3.5.9 Monitoring interval for mandatory testing

Monitoring interval to mandatory testing - response You can define here the behavior when the set limit is reached (default: deactivated).

Monitoring - Interval to mandatory testing - Test interval Adjustable limit for the interval for mandatory testing: Range: 0 to 255 weeks (default: 0).




1.3.6 Inputs

1.3.6.1 Digital module inputs

Digital module inputs - Delay If required, you can set a delay for the inputs (6, 16, 26, 36 ms, default setting: 16 ms) in order to prevent temporary faults being incorrectly identified as signals, for example. These values apply to digital modules with a 24 V DC input supply. The values are approximately 40 ms higher for digital modules with input supplies of 110 to 240 V AC/DC.

Notice

Delay times for the digital module inputs can only be set, or are only relevant, if "monostable" or "bistable" is set for digital module 1.

If digital module 1 is a DM-F PROFIsafe, the delay time cannot be set.

If digital module 1 is a DM-F Local, the delay times are set using the DIP switch of the DM-F Local on the front.

1.3.6.2 Basic unit inputs

Basic unit inputs - Delays If required, you can set a delay for the basic unit inputs (6, 16, 26, 36 ms, default setting: 16 ms) to prevent temporary faults being incorrectly detected as signals, for example.

1.3.6.3 Analog module inputs

Analog module inputs - Active inputs Select whether only 1 analog module input or 2 analog module inputs are to be activated.

Analog module inputs - Response to open circuit Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond to an open circuit (default setting: warning).

Analog module inputs - Input signal measuring range Selection of the range of values (0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA, default setting: 0 to 20 mA) of the analog module input signal.




1.3.6.4 Temperature module inputs

Temperature module inputs - Response to sensor fault/out of range Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond to a fault in the sensor measuring circuits (default setting: warning).

Temperature module inputs - Number of active sensors Setting of the number of active sensors (1, 2, or 3; default setting: 3).

Temperature module inputs - Sensor type Selection of the sensor type (PT100, PT1000, KTY83, KTY84, NTC, default setting: PT100).

1.3.7 Outputs

1.3.7.1 Basic unit outputs

BU output The "BU output" function block can be activated by any signal (e.g. device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits, QE contactor control).

1.3.7.2 Cyclic send data

Cyclic send - Byte 0, byte 1 Different types of send data can be cyclically transmitted to the automation system via PROFIBUS DP.

For this purpose, select any digital signal (fixed level 0 or 1, function block input or output, event or fault signal).

Cyclic send - Byte 2/3 Different types of send data can be cyclically transmitted to the automation system via PROFIBUS DP.

To activate a word, select any analog value (any socket, e.g. maximum current Imax, remaining cooling down period, timer actual value, etc.).




Cyclic send - Byte 4/5, 6/7, 8/9 Different types of send data can be cyclically transmitted to the automation system via PROFIBUS DP.

To activate four words, select any analog value.

1.3.7.3 Acyclic send data

Acyclic send Different types of send data can be transmitted to the automation system via PROFIBUS DP at irregular intervals (acyclically).


1.3.7.4 Operator panel LED

OP LED green Green 1 to Green 4:

The "OP LED" function block can be activated by any signal (any sockets, e.g. feedback, motor operating state).

OP LED yellow Yellow 1 to yellow 3:

The "OP LED" function block can be activated by any signal (any sockets, e.g. status displays, events, faults).

1.3.7.5 Digital module outputs

DM - Output The "DM1 output" and "DM2 output" function blocks can be activated by any signal (any sockets, e.g. device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits, etc.), usually the QE contactor controls.




1.3.7.6 Analog module - output

Analog module output - Start-value range Selection of the range of values (0 to 65,535, default setting: 0) for the start value of the analog module output signal. If the output is to be used as the current source for an analog output circuit, this value (and the end-value range) must be set to 65,535. This setting can be modified during operation.

Analog module output - End-value range Selection of the range of values (0 to 65535, default setting: 27648) for the end value of the analog module output signal. If the output is to be used as the current source for an analog output circuit, this value (and the start-value range) must be set to 65,535. This setting can be modified during operation.

Analog module - Output The analog module allows you to expand basic unit 2 by one analog output. The corresponding function block allows every analog value (2 bytes/1 word) in SIMOCODE pro to be output as a 0/4-20 mA signal to a connected pointer instrument, for example. If the function block is activated via the "Assigned analog output value" plug using any integer value between 0 and 65535, an equivalent analog signal of 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA will be sent to the output terminals of the analog module.

Analog module output - Assigned analog output value Set any value available in SIMOCODE pro (1 word/2 bytes).

1.3.8 Standard functions

1.3.8.1 OPO - Positioner response Specification of the positioner response (only for "Positioner" control functions) if an input signal is pending:

● "CLOSED": Positioner runs in "CLOSED" direction

● "OPEN": Positioner runs in "OPEN" direction.

1.3.8.2 Test/Reset

Standard functions - Test/Reset buttons blocked Activate the "Test/Reset buttons blocked" checkbox if you want to block the Test/Reset buttons on the basic unit and the operator panel for fault acknowledgment/device tests so that you can then assign other functions to them instead.




Test 1 Select any socket, e.g. device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits for test 1 (with check/shutdown of the output relays) or test 2 (without shutdown of the output relays, usually for a test via a bus).


Reset 1 The "Reset" function block can be activated by any signal (any sockets, e.g. device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits, etc.).

The function of the "TEST/RESET" button on the basic unit or the operator panel is generally dependent upon the operating state of the device.





1.3.8.3 Test position feedback, TPF

Test position feedback (TPF) - Type (level of controlled run-down to cold condition) In the context of the "Cold restart" function test (testing the motor feeder with no current in the main circuit), activate the "NO contact" option if you want to set the input logic of the "Test position feedback" function block to "1-active" (default setting), or the "NC contact" option if you want to set the same input logic to "0-active".

Test position feedback - Input Select any signal (any socket, e.g. device input).




1.3.8.4 External fault

External fault 1-6 - Response Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond to an external fault (devices, states) (default setting: signaling).

External fault 1-6 - Reset also using Specification of further (common) acknowledgment options using additional reset types:

● Test/Reset buttons on the basic unit and the operator panel or, in the case of the operator panel with display, via the menu (panel reset) (set by default)

● Remote reset: Acknowledgment via reset 1 to 3, DPV1, "Reset" command (default)

● Auto reset: The fault resets itself after the cause has been eliminated (after removal of the activation signal)

● Off command reset: "OFF" control command, resets the fault

External fault - Input The "External fault" function block can be used to monitor any statuses or external devices and to generate fault messages or trip the motor, if required. The block is addressed by the signal to be monitored: Select any socket, e.g. device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits.

External fault - Reset input A specific reset input is also available in addition to the other reset options (remote reset, Test/Reset button, OFF command reset). Furthermore, auto reset can also be activated.

Acknowledge the "External fault" fault via any signal (any socket, e.g. device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits).

External fault - Marking Optional marking for identifying the message, e.g. "Speed>"; range: maximum 10 characters.

External fault 1-6 - Activity Select the "Always" option if a fault evaluation is always to be performed, regardless of whether the motor is running or at a standstill.

Select the "Only if motor is running" option if a fault evaluation is only to be performed if the motor is ON.




External fault 1-6 - Type Activate

● The "NO contact" option if you want to set the input logic of the "External fault" function block to "1-active" (default setting)

● The "NC contact" option if you want to set the input logic of the "Test position feedback" function block to "0-active".

1.3.8.5 Emergency start

Standard functions - Emergency start - Input The "Emergency start" function block can be addressed by any signal (any sockets, e.g. device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits, etc.) and is edge-active. "Emergency start" deletes the SIMOCODE pro thermal memory each time it is activated.

1.3.8.6 Safety-related tripping

Standard functions - Safety-related tripping - Response Here you can adjust the response of SIMOCODE pro in the case of a safety-related tripping by the DM-F Local or DM-F PROFIsafe (default: deactivated).

Notes:

1. In the event that the option "DM-F LOCAL / Separate PROFIsafe function from control function" has been activated under "Motor control > Control function > Operating mode", only "Deactivated", "Signaling" or "Warning" can be set and not "Tripping".

2. The response of the modules is not influenced by this setting. If the conditions for safety-related disconnection are met, the enable circuits are always disabled!

Standard functions - Safety-related tripping - Reset Here you can specify whether a SIMOCODE pro fault caused by the safety-related disconnection is to be acknowledged manually or automatically (default: Manual).




Standard functions - Safety-related tripping - Without / with cross-circuit detection

With/without cross-circuit detection: Cross-circuit detection is only possible with floating sensors. You must connect the sensors between T1 – Y12, Y33 and T2 – Y22, Y34. The device anticipates the T1 terminal test signal at the terminals Y12 and Y33, and the T2 terminal test signal at the terminals Y22 and Y34. The device detects a sensor fault if the signal at the terminals Y12 and Y33 or Y22 and Y34 does not agree with the test signals T1 or T2.

Deactivate cross-circuit detection if electronic sensors such as light arrays or laser scanners are connected. In this case, the DM-F LOCAL no longer monitors the sensor inputs for cross-circuits. Usually, the outputs of safety sensors (OSSD) are already monitored for cross-circuits in the sensor itself. If "without cross-circuit detection" is set on the device, the test outputs T1 and T2 are deactivated and may no longer be connected. At the inputs Y12 and Y22 as well as Y33 and Y34, the DM-F Local expects a 24 V DC signal from the same current source as the one from which the device receives its power supply (possible only in the case of DM-F Local*1AB00) or from T3 (static 24 V DC).

In the case of the DM-F Local-*1AU00 variant, you must connect the terminal T3 to the floating sensor contacts due to the electrical isolation of the input circuit and sensor supply.

Standard functions - Safety-related tripping - 1NC + 1NO evaluation / 2NC evaluation

1NC + 1NO evaluation / 2NC evaluation In addition to 2-channel connection of the same types of sensor contacts (NC/NC), sensors with opposite types of contacts (NC/NO), as are frequently used in the case of electromagnetic switches, can also be evaluated. Make sure that the normally closed contact is connected to Y12, and the normally open contact to Y22.

Standard functions - Safety-related tripping - 2 x 1-channel / 1x 2-channel

2 x 1-channel / 1 x 2-channel: ● 2 sensors with one contact each (2 x 1-channel) (NC/NC). It is expected that both

sensors are AND-connected. Simultaneity is not monitored.

● 1 sensor with two contacts each (1 x 2-channel) (NC/NC). It is expected that both contacts are opened simultaneously.




Standard functions - Safety-related tripping - Delays for sensor inputs 50 ms / 10 ms

Delays for sensor inputs 50 ms / 10 ms ● Delay 50 ms: Switch position changes of strongly bouncing contacts are suppressed (e.g.

position switches on heavy protective doors).

● Delay 10 ms: The shorter delay permits faster deactivation of bounce-free sensors (e.g. light arrays).

Standard functions - Safety-related tripping - Autostart / monitored start sensor input

Autostart / monitored start sensor input ● Autostart: The enabling circuits are switched to the active position as soon as the switch-

on condition is satisfied at the Y12, Y22, Y34 and 1 sensor inputs. The start button connection terminal Y33 is not queried.

● Monitored start: The enabling circuits are switched to the active position as soon as the switch-on condition is satisfied at the Y12, Y22, Y34 and 1 sensor inputs, and the start button at the Y33 terminal is actuated (start at falling edge).

Standard functions - Safety-related tripping - Autostart / monitored start cascading input

Autostart / monitored start cascading input ● Autostart: The enabling circuits are switched to the active position as soon as the switch-

on condition at cascading input 1 is satisfied, i.e. as soon as a static 24 V DC signal is present (e.g. from T3).

● Monitored start: The enabling circuits are switched to the active position as soon as the switch-on condition at cascading input 1 is satisfied, i.e. as soon as a static 24 V DC signal is present (e.g. from T3), and the START button at the Y33 terminal is actuated (start at falling edge).

Standard functions - Safety-related tripping - With / without startup testing

With / without startup testing After a power failure, startup testing requires that the system operator actuates the sensors at Y12 and Y22 once.




Standard functions - Safety-related tripping - With autom. startup / without autom. startup after power failure

With automatic startup / without automatic startup after power failure: The parameters of the DM-F Local can be defined so that the enabling circuits switch automatically to the active position again after a power failure, i.e. without actuation of the start button Y33.

Requirements:

● Y12, Y22 or the cascading input 1 are set to "monitored start".

● The switch-on condition at the sensor inputs and at the cascading input is satisfied.

● The START button was actuated before the power failure and this was valid, i.e. the enabling circuits were in the active position.

1.3.8.7 Watchdog (PLC/PCS monitoring)

Standard functions - Watchdog - Bus/PLC fault - Reset Select whether faults are to be acknowledged automatically or manually.

Standard functions - Watchdog - Bus monitoring ● Activated: If a bus fault occurs, the "Fault - Bus" fault message is generated and must be

acknowledged.

● Deactivated: No fault message.

Standard functions - Watchdog - PLC/PCS monitoring ● Activated: If a PLC fault occurs, the "PLC/PCS fault" fault message is generated and

must be acknowledged.


Watchdog PLC/PCS monitoring - Input The "Watchdog" function block can be activated by a signal that is to be monitored (e.g. PROFIBUS DP control bits).

If PLC/PCS monitoring is activated, a "Fault - PLC/PCS" fault message is generated and must be acknowledged. If it is deactivated, no fault message is generated.




1.3.8.8 Operational protection OFF

Operational protection off - Input Select any signal (any socket, e.g. device input).

Operational protection off - Type Specification of the input logic of the "Operational protection off" function block: Normally open contact = 1 active (default setting), normally closed contact = 0 active.

1.3.8.9 Power failure monitoring

Power failure monitoring (UVO) - Addressing external power failure monitoring Select any signal (any sockets, e.g. device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits).

Power failure monitoring (UVO) - Type Specification of the type of power failure monitoring:

● Deactivated

● No interruption of device power supply. The SIMOCODE pro control voltage is maintained. The failure of the line voltage must be detected, for example, by a separate voltage relay.

Power failure monitoring (UVO) - Power failure time

Power failure time Time that starts when the power fails.

● If the line voltage is restored within the power failure time, all drives which were running prior to the power failure are reconnected automatically.

● If the line voltage is not restored within the power failure time, the drives remain disconnected and the "Fault - Power failure (UVO)" message is generated. Once the line voltage has been restored, this fault message can be acknowledged using "Reset".

Range:

0 to 25.5 s, in increments of 0.1 s

26 to 255 s, in increments of 1 s

256 to 2550 s, in increments of 10 s.




Power failure monitoring (UVO) - Restart time delay Setting of a restart time delay (0 to 255 s, default setting: 0) to enable staggered motor startup following power restoration, thus preventing the line voltage from dropping.

Power failure monitoring (UVO) - Fault The "Power failure monitoring" function block is activated by the signal to be monitored (any socket, e.g. device input, PROFIBUS DP control bits, etc.).

The following setting options are available:

1. All contactors (QE) are disconnected immediately after the monitoring relay has been operated/the input has been activated (UVO).

2. If the voltage is restored within the "power failure time", the motor will be reset to its previous state. This can either be done immediately or with a time delay (restart time delay).

3. If the "power failure time" elapses without the voltage being restored, the device enters the fault state (undervoltage-off fault).

1.3.8.10 Time stamping

Time stamping active SIMOCODE pro V can timestamp up to eight digital signals with high temporal precision (10 ms). In the process, every change in the state of the digital signal will be recorded.

Possible fields of application:

● Precise chronological recording of faults in a procedural system

● Analysis of system-wide interrelationships

● Recording and signaling of time-critical signal changes

Activate the "Time stamping active" checkbox if you want to use this function.

Time stamping - Input Select any signal (socket).




1.3.9 Logic modules

1.3.9.1 Counters

Counter - Input +, input -, reset Counters are activated via the plugs "+" or "-". The counter output switches to "1" when the preset limit is reached. The counter is reset with "Reset". The current actual value is also available for internal processing and to the automation system.

The counter consists of:

● Three plugs (input +, input – and reset)

● One logic component

● One socket

● One "Actual value" analog socket with the current value in the range between 0 and the limit. The value is retained even in the event of a power failure.

Select any socket (e.g. device input, PROFIBUS DP control bit).

Counter - Limit Value (0 to 65535, default: 0) that can be reached when counting and at which the counter issues an output signal. This value can be modified during operation.

1.3.9.2 Timer

Timer - Type Select one of the following as the type for the timer output signal:

● With closing delay

● With closing delay with memory

● With off delay

● With fleeting closing

Timer - Limit Time (0 to 6,553.5 s, default setting: 0) at which the timer issues an output signal during addressing, depending on the timer type (output response). This value can be modified during operation.




Timer - Input - Reset The timer consists of

● Two plugs (input and reset)

● One socket

● One "Actual value" analog socket with the actual value.

The current actual value (reset = 0) is available as a socket for further internal processing and can also be transmitted to the automation system. If an input signal is pending, the timer issues an output signal according to the chosen timer type:

● Closing delay (with and without memory)

● Opening delay

With fleeting closing


1.3.9.3 Signal conditioning

Signal conditioning - Type Select one of the following as the type for the signal conditioning output signal:

● Level not inverted (default setting)

● Level inverted

● Edge rising with memory

● Edge falling with memory

Signal conditioning- Input and reset If an input signal is pending, the signal conditioning issues an output signal according to the selected signal conditioning type:

● Non-inverting

● Inverting



The signal conditioning is reset to 0 when a reset is performed. The signal conditioning consists of



● One socket

Select any signal (any socket, e.g. device input, PROFIBUS DP control bit).




1.3.9.4 Non-volatile element

Non-volatile element - Type Select one of the following output responses for the non-volatile element:


● Level inverted



Non-volatile element - Input and reset Non-volatile elements respond in the same way as signal conditioning, but are not retained if the supply voltage fails. If an input signal is pending, the signal conditioning issues an output signal according to the set signal conditioning type (non-inverting, inverting, edge rising with memory, edge falling with memory).

The non-volatile element consists of



● One socket

The signal conditioning is reset to 0 when a reset is performed.

1.3.9.5 Flashing

Flashing 1 If an input signal is pending at its plug, the "Flashing" logic module issues a signal to its socket, which alternates between binary 0 and 1 at a fixed frequency of 1 Hz.

You can use this to make the LEDs on the operator panel flash, for example.

The logic module consists of

● One plug


● One socket.







● One plug


● One socket.




● One plug


● One socket.

1.3.9.6 Flicker

Flicker 1 You can use the "Flicker" logic modules to assign the "Flicker" function to the operator panel LEDs, for example. If an input signal is pending, the module issues an output signal of 4 Hz.

The function block consists of

● One plug


● One socket



● One plug


● One socket






● One plug


● One socket

1.3.9.7 Limit monitor

Hysteresis for limit monitor Setting of the hysteresis for the limit monitor (0 to 15% of the threshold value in 1% increments, default setting: 5%).

Limit monitor - Marking Optional marking for identifying the message, e.g. "Limit>"; range: maximum 10 characters.

Limit monitor - Activity Specification of the motor operating states in which the limit monitor is to be evaluated:

● always (on) (default setting): always evaluate, regardless of whether the motor is running or at a standstill

● always, except TPF (on+): always evaluate, regardless of whether the motor is running or at a standstill, with the exception of "TPF", i.e. motor feeder is in the test position

● Only evaluate if the motor is ON and not in the test position (TPF)

● Only evaluate if the motor is running, the startup procedure has been completed, and no test position (TPF) is detected; example: cos phi monitoring

Limit monitor - Delay Selection of the delay time (0 to 25.5 s, default setting: 0.5 s) for the set response (signaling). The delay time can be modified during operation.

Limit monitor - Limit Operating value (0 to 65535, default setting: 0) for triggering a message indicating that the limit of the corresponding analog value (2 bytes/1 word) has exceeded/undershot the set limit. This value can be modified during operation.




Limit monitor - Input Connect the analog plug of the limit monitor to the value that is to be monitored (2 bytes), e.g. maximum current Imax, remaining cooling down period, timer actual value.

Limit monitor - Method Specification of whether the relevant analog value should be monitored to find out if it is exceeding (>) or undershooting (<) the limit (default setting: > exceeding).

1.3.9.8 Truth table 2I/1O

Truth table 2I/1O - Input The truth table 2I/1O consists of

● Two plugs


● One socket.

You can choose which of the four possible input conditions an output signal should be generated for.


Truth table - Type Setting of the binary output signal type (0 or 1).



● Three plugs


● One socket

You can choose which of the eight possible input conditions an output signal should be generated for.








● Five plugs


● Two sockets.

You can choose which of the 32 possible input conditions a maximum of two output signals should be generated for.



1.3.9.11 Calculators

Calculator - Input Both the "Calculator 1" and "Calculator 2" logic modules integrated in basic unit 2 contain the standard calculation modes and enable all analog values that occur in SIMOCODE pro to be adapted, calculated, and converted.

Each calculator consists of:

● One analog plug (Calculator 1) or two analog plugs (Calculator 2)


● One analog socket.

Calculator 1 - Numerator/Offset Setting of the range of values

● For the numerator of arithmetic function block 1 (-32,768 - +32,767)

● For an offset value, if required (addend within the Calculator 1 formula)

Calculator 1 - Denominator Setting of the range of values for the denominator of arithmetic function block 1 (0 to 255, increments of 1).




Calculator 2 - Operating mode Setting of the operating mode for arithmetic function block 2:

● Both inputs of word type: The analog value at input 1 is combined with the analog value at input 2 using a predefined formula and taking into account the specified parameters (numerators, denominators, offsets, operators).

● Inputs 1 and 2 correspond to a D word input: The analog values at inputs 1 and 2 are processed together as a double word. Input 1 represents the high word and input 2 the low word. The result is calculated by means of the formula defined for this operating mode using the specified parameters (numerators, denominators, offsets) and is output by the function block as 1 word/2 bytes. In this operating mode it is also possible to process double words (e.g. active power, apparent power) and to display them (2 bytes/1 word).

Calculator 2 - Numerator 1 Setting of the range of values for numerator 1 of arithmetic function block 2 (-128 - +127, increments of 1).

Calculator 2 - Denominator 1 Setting of the range of values for denominator 1 of arithmetic function block 2 (0 to 255, increments of 1).

Calculator 2 - Numerator 2 Setting of the range of values for numerator 2 of arithmetic function block 2 (0 to 255, increments of 1). Only relevant for operating mode 1 (both inputs "word" type).

Calculator 2 - Denominator 2 Setting of the range of values for denominator 2 of arithmetic function block 2 (-128 to +127, increments of 1).

Calculator 2 - Offset Setting of a range of values (-2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647) for an offset value (addend within the Calculator 2 formula), if required.

Calculator 2 - Operator Setting of the operator (+, -, *, /) for arithmetic function block 2 (only relevant for operating mode "both inputs 'word' type").




1.3.10 3UF50 compatibility mode

1.3.10.1 3UF50 compatibility mode Activate the "3UF50 - Compatibility mode" checkbox if a SIMOCODE DP device is to be used by a SIMOCODE pro device without changing the configuration. If the 3UF50 compatibility mode is activated, you can operate a SIMOCODE pro V basic unit 2 with a 3UF50 configuration. In this case, from the point of view of the PLC (master class 1) communication with SIMOCODE pro is the same as communication with SIMOCODE DP. SIMOCODE DP supports cyclic communication (basic types 1-3), diagnostics, as well as DPV1 data records (DR 130, DR 131, DR 133).

1.3.10.2 3UF50 basic type If the 3UF50 compatibility mode is activated (checkbox), you can set the basic type (1, 2, or 3) used to configure the SIMOCODE 3UF50.

1.3.10.3 3UF50 operating mode Setting which specifies whether SIMOCODE pro V is to be operated on PROFIBUS DP with DPV0 functions (standard) or DPV1 functions (including acyclic services and interrupts).

1.3.11 Analog value recording

1.3.11.1 Analog-value recording - Trigger edge Setting of the trigger edge (positive, negative, default setting: positive).

1.3.11.2 Analog-value recording - Pre-trigger You can use the pre-trigger value (0 to 100% in 5% increments) to specify the time between starting analog value recording and the presence of the trigger signal. The pre-trigger is set as a percentage of the entire sampling time.

1.3.11.3 Analog-value recording - Sampling rate The recording time for any analog values (2 bytes/1 word) determines the sampling rate in SIMOCODE pro (sampling time = sampling rate[s] * 60). It can be set in 0.1 s increments, in the range 0.1 to 50 s (default setting: 0.1 s).

1.3.11.4 Analog-value recording - Assigned analog value The "Analog value recording" function block can be used to record any analog values (2 bytes/1 word) in SIMOCODE pro over a set period of time.

Select any analog value (1 word/2 bytes) in SIMOCODE pro.




1.3.11.5 Analog-value recording - Trigger input Analog value recording can be started by any signal at the trigger input.

Select any signal (any socket, e.g. device inputs, current flowing).

1.3.12 Online parameters

1.3.12.1 Online - status command start pause Change-over pause active:

With the control functions "Dahlander", "Dahlander reversing starter", "Pole-changing starter" and "Pole-changing reversing starter", the change-over from fast to slow speed can be delayed with the set time 0.00 s to 655.35 s; default: 0.00 s).

With the control functions "Star-delta starter" and "Star-delta reversing starter", the change-over pause extends the time between disconnecting the star contactor and switching on the delta contactor by the set time.

1.3.12.2 Online - event short circuit Short-circuit detection has responded.

1.3.12.3 Online - event open circuit Open circuit detection has responded.

1.3.12.4 Online - event InM deleted The initialization module was deleted and is now back in the as-delivered state.

1.3.12.5 Online - event InM programmed The reparameterization was accepted in the initialization module.

1.3.12.6 Online - event InM read-in The parameters of the memory module were read into SIMOCODE.

1.3.12.7 Online - event InM Ident Data readonly The device addressing and the I&M data in the initialization module are write-protected. Parameterization will only be accepted by SIMOCODE pro if the new parameter set is identical to the data stored in the initialization module at that time.

● Select a parameterization with identical addressing and I&M data

● Deactivate the partial write protection of the initialization module.




1.3.12.8 Online - event InM readonly The initialization module is fully write-protected. Deactivate the write protection of the initialization module.

1.3.12.9 Online - event MeM readonly The memory module is fully write-protected. Deactivate the write protection of the memory module.

1.3.12.10 Online - status InM readonly Change not possible The initialization modules is completely or partially write-protected. Reparameterization of SIMOCODE pro is denied because the initialization module is write-protected.

Deactivate write protection of the initialization module.

1.3.12.11 Online - warning EMplus short circuit Short-circuit detection has responded.

1.3.12.12 Online - warning EMplus open circuit Open circuit detection has responded.

1.3.12.13 Online - trip EMplus short circuit Short-circuit detection has responded.

1.3.12.14 Online - trip EMplus open circuit Open circuit detection has responded.

1.3.12.15 Online - E module P ground-fault current Impermissibly high fault current.

1.3.12.16 Online - E module P last Last trip current

Tooltips SIRIUS + SIMOCODE 1.4 Module parameters



1.4 Module parameters

1.4.1 Identification

1.4.1.1 Marking

Module parameter - Identification - Designation Entry of any text, e.g. for plant documentation.

See also Marking (Page 165)

1.4.2 Configuration

1.4.2.1 Configuration - Selection of an initialization module Selection of an initialization module.

The initialization module allows all system parameter settings to be backed up and transferred to a new system (in the case of device replacement, for example) without the need for additional resources or detailed specialist expertise.

Note

The SIMOCODE pro S and SIMOCODE pro V basic units from product version *E09* and higher do not support the initialization module.

See also Device configuration (Page 157)

1.4.2.2 Configuration - Application (control function) - SIMOCODE pro C basic unit Selection of one of the following applications (control functions) for the SIMOCODE pro C basic unit:

● Overload relay

● Direct starter


● Molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB)




See also Application selection (Page 167)

1.4.2.3 Configuration - Application (control function) - SIMOCODE pro V basic unit Selection of one of the following applications (control functions) for the SIMOCODE pro V basic unit:

● Overload relay

● Direct starter




● Star-delta reversing starter

● Dahlander

● Dahlander reversing starter

● Pole-changing starter

● Pole-changing reversing starter

● Valve

● Positioner 1

● Positioner 2

● Positioner 3

● Positioner 4

● Positioner 5

● Soft starter with reversing contactor

● Soft starter.





1.4.2.4 Configuration - Application (control function) - SIMOCODE pro S basic unit Selection of one of the following applications (control functions) for the SIMOCODE pro S basic unit:

● Overload relay

● Direct starter




● Soft starter


1.4.2.5 Configuration - Thermistor Activate the "Thermistor" checkbox if you want to use the thermistor (binary PTC) to monitor motor temperature. When the checkbox is activated, the "Thermistor" motor protection dialog appears. Here you can define the response when the trip level is reached and the response in the event of a sensor fault.

See also Thermistor protection (Page 181)

1.4.2.6 Configuration - Removal error when operator panel is removed If "Yes" is set in the dropdown menu, the message "Removal error" will be output if a configured operator panel without display is removed.

If "No" is set, the message "Removal error" will not be displayed if the operator panel is removed during operation. Use this setting if an operator panel is connected temporarily.

Notice

If the operator panel is the motor's only active control station, the motor might not shut down again!

See also Device configuration (Page 157)




1.4.3 Motor protection

1.4.3.1 Overload/Unbalance/Stalled rotor

Motor protection - Voltage measurement - Load type Here you select whether SIMOCODE pro is to protect a 1-phase or a 3-phase load (default setting: 3-phase). For a "1-phase" type of load, proceed as follows:

● Deactivate the internal ground-fault detection and unbalance protection

● Route just one of the two conductors through any feed-through opening on the current measuring module.

Phase failure monitoring is deactivated automatically.

See also Replacing the current measuring module and the current/voltage measuring module (Page 335)

Overload protection - Type of load Here you select whether SIMOCODE pro is to protect a 1-phase or a 3-phase load (default setting).


● If necessary, deactivate internal ground-fault detection.


See also Overload protection (Page 174)

Overload protection - Reset Manual (default setting): Faults must be acknowledged by a reset signal:

● Via the "Reset" button on the basic unit or

● Via the "Reset" button on the operator panel or

● Via "Standard functions -> Reset" (the "Reset - Input" inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, e.g. using a reset via the bus).

See also Test/Reset (Page 242)




Motor protection - Thermistor - Response when trip level reached Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the thermistor trip level is exceeded (default setting: tripping).


Motor protection - Thermistor - Response to sensor fault Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond in the event of a short circuit or if an open circuit occurs in the thermistor cable (default setting: warning).


Motor protection - Blocking protection - Delay Selection of the delay time (0 to 25.5 s, default setting: 0.5 s) for the set response (signaling, warning, tripping). This setting can be modified during operation.

See also Blocking protection (Page 180)

Overload protection - Cooling down period Time setting (60 to 6553.5 s, default setting: 300 s), after which an overload trip can be reset. This setting can be modified during operation.


Overload protection - Pause tme Time setting (0 to 6553.5 s, default setting: 0 s) for the cooling down response of the motor when tripped under normal operating conditions (not in the case of an overload trip). This setting can be modified during operation. After this time the "thermal motor model" will be deleted and a new cold start will be possible. This means that many startups can be performed in a short space of time.





Motor protection - Response when trip level reached Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the trip level is exceeded in the event of an overload (default setting: tripping).


Motor protection - Overload protection - Response when prewarning threshold reached Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the prewarning level (I> 115 % Is) is exceeded in the event of an overload (default setting: warning).


Motor protection - Overload protection - Response to unbalance Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond to a phase unbalance (default setting: warning).


Overload protection - Class The Class (tripping class) defines the maximum time within which SIMOCODE pro must trip from cold at 7.2 times the setting current (motor protection to IEC 60947). You can choose between 8 different settings (Class 5 to Class 40). Please note that with startups > Class 10, the permissible AC3 current of the contactor may have to be reduced (derated), i.e. you must select a larger contactor. The tripping class can be modified during operation.


Motor protection - Delay in the event of overload operation (delay prewarning) Define how long (default setting: 0.5 s) the prewarning level (1.15 x Is) must be constantly exceeded before SIMOCODE pro executes the desired response. If no setting is made, there will be no response. In the event of a loss of phase or an unbalance > 50%, the prewarning level will be reached earlier, at approximately 0.85 x Is. You can change this setting during operation.





Motor protection - Unbalance protection threshold Setting of the unbalance protection level (0 to 100%, default setting: 40%), which must be exceeded for SIMOCODE pro to respond. Loss of one phase corresponds to an unbalance of 100%. This setting can be modified during operation.

See also Unbalance protection (Page 179)

Overload protection - Blocking protection threshold Setting of a blocking threshold for the motor current (0 to 1020% of the set current Is in 4% increments, default setting: 0) at which SIMOCODE pro will react as per the selected response. The response is triggered as soon as the motor current exceeds this threshold. This setting can be modified during operation.


Overload protection - Set current Is1 Setting of the motor rated current. This value can be found on the rating plate of the motor. The overload trip characteristic is calculated based on this value. The setting range depends on the current measuring module or current/voltage measuring module selected. This setting can be modified during operation.


Overload protection - Is1-Is2 transformation ratio active Activate this checkbox if you are using an interposing transformer or looping the main current lines through the current measuring module or the current/voltage measuring module several times. If the checkbox is activated, you can enter a transformation ratio.













Overload protection - Set current Is2 Set current Is2 can only be set for control functions with two speeds (Dahlander, Dahlander reversing starter, pole-changing starter, pole-changing reversing starter) as a way of ensuring that appropriate overload protection is also provided for the higher of the two speeds. Is2 is usually set to a value higher than Is1. The setting range depends on the selected current measuring module or current/voltage measuring module. This setting can be modified during operation.





Motor protection - Overload protection - Delay in the event of unbalance Selection of the delay time (0 to 25.5 s, default setting: 0.5 s) for the set response (signaling, warning, tripping).


Motor protection - Blocking protection - Response when blocking threshold reached Here you can select how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the blocking threshold is exceeded (default setting: deactivated).


1.4.4 Motor control

1.4.4.1 Control stations

Control stations - Operation mode switch S1, S2 You can use the operation mode switch to change over between the following operating modes using any signals (any sockets, e.g. device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits, etc.):

● Local 1

● Local 2

● Local 3

● Remote/Automatic



See also Mode selector (Page 186)




Control stations - Activate enables Enables, which must be activated, are assigned to the "ON" and "OFF" control commands for each control station in every operating mode. Activate the enables for the "ON" and "OFF" control commands ("ON" only, "OFF" only, or "ON" and "OFF") for each control station, depending on whether the control station is to be able to only switch the motor on, only switch it off, or switch it on and off.

See also Enables (Page 186)

Enables and enabled control command schematic (Page 187)

Control station - PLC/PCS Select any socket (typically the sockets of the "Cyclic receive" function blocks).

See also Control stations (Page 183)

Cyclic receive (Page 225)

Acyclic receive (Page 226)

Watchdog (Bus monitoring, PLC/PCS monitoring) (Page 258)

Control station - PC This control station is primarily intended for switching commands on any PC which, along with the automation system, is used as a second master on the PROFIBUS DP.

The control commands are received from the PROFIBUS DPV1 via the acyclic control telegram.

No connection needs to be established if the SIMOCODE ES Professional or SIMATIC PDM PC software is connected to SIMOCODE pro via PROFIBUS DP. In this case, the control commands will be implemented automatically via the PC control station [DPV1].





Control station - Operator panel Select any socket (typically the sockets of the "Operator panel buttons" function block).

Since the operator panel only has four buttons for controlling the motor feeder, one button must be used as a speed change-over button for control functions with two speeds and two directions of rotation. For this purpose, this button must be assigned to the internal control command "[OP]<>/<<>>".

If the SIMOCODE ES PC software on a PC is connected to SIMOCODE pro via the system interface, its control commands are implemented automatically via the "Operator panel (OP)" control station and must be enabled here as applicable.


Operator panel buttons (Page 216)

Control station - Local control Select any socket (typically the sockets of the "BU inputs" and "DM1 inputs" or "DM2 inputs" function blocks).

The OFF command "LC OFF" is 0-active. This ensures that SIMOCODE pro shuts the motor down if an open circuit occurs in the incoming cable, for example. The precondition is that the control station is active.


1.4.4.2 Control function

Control function - Auxiliary control input FC The "Auxiliary control input FC" function block is an expanded status message for the "Positioner" or "Valve" control functions.

PC (Feedback Close) can be connected to any socket, though usually with that of an input to which the limit switch is wired.

See also Lamp controls and status information (Page 190)




Control function - Auxiliary control input FO The "Auxiliary control input FO" function block is an expanded status message for the "Positioner" or "Valve" control functions.

PO (Feedback Open) can be connected to any socket, though usually with that of an input to which the limit switch is wired.


Control function - Auxiliary control input TC The "Auxiliary control input TC" function block is an expanded status message for the "Positioner" or "Valve" control functions.

TC (Torque Closed) can be connected to any socket, though usually with that of an input to which the torque switch is wired.


Control function - Auxiliary control input TO The "Auxiliary control input TO" function block is an expanded status message for the "Positioner" or "Valve" control functions.

TO (Torque Open) can be connected to any socket, though usually with that of an input to which the torque switch is wired.


Control function - Control commands Plugs of the "Control stations" function block. Connect these plugs to any sockets (e.g. binary inputs on the basic unit, PROFIBUS DP control bits) so that the control commands can be implemented. Each control station can output up to five different control commands (via the plugs ON <<, ON <, OFF, ON >, ON >>).

The number of active plugs depends on the control function selected. With a direct-on-line starter, for example, only the plugs "ON >" and "OFF" are active.




See also Control function (Page 188)

Contactor controls (Page 189)

Control stations (Page 183)

Control function - Auxiliary control input Feedback ON SIMOCODE pro monitors statuses using the "Feedback ON" auxiliary control channel, which is usually derived directly from the current flow in the main circuit, via the current measuring modules. Select any socket (usually the preset socket, "Status - Current flowing").

See also Control function (Page 188)

Feedback time (Page 192)

Contactor controls (Page 189)

Scope and application (Page 194)

Control function "Star-delta starter" and "Star-delta reversing starter" - Max. time for star mode Setting of the maximum time for star mode when switching over from star to delta if the current-dependent reversing point could not be detected (0 to 255 s, default setting: 20 s).

See also Max. star time (Page 193)

Current measuring module built into the delta circuit or the supply cable (Page 193)


Control function "Star-delta starter" and "Star-delta reversing starter" - Integrated current measuring module

● Select "Incoming cable" if the current measuring module is integrated in the motor supply cable.

● Select "In delta" if the current measuring module is integrated in the star-delta circuit's delta. The set current Is is reduced to Irated x √3.

See also Current measuring module built into the delta circuit or the supply cable (Page 193)

Max. star time (Page 193)





Control function - Type of load Select either "motor" (default setting) or "resistive load" (e.g. heating). If "Motor" is selected, following an ON command "Status - Start active" will be set for the duration of the "Class" that has been set. All current-dependent monitoring functions (stalled rotor, current limits, cos phi, active power) only become active once the set "Class" time has elapsed. If "Resistive load" is selected, "Status - Start active" will not be set. All current-dependent monitoring functions (stalled rotor, current limits, cos phi, active power) become active immediately after the start.

See also Load type (Page 192)

Control function - Save switching command ● Deactivated: Change-over commands from one direction of rotation/speed to the other

are only implemented if "OFF" has previously been set and once the interlocking time/change-over pause has elapsed. This setting is the default and the one which is normally used.

● Activated: Change-over commands from one direction of rotation/speed to the other are implemented without a previous "OFF", once the interlocking time/change-over pause has elapsed.

See also Saving change-over command (Page 191)

Control function - DM-F LOCAL/PROFIsafe - Separate function from control function ● Deactivated: A safety-related disconnection by the DM-F modules is also effected by the

SIMOCODE pro control function, avoiding additional follow-on fault messages. Select this setting for applications where the safety-related disconnection directly affects the motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.

● Activated: A safety-related disconnection by the DM-F modules does not affect the SIMOCODE pro control function. Select this setting for applications where the safety-related disconnection is not in any way linked to the motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.

See also DM-F LOCAL/DM-F PROFIsafe - Separate function from control function (Page 191)




Control function - Jog mode ● Deactivated (default setting): Normal mode: In this operating mode, a control command

(ON <, ON <<, ON >, ON >>) is saved (corresponds to contactor locking).

● Activated: If you want to switch a motor on and off, either just the one time or on a repeated temporary basis, activate the "Jog mode" checkbox. In this operating mode, a control command (ON <, ON <<, ON >, ON >>) only remains active as long as a "high signal" is present at the corresponding plugs.

See also Non-maintained command mode (Page 191)

Control function - Change-over pause ● Control functions "Dahlander" and "Pole-changing starter": The change-over from the fast

speed to the slow speed can be delayed by the time set for the change-over pause (0 to 655.35 s, default setting: 0).

● Control function "star/delta": The time that elapses between switching off the star contactor and switching on the delta contactor is extended by the time set for the change-over pause (0 to 655.35 s, default setting: 0). This setting can be modified during operation.

See also Change-over pause (Page 193)

Max. star time (Page 193)

Current measuring module built into the delta circuit or the supply cable (Page 193)


Control function - Execution time Selection of the execution time (0 to 6553.5 s, default setting: 1.0 s) for monitoring the start and shutdown cycle. The start and shutdown cycle must be completed within the set time, otherwise a fault message will be output. Following an "ON" control command, SIMOCODE pro must measure the current in the main circuit within the execution time, otherwise the "Fault - Execution ON command" error message will be output. Following an "OFF" control command, SIMOCODE pro must not measure any current in the main circuit once the execution time has elapsed, otherwise the "Fault - Execution OFF command" error message will be output. This setting can be modified during operation.

See also Execution time (Page 192)




Control function - Interlocking time Setting an interlocking time (0 to 255 s, default 0 s) for the line contactors in the case of the control functions with reversing function and pole-changing function. With the interlocking time, the change-over of the direction of rotation or the change-over of the speed from fast to slow can be time-delayed. This setting can be modified during operation.

See also Interlocking time (Page 193)

Control function - Check-back time Setting of a feedback time (0 to 25.5 s, default setting: 0.5 s) for monitoring the status of the feeder (ON or OFF). If the status is "ON", the current flow may be interrupted for the duration of the feedback time, which will then be followed by "Fault - Feedback ON". If the status is "OFF", current may flow for the duration of the feedback time, which will then be followed by "Fault - Feedback (FB) OFF". This setting can be modified during operation.

See also Feedback time (Page 192)

1.4.5 Machine monitoring

1.4.5.1 Ground fault

EMplus - Response to sensor fault Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond in the event of a sensor fault (default setting: deactivated).

See also Ground fault (Page 195)




EMplus - Monitoring - Warning Unless deactivated, this function is always active, independent of whether the motor is running or not (operating state "ON").

Here you can specify in which motor operating states the warning level is to take effect:


● if motor is running, except TPF (run): warning level only active if motor is running

● if motor is running, except with TPF, with startup override (run+): warning level only active if motor is running and the start procedure has been completed.


EMplus - Monitoring Unless deactivated, this function is always active, independent of whether the motor is running or not (operating state "ON").

Here you can specify in which motor operating states the trip level is to take effect:


● if motor is running, except TPF (run): trip level only active if motor is running

● if motor is running, except with TPF, with startup override (run+): trip level only active if motor is running and the start procedure has been completed.


EMplus - Hysteresis Here you can set the hysteresis for the ground-fault current (0 to 15% of the threshold value in 1% increments, default setting: 5 %)


EMplus - Delay - Warning Selection of the delay time (0 to 25.5 s, default setting: 0.1 s) for the set response (signaling, warning). Can be modified during operation.





EMplus - Trip level Setting a trip level for the ground-fault current (30 mA to 40 A in 10 mA increments, default: 1000 mA). If the ground-fault current exceeds the trip level, the ground-fault current monitor responds. This setting can be modified during operation.


EMplus - Warning level Setting a warning level for the ground-fault current (20 mA to 40 A in 10 mA increments, default: 500 mA). If the ground-fault current exceeds the warning level, the ground-fault current monitor responds. This setting can be modified during operation.


EMplus - Response to warning of an external ground fault Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the warning level for the ground-fault current is undershot (default setting: deactivated).

See also External ground-fault monitoring (Page 196)

EMplus - Response to an external ground fault Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the trip level for the ground-fault current is undershot (default setting: signaling)





EMplus - Delay - Trip/warning level Selection of the delay time (0 to 25.5 s) for the set response (signaling, warning, tripping).

Setting range for the delay time if the trip level is undershot: 0 to 25.5 s (default setting: 0.5 s) 1)

Setting range for the delay time if the warning level is undershot: 0 to 25.5 s (default setting: 0.1 s) 1)

The delay time can be modified during operation. 1) Extension of the residual current transformer delay


External ground-fault monitoring - Delay Selection of the delay time (0 to 25.5 s, default setting: 0.5 s), which is an additional delay to that for the summation current transformer, for the set response (signaling, warning, tripping). The delay time can be modified during operation.


Internal ground-fault monitoring - Response Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond to an internal ground fault (default setting: deactivated).

See also Internal ground-fault monitoring (Page 195)

External ground-fault monitoring - Response Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond to an external ground fault (default setting: signaling).





Internal ground-fault monitoring - Delay Selection of the delay time (0 to 25.5 s, default setting: 0.5 s) for the set response (signaling, warning, tripping). The delay time can be modified during operation.


1.4.5.2 Current limits

Monitoring current limits - Trip level I> (high limit) Setting of a trip level I> for the motor current (0 to 1020% of setting current Is in 4% increments, default setting: 0), at which SIMOCODE pro will generate a message or trip the motor. The response is triggered as soon as the current of one or more phases exceeds this level. This setting can be modified during operation.

See also Current limits I> (upper limit) (Page 198)

Monitoring current limits - Response when trip level I> reached Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the trip level I> is exceeded (default setting: deactivated).


Monitoring current limits - Warning level I> (high limit) Setting of a warning level I> for the motor current (0 to 1020% of setting current Is in 4% increments, default setting: 0), at which SIMOCODE pro will generate a message or an alarm. The message or alarm is generated as soon as the current of one or more phases exceeds this level. This setting can be modified during operation.


Monitoring current limits - Response when warning level I> reached Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the warning level I> is exceeded (default setting: deactivated).





Monitoring current limits - Trip level I< (low limit) Setting of a trip level I< for the motor current (0 to 1020% of setting current Is in 4% increments, default setting: 0), at which SIMOCODE pro will generate a message or trip the motor. The response is triggered as soon as the current of one or more phases undershoots this level. This setting can be modified during operation.

See also Current limits I< (lower limit) (Page 199)

Monitoring current limits - Response when trip level I< not reached Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the trip level I< is undershot (default setting: deactivated).


Monitoring current limits - Warning level I< (low limit) Setting of a warning level I< for the motor current (0 to 1020% of setting current Is in 4% increments, default setting: 0), at which SIMOCODE pro will generate a message or an alarm. The message or alarm is tripped as soon as the current undershoots one or more phases of this level. This setting can be modified during operation.


Monitoring current limits - Response when warning level I< not reached Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the warning level I< is undershot (default setting: deactivated).





Monitoring current limits - Trip I> delay (high limit) Selection of the delay time (0 to 25.5 s, default setting: 0.5 s) for the set response (signaling, tripping). The delay time can be modified during operation.


Monitoring current limits - Warning I> delay (high limit) Selection of the delay time (0 to 25.5 s, default setting: 0.5 s) for the set response (signaling, warning). The delay time can be modified during operation.


Monitoring current limits - Trip < delay (low limit) Selection of the delay time (0 to 25.5 s, default setting: 0.5 s) for the set response (signaling, tripping). The delay time can be modified during operation.


Monitoring current limits - Warning I< delay (low limit) Selection of the delay time (0 to 25.5 s, default setting: 0.5 s) for the set response (signaling, warning). The delay time can be modified during operation.


Monitoring current limits - Hysteresis Here you can set the hysteresis for current limits (0 to 15% of the threshold value in 1% increments, default setting: 5%).

See also Current limits (Page 198)




1.4.5.3 Operation monitoring

Operating hours monitoring - Threshold Setting of the response threshold (0 to 1,193,046 hours, default setting: 0) for monitoring a motor's operating hours (service life). This setting can be modified during operation.

See also Operating hours monitoring (Page 209)

Operation monitoring (Page 207)

Monitoring of operating hours - Response to overshoot Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the set threshold (0 to 1,193,046 h) is exceeded (default setting: deactivated).



Stop time monitoring - Response to overshoot Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the set motor stop time (0 to 65535 h) is exceeded (default setting: deactivated).

See also Stop time monitoring (Page 209)


Stop time monitoring - level Setting of the threshold, i.e. the length of the permissible motor stop time (0 to 65535 hours, default setting: 0). If the permissible motor stop time is exceeded, SIMOCODE pro reacts as per the response which has been selected. The threshold setting can be modified during operation.

See also Stop time monitoring (Page 209)





Monitoring the number of starts - Interlocking time Setting of an interlocking time (00:00:00 to 18:12:15 hh:mm:ss, default setting: 00:00:00). If a new start command is issued within the start period after the last permitted start, it will not be executed if "Response to overshoot - Tripping" is set. The "Fault - No. of starts >" fault message is displayed and the set interlocking time is activated. This setting can be modified during operation.

See also Number of starts monitoring motor (Page 210)


Monitoring the number of starts - Start period Setting of a start period (00:00:00 to 18:12:15 hh:mm:ss, default setting: 00:00:00) for the permissible startup procedures. Once the parameterized start period has elapsed, the maximum number of starts is available once more. This setting can be modified during operation.



Monitoring the number of starts - Permissible starts Entry of the maximum number of permissible starts (1 to 255, default setting: 1). The set "start period" starts to elapse when the first start is executed. The setting of the maximum number of permissible starts can be modified during operation.



Monitoring the number of starts - Response to prewarning Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond following the penultimate start (default setting: deactivated).






Monitoring the number of starts - Response to overshoot Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the number of starts is exceeded during the start period (default setting: deactivated).



1.4.5.4 Voltage monitoring

Voltage monitoring - Response when trip level not reached (low limit) Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the voltage of one or more phases has undershot the trip level U< (default setting: deactivated).

See also Voltage monitoring (Page 201)

Voltage monitoring - Response when warning level not reached (low limit) Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the voltage of one or more phases has undershot the warning level U< (default setting: deactivated).


Voltage monitoring - Trip level (low limit) Setting of a trip level U< for the line voltage (0 to 2040 V in 8 V increments, default: 0), at which SIMOCODE pro will generate a message or trip the motor. The response is triggered as soon as the voltage of one or more phases undershoots this level. This setting can be modified during operation.





Voltage monitoring - Warning level (low limit) Setting of a warning level U< for the line voltage (0 to 2040 V in 8-V increments, default: 0), at which SIMOCODE pro will trip the motor. The response is triggered as soon as the voltage of one or more phases undershoots this level. This setting can be modified during operation.


Voltage monitoring - Trip level delay (low limit) Selection of the delay time (0 to 25.5 s, default setting: 0.5 s) for the set response (signaling, tripping). Can be modified during operation.


Voltage monitoring - Warning level delay (low limit) Selection of the delay time (0 to 25.5 s, default setting: 0.5 s) for the set response (signaling, warning). Can be modified during operation.


Voltage monitoring - Activity of trip level Definition of the motor operating states in which the trip level is to be active:

● always (on) 1): trip level always active, regardless of whether the motor is running or at a standstill

● always, except in the case of TPF (on+) (default): trip level always active, regardless of whether the motor is running or at a standstill; exception: "TPF", that is, motor feeder is in test position


1) When using basic unit 2 (product version *E03* and higher) with a current/voltage measuring module.





Voltage monitoring - Activity of warning level Definition of the motor operating states in which the warning level is to be active:

● always (on) 1): warning level always active, regardless of whether the motor is running or at a standstill

● always, except in the case of RMT (on+) (default): warning level always active, regardless of whether the motor is running or at a standstill; exception: "TPF", i.e. motor feeder is in test position


1) When using basic unit 2 (product version *E03* and higher) with a current/voltage measuring module


Voltage monitoring - Hysteresis for voltage, cos phi, power Here you can set the hysteresis for the voltage, cos phi and power (0 to 15% of the threshold value in 1% increments, default setting: 5%).


1.4.5.5 Cos phi monitoring

Cos phi monitoring - Response to trip level (lower limit) Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the cos phi has undershot the trip level cos phi< (default setting: deactivated).

See also Cos phi monitoring (Page 203)

Cos phi monitoring - Response to warning level (lower limit) Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the cos phi has undershot the warning level cos phi< (default setting: deactivated).





Cos phi monitoring - Trip level cos phi< (lower limit) Setting of a trip level cos phi< (lower limit) for the cos phi (0 to 100% of Is in 1% increments, default setting: 0) at which SIMOCODE pro will generate a message or trip the motor. This setting can be modified during operation.


Cos phi monitoring - Warning level cos phi< (lower limit) Setting of a warning level cos phi < (lower limit) for the cos phi (0 to 100% of Is in 1% increments, default setting: 0) at which SIMOCODE pro will generate a message or a warning. This setting can be modified during operation.


Cos phi monitoring - Trip level delay (lower limit) Selection of the delay time (0 to 25.5 s, default setting: 0.5 s) for the set response (signaling, tripping). Can be modified during operation.


Cos phi monitoring - Warning level delay (lower limit) Selection of the delay time (0 to 25.5 s, default setting: 0.5 s) for the set response (signaling, warning). Can be modified during operation.





1.4.5.6 Active power monitoring

Active power monitoring - Response when trip level reached (high limit) Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the active power has exceeded the trip level P> (default setting: deactivated).

See also Active power monitoring (Page 204)

Active power monitoring - Response when warning level reached (high limit) Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the active power has exceeded the warning level P> (default setting: deactivated).


Active power monitoring - Response when trip level not reached (low limit) Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the active power has undershot the trip level P< (default setting: deactivated).


Active power monitoring - Response when warning level not reached (low limit) Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the active power has undershot the warning level P< (default setting: deactivated).


Active power monitoring - Trip level delay (high limit) Selection of the delay time (0 to 25.5 s, default setting: 0.5 s) for the set response (signaling, tripping). Can be modified during operation.





Active power monitoring - Warning level delay (high limit) Selection of the delay time (0 to 25.5 s, default setting: 0.5 s) for the set response (signaling, warning). Can be modified during operation.


Active power monitoring - Trip level delay (low limit) Selection of the delay time (0 to 25.5 s, default setting: 0.5 s) for the set response (signaling, tripping). Can be modified during operation.


Active power monitoring - Warning level delay (low limit) Selection of the delay time (0 to 25.5 s, default setting: 0.5 s) for the set response (signaling, warning). Can be modified during operation.


Active power monitoring - Trip level P> (high limit) Setting of a trip level P> for the active power (0.000 to 4,294,967.295 kW, default setting: 0.000) at which SIMOCODE pro will generate a message or trip the motor. This setting can be modified during operation.


Active power monitoring - Warning level P> (high limit) Setting of a warning level P> for the active power (0.000 to 4,294,967.295 kW, default setting: 0.000) at which SIMOCODE pro will generate a message or a warning. This setting can be modified during operation.





Active power monitoring - Trip level P< (low limit) Setting of a trip level P< for the active power (0.000 to 4,294,967.295 kW, default setting: 0.000) at which SIMOCODE pro will generate a message or trip the motor. This setting can be modified during operation.


Active power monitoring - Warning level P< (low limit) Setting of a warning level P< for the active power (0.000 to 4,294,967.295 kW, default setting: 0.000) at which SIMOCODE pro will generate a message or a warning. This setting can be modified during operation.


1.4.5.7 0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring

0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring (upper limit) - Trip level activity Definition of the motor operating states in which the trip level is to be active:


● always, except TPF (on+): trip level is always active regardless of whether the motor is running or at a standstill, with the exception of "TPF", i.e. motor feeder is in the test position



See also 0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring (Page 205)




0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring (upper limit) - Warning level activity Definition of the motor operating states in which the warning level is to be active:


● always, except TPF (on+): warning level is always active regardless of whether the motor is running or at a standstill, with the exception of "TPF", i.e. motor feeder is in the test position




0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring (lower limit) - Trip level activity Definition of the motor operating states in which the trip level is to be active:


● always, except TPF (on+): trip level always active, regardless of whether the motor is running or at a standstill; exception: "TPF", i.e. motor feeder is in test position







0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring (lower limit) - Warning level activity Definition of the motor operating states in which the warning level is to be active:


● always, except TPF (on+): warning level always active, regardless of whether the motor is running or at a standstill; exception: "TPF", i.e. motor feeder is in test position




0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring - Response to trip level (upper limit) Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the analog signal 0 / 4-20 mA has overshot trip level 0 / 4-20 mA (default setting: deactivated).


0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring - Response to warning level (upper limit) Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the analog signal 0 / 4 - 20 mA has overshot warning level 0 / 4 - 20 mA (default setting: deactivated).


0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring - Response to trip level (lower limit) Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the analog signal 0 / 4-20 mA has undershot trip level 0 / 4-20 mA (default setting: deactivated).





0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring - Response to warning level (lower limit) Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the analog signal 0 / 4 - 20 mA has undershot warning level 0 / 4 - 20 mA (default setting: deactivated).


0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring - Trip level (upper limit) Setting of a trip level 0 / 4 - 20 mA> for the 0 / 4 - 20 mA output signal (0.0 to 23.6 mA, default setting: 0.0 mA) at which SIMOCODE pro will generate a message or trip the motor. This setting can be modified during operation.


0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring - Warning level (upper limit) Setting of a warning level 0 / 4 - 20 mA> for the 0 / 4 - 20 mA output signal (0.0 to 23.6 mA, default setting: 0.0 mA) at which SIMOCODE pro will generate a message or an alarm. This setting can be modified during operation.


0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring - Trip level (lower limit) Setting of a trip level 0 / 4 - 20 mA< for the 0 / 4 - 20 mA output signal (0.0 to 23.6 mA, default setting: 0.0 mA) at which SIMOCODE pro will generate a message or trip the motor. This setting can be modified during operation.


0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring - Warning level (lower limit) Setting of a warning level 0 / 4 - 20 mA< for the 0 / 4 - 20 mA output signal (0.0 to 23.6 mA, default setting: 0.0 mA) at which SIMOCODE pro will generate a message or an alarm. This setting can be modified during operation.





Monitoring 0 / 4 - 20 mA - Trip level delay (high limit) Selection of the delay time (0 to 25.5 s, default setting: 0.5 s) for the set response (signaling, tripping). The delay time can be modified during operation.


Monitoring 0 / 4 - 20 mA - Warning level delay (high limit) Selection of the delay time (0 to 25.5 s, default setting: 0.5 s) for the set response (signaling, warning). The delay time can be modified during operation.


Monitoring 0 / 4 - 20 mA - Trip level delay (low limit) Selection of the delay time (0 to 25.5 s, default setting: 0.5 s) for the set response (signaling, tripping). The delay time can be modified during operation.


Monitoring 0 / 4 - 20 mA - Warning level delay (low limit) Selection of the delay time (0 to 25.5 s, default setting: 0.5 s) for the set response (signaling, warning). The delay time can be modified during operation.


Monitoring 0 / 4 - 20 mA (high limit) - Marking The marking is saved in the device and assigned and displayed in the "Faults/Warnings" online dialog box. Optional marking for identifying the message, e.g. "0 / 4 to 20 mA >"; range: maximum 10 characters.





0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring (low limit) - Marking The marking is saved in the device and assigned and displayed in the "Faults/Warnings" online dialog box. Optional marking for identifying the message, e.g. "0 / 4 to 20 mA<"; range: maximum 10 characters.


0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring - Hysteresis Here you can set the hysteresis for the 0 / 4 - 20 mA analog signal (0 to 15% of the threshold value in 1% increments, default setting: 5%).


1.4.5.8 Temperature monitoring

Temperature monitoring - Response when trip level T> reached Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the temperature has exceeded the trip level T> (default setting: tripping).

See also Temperature monitoring (analog) (Page 211)

Temperature monitoring - Response when warning level T> reached Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the temperature has exceeded the warning level T> (default setting: warning).


Temperature monitoring - Hysteresis Here you can set the hysteresis for the temperature (0 to 255 °C in 1 °C increments, default setting: 5 °C).





Temperature monitoring - Trip level T> Setting of a trip level T> for the temperature at the temperature sensors (-273 °C to 65,262 °C) at which SIMOCODE pro will generate a message or shut the motor down. This setting can be modified during operation.


Temperature monitoring - Warning level T> Setting of a warning level T> for the temperature at the temperature sensors (-273 °C to 65,262 °C) at which SIMOCODE pro will generate a message or an alarm. This setting can be modified during operation.


Temperature monitoring - Trip level marking - Warning level Optional marking for identifying the message, e.g. "Temperature>"; range: maximum 10 characters.


1.4.5.9 Monitoring interval for mandatory testing

Monitoring interval to mandatory testing - response You can define here the behavior when the set limit is reached (default: deactivated).

See also Monitoring interval for mandatory testing (Page 213)

Monitoring - Interval to mandatory testing - Test interval Adjustable limit for the interval for mandatory testing: Range: 0 to 255 weeks (default: 0).





1.4.6 Inputs

1.4.6.1 Digital module inputs

Digital module inputs - Delay If required, you can set a delay for the inputs (6, 16, 26, 36 ms, default setting: 16 ms) in order to prevent temporary faults being incorrectly identified as signals, for example. These values apply to digital modules with a 24 V DC input supply. The values are approximately 40 ms higher for digital modules with input supplies of 110 to 240 V AC/DC.

Notice

Delay times for the digital module inputs can only be set, or are only relevant, if "monostable" or "bistable" is set for digital module 1.

If digital module 1 is a DM-F PROFIsafe, the delay time cannot be set.

If digital module 1 is a DM-F Local, the delay times are set using the DIP switch of the DM-F Local on the front.

See also Digital module inputs (Page 218)

1.4.6.2 Basic unit inputs

Basic unit inputs - Delays If required, you can set a delay for the basic unit inputs (6, 16, 26, 36 ms, default setting: 16 ms) to prevent temporary faults being incorrectly detected as signals, for example.

See also Basic unit inputs (Page 215)

1.4.6.3 Analog module inputs

Analog module inputs - Active inputs Select whether only 1 analog module input or 2 analog module inputs are to be activated.

See also Analog module inputs (Page 223)




Analog module inputs - Response to open circuit Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond to an open circuit (default setting: warning).


Analog module inputs - Input signal measuring range Selection of the range of values (0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA, default setting: 0 to 20 mA) of the analog module input signal.


1.4.6.4 Temperature module inputs

Temperature module inputs - Response to sensor fault/out of range Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond to a fault in the sensor measuring circuits (default setting: warning).

See also Temperature module inputs (Page 221)

Temperature module inputs - Number of active sensors Setting of the number of active sensors (1, 2, or 3; default setting: 3).


Temperature module inputs - Sensor type Selection of the sensor type (PT100, PT1000, KTY83, KTY84, NTC, default setting: PT100).





1.4.7 Outputs

1.4.7.1 Basic unit outputs

BU output The "BU output" function block can be activated by any signal (e.g. device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits, QE contactor control).

See also Basic unit (Page 231)

1.4.7.2 Cyclic send data

Cyclic send - Byte 0, byte 1 Different types of send data can be cyclically transmitted to the automation system via PROFIBUS DP.


See also Cyclic send data (Page 238)

Cyclic send - Byte 2/3 Different types of send data can be cyclically transmitted to the automation system via PROFIBUS DP.

To activate a word, select any analog value (any socket, e.g. maximum current Imax, remaining cooling down period, timer actual value, etc.).


Cyclic send - Byte 4/5, 6/7, 8/9 Different types of send data can be cyclically transmitted to the automation system via PROFIBUS DP.

To activate four words, select any analog value.





1.4.7.3 Acyclic send data

Acyclic send Different types of send data can be transmitted to the automation system via PROFIBUS DP at irregular intervals (acyclically).


See also Acyclic send data (Page 240)

1.4.7.4 Operator panel LED

OP LED green Green 1 to Green 4:

The "OP LED" function block can be activated by any signal (any sockets, e.g. feedback, motor operating state).

See also Operator panel LED (Page 233)

OP LED yellow Yellow 1 to yellow 3:

The "OP LED" function block can be activated by any signal (any sockets, e.g. status displays, events, faults).





1.4.7.5 Digital module outputs

DM - Output The "DM1 output" and "DM2 output" function blocks can be activated by any signal (any sockets, e.g. device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits, etc.), usually the QE contactor controls.

See also Digital module (Page 234)

1.4.7.6 Analog module - output

Analog module output - Start-value range Selection of the range of values (0 to 65,535, default setting: 0) for the start value of the analog module output signal. If the output is to be used as the current source for an analog output circuit, this value (and the end-value range) must be set to 65,535. This setting can be modified during operation.

See also Analog module (Page 236)

Analog module output - End-value range Selection of the range of values (0 to 65535, default setting: 27648) for the end value of the analog module output signal. If the output is to be used as the current source for an analog output circuit, this value (and the start-value range) must be set to 65,535. This setting can be modified during operation.


Analog module - Output The analog module allows you to expand basic unit 2 by one analog output. The corresponding function block allows every analog value (2 bytes/1 word) in SIMOCODE pro to be output as a 0/4-20 mA signal to a connected pointer instrument, for example. If the function block is activated via the "Assigned analog output value" plug using any integer value between 0 and 65535, an equivalent analog signal of 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA will be sent to the output terminals of the analog module.





Analog module output - Assigned analog output value Set any value available in SIMOCODE pro (1 word/2 bytes).


1.4.8 Standard functions

1.4.8.1 OPO - Positioner response Specification of the positioner response (only for "Positioner" control functions) if an input signal is pending:

● "CLOSED": Positioner runs in "CLOSED" direction

● "OPEN": Positioner runs in "OPEN" direction.

See also Operational protection OFF (OPO) (Page 250)

1.4.8.2 Test/Reset

Standard functions - Test/Reset buttons blocked Activate the "Test/Reset buttons blocked" checkbox if you want to block the Test/Reset buttons on the basic unit and the operator panel for fault acknowledgment/device tests so that you can then assign other functions to them instead.






1.4.8.3 Test position feedback, TPF

Test position feedback (TPF) - Type (level of controlled run-down to cold condition) In the context of the "Cold restart" function test (testing the motor feeder with no current in the main circuit), activate the "NO contact" option if you want to set the input logic of the "Test position feedback" function block to "1-active" (default setting), or the "NC contact" option if you want to set the same input logic to "0-active".

See also Test position feedback (TPF) (Page 245)

Test position feedback - Input Select any signal (any socket, e.g. device input).


1.4.8.4 External fault

External fault 1-6 - Response Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond to an external fault (devices, states) (default setting: signaling).

See also External fault (Page 247)

External fault 1-6 - Reset also using Specification of further (common) acknowledgment options using additional reset types:

● Test/Reset buttons on the basic unit and the operator panel or, in the case of the operator panel with display, via the menu (panel reset) (set by default)

● Remote reset: Acknowledgment via reset 1 to 3, DPV1, "Reset" command (default)

● Auto reset: The fault resets itself after the cause has been eliminated (after removal of the activation signal)

● Off command reset: "OFF" control command, resets the fault





External fault - Input The "External fault" function block can be used to monitor any statuses or external devices and to generate fault messages or trip the motor, if required. The block is addressed by the signal to be monitored: Select any socket, e.g. device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits.


External fault - Reset input A specific reset input is also available in addition to the other reset options (remote reset, Test/Reset button, OFF command reset). Furthermore, auto reset can also be activated.

Acknowledge the "External fault" fault via any signal (any socket, e.g. device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits).


External fault - Marking Optional marking for identifying the message, e.g. "Speed>"; range: maximum 10 characters.


External fault 1-6 - Activity Select the "Always" option if a fault evaluation is always to be performed, regardless of whether the motor is running or at a standstill.

Select the "Only if motor is running" option if a fault evaluation is only to be performed if the motor is ON.





External fault 1-6 - Type Activate

● The "NO contact" option if you want to set the input logic of the "External fault" function block to "1-active" (default setting)

● The "NC contact" option if you want to set the input logic of the "Test position feedback" function block to "0-active".


1.4.8.5 Emergency start

Standard functions - Emergency start - Input The "Emergency start" function block can be addressed by any signal (any sockets, e.g. device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits, etc.) and is edge-active. "Emergency start" deletes the SIMOCODE pro thermal memory each time it is activated.

See also Emergency start (Page 253)

1.4.8.6 Safety-related tripping

Standard functions - Safety-related tripping - Response Here you can adjust the response of SIMOCODE pro in the case of a safety-related tripping by the DM-F Local or DM-F PROFIsafe (default: deactivated).

Notes:

1. In the event that the option "DM-F LOCAL / Separate PROFIsafe function from control function" has been activated under "Motor control > Control function > Operating mode", only "Deactivated", "Signaling" or "Warning" can be set and not "Tripping".

2. The response of the modules is not influenced by this setting. If the conditions for safety-related disconnection are met, the enable circuits are always disabled!

See also Safety-related tripping (Page 254)




Standard functions - Safety-related tripping - Reset Here you can specify whether a SIMOCODE pro fault caused by the safety-related disconnection is to be acknowledged manually or automatically (default: Manual).


Standard functions - Safety-related tripping - Without / with cross-circuit detection

With/without cross-circuit detection: Cross-circuit detection is only possible with floating sensors. You must connect the sensors between T1 – Y12, Y33 and T2 – Y22, Y34. The device anticipates the T1 terminal test signal at the terminals Y12 and Y33, and the T2 terminal test signal at the terminals Y22 and Y34. The device detects a sensor fault if the signal at the terminals Y12 and Y33 or Y22 and Y34 does not agree with the test signals T1 or T2.

Deactivate cross-circuit detection if electronic sensors such as light arrays or laser scanners are connected. In this case, the DM-F LOCAL no longer monitors the sensor inputs for cross-circuits. Usually, the outputs of safety sensors (OSSD) are already monitored for cross-circuits in the sensor itself. If "without cross-circuit detection" is set on the device, the test outputs T1 and T2 are deactivated and may no longer be connected. At the inputs Y12 and Y22 as well as Y33 and Y34, the DM-F Local expects a 24 V DC signal from the same current source as the one from which the device receives its power supply (possible only in the case of DM-F Local*1AB00) or from T3 (static 24 V DC).

In the case of the DM-F Local-*1AU00 variant, you must connect the terminal T3 to the floating sensor contacts due to the electrical isolation of the input circuit and sensor supply.


Standard functions - Safety-related tripping - 1NC + 1NO evaluation / 2NC evaluation

1NC + 1NO evaluation / 2NC evaluation In addition to 2-channel connection of the same types of sensor contacts (NC/NC), sensors with opposite types of contacts (NC/NO), as are frequently used in the case of electromagnetic switches, can also be evaluated. Make sure that the normally closed contact is connected to Y12, and the normally open contact to Y22.





Standard functions - Safety-related tripping - 2 x 1-channel / 1x 2-channel

2 x 1-channel / 1 x 2-channel: ● 2 sensors with one contact each (2 x 1-channel) (NC/NC). It is expected that both

sensors are AND-connected. Simultaneity is not monitored.

● 1 sensor with two contacts each (1 x 2-channel) (NC/NC). It is expected that both contacts are opened simultaneously.


Standard functions - Safety-related tripping - Delays for sensor inputs 50 ms / 10 ms

Delays for sensor inputs 50 ms / 10 ms ● Delay 50 ms: Switch position changes of strongly bouncing contacts are suppressed (e.g.

position switches on heavy protective doors).

● Delay 10 ms: The shorter delay permits faster deactivation of bounce-free sensors (e.g. light arrays).


Standard functions - Safety-related tripping - Autostart / monitored start sensor input

Autostart / monitored start sensor input ● Autostart: The enabling circuits are switched to the active position as soon as the switch-

on condition is satisfied at the Y12, Y22, Y34 and 1 sensor inputs. The start button connection terminal Y33 is not queried.

● Monitored start: The enabling circuits are switched to the active position as soon as the switch-on condition is satisfied at the Y12, Y22, Y34 and 1 sensor inputs, and the start button at the Y33 terminal is actuated (start at falling edge).





Standard functions - Safety-related tripping - Autostart / monitored start cascading input

Autostart / monitored start cascading input ● Autostart: The enabling circuits are switched to the active position as soon as the switch-

on condition at cascading input 1 is satisfied, i.e. as soon as a static 24 V DC signal is present (e.g. from T3).

● Monitored start: The enabling circuits are switched to the active position as soon as the switch-on condition at cascading input 1 is satisfied, i.e. as soon as a static 24 V DC signal is present (e.g. from T3), and the START button at the Y33 terminal is actuated (start at falling edge).


Standard functions - Safety-related tripping - With / without startup testing



Standard functions - Safety-related tripping - With autom. startup / without autom. startup after power failure

With automatic startup / without automatic startup after power failure: The parameters of the DM-F Local can be defined so that the enabling circuits switch automatically to the active position again after a power failure, i.e. without actuation of the start button Y33.

Requirements:

● Y12, Y22 or the cascading input 1 are set to "monitored start".

● The switch-on condition at the sensor inputs and at the cascading input is satisfied.

● The START button was actuated before the power failure and this was valid, i.e. the enabling circuits were in the active position.





1.4.8.7 Watchdog (PLC/PCS Monitoring)

Standard functions - Watchdog - Bus/PLC fault - Reset Select whether faults are to be acknowledged automatically or manually.

See also Watchdog (Bus monitoring, PLC/PCS monitoring) (Page 258)

Standard functions - Watchdog - Bus monitoring ● Activated: If a bus fault occurs, the "Fault - Bus" fault message is generated and must be

acknowledged.



Standard functions - Watchdog - PLC/PCS monitoring ● Activated: If a PLC fault occurs, the "PLC/PCS fault" fault message is generated and

must be acknowledged.



Watchdog PLC/PCS monitoring - Input The "Watchdog" function block can be activated by a signal that is to be monitored (e.g. PROFIBUS DP control bits).

If PLC/PCS monitoring is activated, a "Fault - PLC/PCS" fault message is generated and must be acknowledged. If it is deactivated, no fault message is generated.





1.4.8.8 Operational Protection Off

Operational protection off - Input Select any signal (any socket, e.g. device input).


Operational protection off - Type Specification of the input logic of the "Operational protection off" function block: Normally open contact = 1 active (default setting), normally closed contact = 0 active.


1.4.8.9 Power failure monitoring

Power failure monitoring (UVO) - Addressing external power failure monitoring Select any signal (any sockets, e.g. device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits).

See also Power failure monitoring (UVO) (Page 251)

Power failure monitoring (UVO) - Type Specification of the type of power failure monitoring:

● Deactivated

● No interruption of device power supply. The SIMOCODE pro control voltage is maintained. The failure of the line voltage must be detected, for example, by a separate voltage relay.





Power failure monitoring (UVO) - Power failure time

Power failure time Time that starts when the power fails.

● If the line voltage is restored within the power failure time, all drives which were running prior to the power failure are reconnected automatically.

● If the line voltage is not restored within the power failure time, the drives remain disconnected and the "Fault - Power failure (UVO)" message is generated. Once the line voltage has been restored, this fault message can be acknowledged using "Reset".

Range:

0 to 25.5 s, in increments of 0.1 s

26 to 255 s, in increments of 1 s

256 to 2550 s, in increments of 10 s.


Power failure monitoring (UVO) - Restart time delay Setting of a restart time delay (0 to 255 s, default setting: 0) to enable staggered motor startup following power restoration, thus preventing the line voltage from dropping.


Power failure monitoring (UVO) - Fault The "Power failure monitoring" function block is activated by the signal to be monitored (any socket, e.g. device input, PROFIBUS DP control bits, etc.).

The following setting options are available:

1. All contactors (QE) are disconnected immediately after the monitoring relay has been operated/the input has been activated (UVO).

2. If the voltage is restored within the "power failure time", the motor will be reset to its previous state. This can either be done immediately or with a time delay (restart time delay).

3. If the "power failure time" elapses without the voltage being restored, the device enters the fault state (undervoltage-off fault).





1.4.8.10 Time stamping

Time stamping active SIMOCODE pro V can timestamp up to eight digital signals with high temporal precision (10 ms). In the process, every change in the state of the digital signal will be recorded.

Possible fields of application:

● Precise chronological recording of faults in a procedural system



Activate the "Time stamping active" checkbox if you want to use this function.

See also Time stamping (Page 259)

Time stamping - Input Select any signal (socket).


1.4.9 Logic modules

1.4.9.1 Counter

Counter - Input +, input -, reset Counters are activated via the plugs "+" or "-". The counter output switches to "1" when the preset limit is reached. The counter is reset with "Reset". The current actual value is also available for internal processing and to the automation system.


● Three plugs (input +, input – and reset)


● One socket






See also Counter (Page 265)

Limit monitor (Page 274)

Counter - Limit Value (0 to 65535, default: 0) that can be reached when counting and at which the counter issues an output signal. This value can be modified during operation.


Limit monitor (Page 274)

1.4.9.2 Timer

Timer - Type Select one of the following as the type for the timer output signal:



● With off delay

● With fleeting closing

See also Timer (Page 267)

External fault (Page 247)

Timer - Limit Time (0 to 6,553.5 s, default setting: 0) at which the timer issues an output signal during addressing, depending on the timer type (output response). This value can be modified during operation.





Timer - Input - Reset The timer consists of


● One socket


The current actual value (reset = 0) is available as a socket for further internal processing and can also be transmitted to the automation system. If an input signal is pending, the timer issues an output signal according to the chosen timer type:

● Closing delay (with and without memory)

● Opening delay

With fleeting closing



1.4.9.3 Signal conditioning

Signal conditioning - Type Select one of the following as the type for the signal conditioning output signal:


● Level inverted



See also Signal conditioning (Page 268)




Signal conditioning- Input and reset If an input signal is pending, the signal conditioning issues an output signal according to the selected signal conditioning type:

● Non-inverting

● Inverting



The signal conditioning is reset to 0 when a reset is performed. The signal conditioning consists of



● One socket



1.4.9.4 Non-volatile element

Non-volatile element - Type Select one of the following output responses for the non-volatile element:


● Level inverted



See also Non-volatile element (Page 270)




Non-volatile element - Input and reset Non-volatile elements respond in the same way as signal conditioning, but are not retained if the supply voltage fails. If an input signal is pending, the signal conditioning issues an output signal according to the set signal conditioning type (non-inverting, inverting, edge rising with memory, edge falling with memory).




● One socket

The signal conditioning is reset to 0 when a reset is performed.


1.4.9.5 Flashing




● One plug


● One socket.

See also Flashing (Page 272)







● One plug


● One socket.





● One plug


● One socket.


1.4.9.6 Flicker



● One plug


● One socket

See also Flicker (Page 273)






● One plug


● One socket




● One plug


● One socket


1.4.9.7 Limit monitor

Hysteresis for limit monitor Setting of the hysteresis for the limit monitor (0 to 15% of the threshold value in 1% increments, default setting: 5%).

See also Limit monitor (Page 274)

Limit monitor - Marking Optional marking for identifying the message, e.g. "Limit>"; range: maximum 10 characters.





Limit monitor - Activity Specification of the motor operating states in which the limit monitor is to be evaluated:

● always (on) (default setting): always evaluate, regardless of whether the motor is running or at a standstill

● always, except TPF (on+): always evaluate, regardless of whether the motor is running or at a standstill, with the exception of "TPF", i.e. motor feeder is in the test position

● Only evaluate if the motor is ON and not in the test position (TPF)

● Only evaluate if the motor is running, the startup procedure has been completed, and no test position (TPF) is detected; example: cos phi monitoring


Limit monitor - Delay Selection of the delay time (0 to 25.5 s, default setting: 0.5 s) for the set response (signaling). The delay time can be modified during operation.


Limit monitor - Limit Operating value (0 to 65535, default setting: 0) for triggering a message indicating that the limit of the corresponding analog value (2 bytes/1 word) has exceeded/undershot the set limit. This value can be modified during operation.


Limit monitor - Input Connect the analog plug of the limit monitor to the value that is to be monitored (2 bytes), e.g. maximum current Imax, remaining cooling down period, timer actual value.





Limit monitor - Method Specification of whether the relevant analog value should be monitored to find out if it is exceeding (>) or undershooting (<) the limit (default setting: > exceeding).




● Two plugs


● One socket.



See also Truth table 2I/1O (Page 262)








● Three plugs


● One socket








● Five plugs


● Two sockets.









1.4.9.11 Calculators

Calculator - Input Both the "Calculator 1" and "Calculator 2" logic modules integrated in basic unit 2 contain the standard calculation modes and enable all analog values that occur in SIMOCODE pro to be adapted, calculated, and converted.





See also Calculator 1 (Page 276)

Calculator 2 (Page 279)

Calculator 1 - Numerator/Offset Setting of the range of values

● For the numerator of arithmetic function block 1 (-32,768 - +32,767)

● For an offset value, if required (addend within the Calculator 1 formula)


Calculator 1 - Denominator Setting of the range of values for the denominator of arithmetic function block 1 (0 to 255, increments of 1).





Calculator 2 - Operating mode Setting of the operating mode for arithmetic function block 2:

● Both inputs of word type: The analog value at input 1 is combined with the analog value at input 2 using a predefined formula and taking into account the specified parameters (numerators, denominators, offsets, operators).

● Inputs 1 and 2 correspond to a D word input: The analog values at inputs 1 and 2 are processed together as a double word. Input 1 represents the high word and input 2 the low word. The result is calculated by means of the formula defined for this operating mode using the specified parameters (numerators, denominators, offsets) and is output by the function block as 1 word/2 bytes. In this operating mode it is also possible to process double words (e.g. active power, apparent power) and to display them (2 bytes/1 word).


Calculator 2 - Numerator 1 Setting of the range of values for numerator 1 of arithmetic function block 2 (-128 - +127, increments of 1).


Calculator 2 - Denominator 1 Setting of the range of values for denominator 1 of arithmetic function block 2 (0 to 255, increments of 1).


Calculator 2 - Numerator 2 Setting of the range of values for numerator 2 of arithmetic function block 2 (0 to 255, increments of 1). Only relevant for operating mode 1 (both inputs "word" type).





Calculator 2 - Denominator 2 Setting of the range of values for denominator 2 of arithmetic function block 2 (-128 to +127, increments of 1).


Calculator 2 - Offset Setting of a range of values (-2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647) for an offset value (addend within the Calculator 2 formula), if required.


Calculator 2 - Operator Setting of the operator (+, -, *, /) for arithmetic function block 2 (only relevant for operating mode "both inputs 'word' type").



1.4.10.1 3UF50 compatibility mode Activate the "3UF50 - Compatibility mode" checkbox if a SIMOCODE DP device is to be used by a SIMOCODE pro device without changing the configuration. If the 3UF50 compatibility mode is activated, you can operate a SIMOCODE pro V basic unit 2 with a 3UF50 configuration. In this case, from the point of view of the PLC (master class 1) communication with SIMOCODE pro is the same as communication with SIMOCODE DP. SIMOCODE DP supports cyclic communication (basic types 1-3), diagnostics, as well as DPV1 data records (DR 130, DR 131, DR 133).

See also 3UF50 compatibility mode - diagram of the data (Page 282)




1.4.10.2 3UF50 basic type If the 3UF50 compatibility mode is activated (checkbox), you can set the basic type (1, 2, or 3) used to configure the SIMOCODE 3UF50.


1.4.10.3 3UF50 operating mode Setting which specifies whether SIMOCODE pro V is to be operated on PROFIBUS DP with DPV0 functions (standard) or DPV1 functions (including acyclic services and interrupts).


1.4.11 Analog value recording

1.4.11.1 Analog-value recording - Trigger edge Setting of the trigger edge (positive, negative, default setting: positive).

See also Analog value recording (Page 310)

1.4.11.2 Analog-value recording - Pre-trigger You can use the pre-trigger value (0 to 100% in 5% increments) to specify the time between starting analog value recording and the presence of the trigger signal. The pre-trigger is set as a percentage of the entire sampling time.


1.4.11.3 Analog-value recording - Sampling rate The recording time for any analog values (2 bytes/1 word) determines the sampling rate in SIMOCODE pro (sampling time = sampling rate[s] * 60). It can be set in 0.1 s increments, in the range 0.1 to 50 s (default setting: 0.1 s).





1.4.11.4 Analog-value recording - Assigned analog value The "Analog value recording" function block can be used to record any analog values (2 bytes/1 word) in SIMOCODE pro over a set period of time.

Select any analog value (1 word/2 bytes) in SIMOCODE pro.


1.4.11.5 Analog-value recording - Trigger input Analog value recording can be started by any signal at the trigger input.

Select any signal (any socket, e.g. device inputs, current flowing).


1.4.12 Online parameters

1.4.12.1 Online - status command start pause Change-over pause active:

With the control functions "Dahlander", "Dahlander reversing starter", "Pole-changing starter" and "Pole-changing reversing starter", the change-over from fast to slow speed can be delayed with the set time 0.00 s to 655.35 s; default: 0.00 s).

With the control functions "Star-delta starter" and "Star-delta reversing starter", the change-over pause extends the time between disconnecting the star contactor and switching on the delta contactor by the set time.

See also Saving change-over command (Page 191)

1.4.12.2 Online - event short circuit Short-circuit detection has responded.




See also Messages (Page 298)

1.4.12.3 Online - event open circuit Open circuit detection has responded.


1.4.12.4 Online - event InM deleted The initialization module was deleted and is now back in the as-delivered state.


1.4.12.5 Online - event InM programmed The reparameterization was accepted in the initialization module.


1.4.12.6 Online - event InM read-in The parameters of the memory module were read into SIMOCODE.


1.4.12.7 Online - event InM Ident Data readonly The device addressing and the I&M data in the initialization module are write-protected. Parameterization will only be accepted by SIMOCODE pro if the new parameter set is identical to the data stored in the initialization module at that time.

● Select a parameterization with identical addressing and I&M data

● Deactivate the partial write protection of the initialization module.





1.4.12.8 Online - event InM readonly The initialization module is fully write-protected. Deactivate the write protection of the initialization module.


1.4.12.9 Online - event MeM readonly The memory module is fully write-protected. Deactivate the write protection of the memory module.


1.4.12.10 Online - status InM readonly Change not possible The initialization modules is completely or partially write-protected. Reparameterization of SIMOCODE pro is denied because the initialization module is write-protected.

Deactivate write protection of the initialization module.


1.4.12.11 Online - warning EMplus short circuit Short-circuit detection has responded.

See also Warnings (Page 294)

1.4.12.12 Online - warning EMplus open circuit Open circuit detection has responded.





1.4.12.13 Online - trip EMplus short circuit Short-circuit detection has responded.

See also Faults (Page 288)

1.4.12.14 Online - trip EMplus open circuit Open circuit detection has responded.


1.4.12.15 Online - E module P ground-fault current Impermissibly high fault current.


1.4.12.16 Online - E module P last Last trip current


Tooltips SIRIUS + SIMOCODE 1.5 Help texts for function blocks and connection blocks in the CFC Editor



1.5 Help texts for function blocks and connection blocks in the CFC Editor

1.5.1 Protection/Control The function block "Protect/control" is the central motor protection and control block that performs the fundamental motor protection and control functions dependent on the selected control function, the pending input signals, and the set parameters.


1.5.2 Extended protection The function block "Extended protection" is the extended part of the central function block "Protect/control" and contains additional parameters and status signals related to the motor protection functions.

See also Motor protection introduction (Page 173)

1.5.3 Extended control The function block "Extended control" is the advanced part of the central function block "Protection/control" and contains additional parameters and status signals related to the control function.


Control function (Page 188)

1.5.4 Control stations Control stations are places from which control commands are issued to the motor or SIMOCODE pro. The "Control stations" function block is used for administration, switching and prioritization of these different control stations.






1.5.5 Thermistor Thermistor protection is based on a direct temperature measurement in the motor via binary PTC thermistors which can be connected to the basic unit.


1.5.6 Analog value recording This function block can be used to record any analog values in SIMOCODE pro over a set period of time.


Analog value recording (Page 310)

1.5.7 Ground fault SIMOCODE pro acquires and monitors all three phase currents. By evaluating the summation current of the three current values, the motor feeder can be monitored for a possible fault current or ground fault.


External ground-fault monitoring (Page 196)

1.5.8 Current limits Monitoring of current limits is used for process monitoring independent of overload protection. SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase monitoring of the motor current for freely selectable upper and lower current limit values.





Current limits I< (lower limit) (Page 199)

1.5.9 Voltage SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase undervoltage monitoring of either a three-phase network or a single-phase network for freely selectable limits. Voltage measuring is carried out using current/voltage measuring modules. This is based on the minimum voltage of all voltages Umin.


1.5.10 Power factor (cos phi) Cos phi monitoring monitors the load condition of inductive loads. The main field of application is for asynchronous motors in 1-phase or 3-phase networks with loads that fluctuate significantly.


1.5.11 Active power SIMOCODE pro can indirectly monitor the state of a device or system via the active power. SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase monitoring of the active power for freely selectable upper and lower current limits.


1.5.12 0/4-20 mA (analog module 1) SIMOCODE pro can monitor the operating hours and stop times of a motor and restrict the number of start-ups in a defined time frame in order to avoid plant downtimes due to failed motors caused by running or being stopped for too long.





Analog module (Page 236)

1.5.13 Operation monitoring SIMOCODE pro can monitor the operating hours and stop times of a motor and restrict the number of start-ups in a defined time frame in order to avoid plant downtimes due to failed motors caused by running or being stopped for too long.

See also Operation monitoring (Page 207)

1.5.14 Monitoring interval for mandatory testing Function for monitoring the interval between the connection and the tripping of the enabling circuit (actuator tripping). The monitoring time starts anew every time the enabling circuit closes. This function supports you in maintaining test intervals requiring verification.


1.5.15 Temperature (TM1) Temperature monitoring (e.g. of the motor windings, or the motor bearings) can be performed using up to three analog temperature sensors. Temperature monitoring takes into account the highest temperature of all the sensor measuring circuits of the temperature module.


1.5.16 BU inputs Appropriate to the inputs on the basic unit, the function block "BU inputs" with four binary inputs is available in SIMOCODE pro. You can connect, for example, the buttons for a local control station to the inputs.




See also Basic unit inputs (Page 215)

1.5.17 OP buttons The operator panel contains freely usable buttons. Correspondingly, the "OP buttons" function block is available in SIMOCODE pro with five sockets.

See also Operator panel buttons (Page 216)

1.5.18 DM1 inputs, DM2 inputs Appropriate to the digital modules, SIMOCODE pro has the "DM inputs" function blocks, each with 4 binary inputs. You can connect, for example, the buttons for a local control station to the inputs.

See also Digital module inputs (Page 218)

1.5.19 TM1 inputs Appropriate to the temperature module, SIMOCODE pro has a "TM inputs" function block with three analog sockets corresponding to the three sensor measuring circuits. The temperature (in K) of the three measuring circuits can be read from these sockets. An additional analog socket always supplies the maximum temperature of all three measured temperatures.


1.5.20 AM1 inputs The inputs of the analog module are available on the appropriate "AM inputs" function block. On the corresponding analog sockets of the function block, the analog signal is represented as a word in S7 format (0 to 27648).





1.5.21 Cycl. receive byte 0, cycl. receive byte 1, cycl. receive byte 2/3, cycl. receive byte 4/5

With the "Cyclic receive" function block, you can specify which cyclic data from the automation system will be further processed via SIMOCODE pro.

See also Cyclic receive (Page 225)

1.5.22 BU outputs Appropriate to the relay outputs on the basic unit, the function block "BU outputs" with three binary outputs is available in SIMOCODE pro. The relay outputs can be used to activate contactors or indicator lights, for example.

See also Basic unit (Page 231)

1.5.23 OP LED The freely usable LEDs of the operator panel can be activated for displaying any status information using the "OP LED" function block.


1.5.24 DM1 outputs, DM2 outputs Appropriate to the digital modules, SIMOCODE pro has the "DM outputs" function blocks, each with two binary outputs. The relay outputs can be used to activate contactors or indicator lights, for example.

See also Digital module (Page 234)




1.5.25 AM1 output Appropriate to the output of the analog module, each analog value (0 to 65535) present in SIMOCODE pro can be mapped or output to a 0/4-20 mA signal using the "AM output" function block.


1.5.26 Cycl. send byte 0, cycl. send byte 1, cycl. send byte 2/3, cycl. send byte 4/9, cycl. send byte 10/19

The "Cyclic send" function blocks allow you to specify the information to be transferred cyclically to the automation system.


1.5.27 Test 1 A function test of SIMOCODE pro with testing/disconnection of the output relay can be initialized using the "Test 1" function block.

1.5.28 Test 2 A function test of SIMOCODE pro with testing/disconnection of the output relay can be initialized using the "Test 2" function block (usually for test via the bus).


1.5.29 Reset 1,2,3 In addition to the TEST/RESET buttons, SIMOCODE pro allows internal reset via the function blocks.





1.5.30 TPF You can carry out the "Cold run" function test of the motor feeder using the "Test position feedback (TPF)" function block. Current flow in the main circuit results here in immediate shutdown for safety reasons.


1.5.31 External fault 1,2,3,4,5,6 The "External fault 1-6" function blocks can be used to monitor any statuses and/or external devices, to generate fault messages and, if necessary, to switch off the motor.


1.5.32 OPO The "Operational Protection OFF (OPO)" function block puts the positioner into a safe position or switches a motor off.


1.5.33 UVO The "Power Failure Monitoring (UVO)" function block is activated via the plug. This is carried out via an external voltage relay that is connected to the function block via the binary inputs of SIMOCODE pro.





1.5.34 Emergency start Emergency start deletes the thermal memory from SIMOCODE pro each time it is activated. This allows the motor to be immediately restarted after an overload trip. If emergency starts are performed too frequently this may result in thermal overloading of the motor!

See also Emergency start (Page 253)

1.5.35 Safety-related tripping Function block for defining the SIMOCODE pro response to safety-related tripping via DM-F LOCAL or DM-F PROFIsafe.


1.5.36 Watchdog The "Watchdog" function block monitors communication with the PLC via PROFIBUS DP, as well as the operating state of the PLC in the "Remote" operating mode.


1.5.37 Time stamping SIMOCODE pro V can timestamp up to eight digital signals with high temporal precision (10 ms). In the process, every change in the state of the digital signal will be recorded.


1.5.38 Truth table TT 1 to 9, 3I/1O Truth tables enable the logical combination (AND, OR ...) of binary input signals with one or more binary output signal(s) in the form of a table.





Truth table 2I/1O (Page 262)

Truth table 5I/2O (Page 264)

1.5.39 Counters 1 to 4 Counters can be activated via the "+" or "-" connectors, or reset via their reset input. The actual counter value is always between 0 and the set limit value. When the limit value is reached, the counter output is activated.


1.5.40 Timers 1 to 4 If an input signal is pending, the timer issues an output signal according to the chosen timer type. The timer is restarted or the actual timer value is reset via the reset input.


1.5.41 Signal conditioning 1 to 4 The signal conditioning can be used to invert binary input signals, evaluate edges, or implement flip-flops.


1.5.42 Non-volatile elements 1 to 4 The non-volatile elements can be used to invert binary input signals, evaluate edges, or implement flip-flops. In contrast to the signal conditioning, the switching state of the output signal is not lost here even if the supply voltage is lost.





1.5.43 Flashing 1, 2, 3 If an input signal is pending at its plug, the "Flashing" logic module issues a signal to its socket, which alternates between binary 0 and 1 at a fixed frequency of 1 Hz.


1.5.44 Flicker 1, 2, 3 If an input signal is pending at its plug, the "Flicker" logic module issues a signal to its socket, which alternates between binary 0 and 1 at a fixed frequency of 4 Hz.


1.5.45 Limit monitors 1 to 4 With the limit monitor, any analog values (2 bytes / 1 word) can be monitored for limit overshooting or limit undershooting. The limit monitor issues the "Limit" signal at its socket. The unit of the monitored analog value must be noted when setting the limit value.


1.5.46 Calculator 1 to 2 The calculators can perform the basic arithmetic operations, and they enable the adaptation, calculation and conversion of each analog value available in SIMOCODE pro.


Calculator 2 (Page 279)




1.5.47 Device o.k. This status information is shown when SIMOCODE pro functions as intended.

1.5.48 Current flowing SIMOCODE pro's current measuring module provides the feedback as to whether current is flowing on the main current side.

1.5.49 Device test active This status information is shown when SIMOCODE pro is in the device test state.

1.5.50 General fault This status information is shown when there is a general fault.


1.5.51 General warning This status information is shown when there is a general warning.


1.5.52 Remote mode This status information is shown when SIMOCODE pro is in Remote mode.

1.5.53 Hardware fault basic unit This fault exists when the hardware of the SIMOCODE pro basic unit is defective.




1.5.54 Module fault This fault exists when the hardware of the SIMOCODE pro module is not ready for operation.

1.5.55 Temporary components This fault exists when a fault has been detected in the memory module, the address connector, or the PC cable at the system interface.

1.5.56 Configuration error This fault exists when the set device configuration does not agree with the actual configuration of SIMOCODE pro.

1.5.57 Parameterization This fault exists when there is an error in the parameter data.

1.5.58 '0' Constant level logic "0".

1.5.59 '1' Constant level logic "1".

1.5.60 Fixed level Fixed level for analog constant.

1.5.61 Configured operator panel missing Configured operator panel has been removed.

1.5.62 Phase unbalance Phase unbalance: Range: 0 … 100, unit: 1 %.




1.5.63 Voltage U_min Minimum of the three phase voltages U_min, unit: V.

1.5.64 Power factor (cos phi) Power factor: Range: 0 … 100, unit: 1 %.

1.5.65 Thermal motor model Thermal motor model: Range: 0 ... 254, unit: %.

1.5.66 Time to trip Time to trip: Range: 0 … 65535, unit: 100 ms

1.5.67 Remaining cooling down period Remaining cooling down period: Range: 0 … 65535, unit: 100 ms

1.5.68 Last trip current (% of le) Last trip current: Range: 0...65535, unit: 1% of Ie.

1.5.69 Stop time Stop time: Range: 0 … 65535, unit: 1 h

1.5.70 Max. current I_max (% of Ie) Maximum current of all phases: Range: 0 … 65535, unit: 1% of Ie.

1.5.71 Current I_L1 (% of Ie), current I_L2 (% of Ie), current I_L3 (% of Ie) Phase current: Range: 0 … 65535, unit: 1% of Ie.




1.5.72 Number of overload trips Number of overload trips: Range: 0 ... 65535.

1.5.73 Int. number of overload trips Internal number of overload trips: Range: 0 ... 65535.

1.5.74 Number of parameterizations Number of parameterizations: Range: 0 ... 65535

1.5.75 Phase voltage UL1-N, phase voltage UL2-N, phase voltage UL3-N Phase voltage: Range: 0 … 65535, unit: 1 V

1.5.76 Motor operating hours (H word), motor operating hours (L word) Motor operating hours: Range: 0 ... 0xFFFFFFFF, unit: 1 s

1.5.77 Int. motor operating hours (H word), int. motor operating hours (L word) Internal motor operating hours: Range: 0 ... 0xFFFFFFFF, unit: 1 s

1.5.78 Motor operating hours (H word), motor operating hours (L word) Operating state of the basic unit: Range: 0 ... 0xFFFFFFFF, unit: 1 s

1.5.79 Number of starts (H word), number of starts (L word) Number of starts: Range: 0 ... 0xFFFFFFFF

1.5.80 Int. number of starts clockwise (H word), int. number of starts clockwise (L word)

Number of starts CW: Range: 0 ... 0xFFFFFFFF




1.5.81 Int. number of starts counterclockwise (H word), int. number of starts counterclockwise (L word)

Number of starts CCW: Range: 0 ... 0xFFFFFFFF

1.5.82 Consumed energy (H word), consumed energy (L word) Consumed energy: Range: 0 ... 0xFFFFFFFF, unit: 1 kWh

1.5.83 Active power P (H word), active power P (L word) Active power: Range: 0 ... 0xFFFFFFFF, unit: 1 W

1.5.84 Apparent power S (H word), apparent power S (L word) Apparent power: Range: 0 ... 0xFFFFFFFF, unit: 1 VA

1.5.85 Max. current I_max (10 mA) Maximum current of all phases: Range: 0 ... ??, unit: 10 mA

1.5.86 Current I_L1 (10 mA), current I_L2 (10 mA), current I_L3 (10 mA) Phase current: Range: 0 ... 65535, unit: 10 mA

1.5.87 Max. current I_max (100 mA) Maximum current of all phases: Range: 0 ... ??, unit: 100 mA

1.5.88 Current I_L1 (100 mA), current I_L2 (100 mA), current I_L3 (100 mA) Phase current: Range: 0 ... 65535, unit: 100 mA



General information 2 2.1 SIMOCODE ES - Online Help

Description For every SIMOCODE ES dialog box, there is a help topic in the Online Help. Some of the topics are very extensive. Reference is made to further information at many points.

Representation of default values 1. Default values are displayed in bold type

Range: 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40

2. Default values have an additional "Default" line Range: 0 to 100% Default: 40 %

"Additional information" folder The Online Help contains an "Additional information" folder that includes the following information:

● Configuring example: reversing starter

● Table of the active control stations, contactor controls and lamp controls

● Different examples

● Different data sets

Note

Observe the operating instructions / manuals for the components used.


Limit monitor example (Page 338)

General information 2.2 System manuals for SIMOCODE pro



2.2 System manuals for SIMOCODE pro You can find the system manual for SIMOCODE pro PROFIBUS on the Internet: System manual (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/20369671/133300)

http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/20369671/133300



Device configuration 3

This dialog box gives you an overview of the device configuration. You can use this for system documentation purposes, for example.

Basic unit Select SIMOCODE pro C, SIMOCODE pro S or SIMOCODE pro V as the basic unit. In doing so, you define the supported range of functions/parameters of the basic unit, and any additional modules.

Version Firmware revision level for the selected basic unit:

● SIMOCODE pro C basic unit: Select V1.0 or V2.0

● SIMOCODE pro S basic unit: Select V1.0

● SIMOCODE pro V basic unit: Select V1.1, V2.0, V3.0, V3.1 or V3.2.

Thermistor The basic units provide the option of connecting thermistor sensors (binary PTC) for monitoring the motor temperature. Activate the checkbox ☑ when you want to use this option. If the checkbox is activated, the Thermistor (Page 181) dialog box is additionally set up in the "Motor protection" folder. You can edit the thermistor parameters there.

Modules The modules are inserted in the device view by dragging & dropping them from the hardware catalog. During dragging & dropping, the order designation of the module is shown against a blue background.

The following modules are available for selection:

● Current measurement: Select the current measuring module with the correct current range here.

● Digital module 1: Specify here whether a digital module with monostable, bistable or safety outputs (DM-F Local or DM-F PROFIsafe) is to be used.

Note

The fail-safe digital modules DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe can be activated from firmware revision level V3.0.

Device configuration



● Digital module 2: Specify here whether a digital module with monostable or bistable outputs is to be used.

● Operator panel: Specify here whether an operator panel is to be used.

● Voltage measurement: Specify here whether a current/voltage measuring module is to be used for monitoring the voltage, the power factor (cos-phi) or the active power.

● Voltage display: Select "Phase voltage" or "Line-to-line voltage" here (default: phase voltage). Can only be activated if Version = V3.0 and a current measuring module has been selected.

● Temperature module 1/2. Choose here whether or not a temperature module is to be used for temperature monitoring (e.g. for monitoring the motor windings, motor bearings, coolant temperature, or gearbox temperature). Temperature modul 2 can only be activated if temperature module 1 has been configured.

● Analog module 1/2: Specify here whether the analog signals of a transducer (normalized output signal 0/4 - 20 mA) are to be monitored. Analog module 2 can only be activated if analog module 1 has been configured.

● Ground-fault module: Specify here whether external ground-fault monitoring via a summation current transformer and a ground-fault module is to be used. External ground-fault monitoring is normally used on networks that are grounded with high impedance.

● Ground-fault module. Select here whether external ground-fault monitoring is to be used via a summation current transformer and a ground-fault module. If yes, select

– The 3UF500 ground-fault module (in conjunction with the 3UL22 summation current transformer)

– The 3UF7510 ground-fault module (in conjunction with the 3UL23 residual current transformer)

– The multifunction module (only with SIMOCODE pro S basic unit in conjunction with the 3UL23 residual current transformer).

Note

• The 3UL23 residual current transformer is suitable for detecting pure AC fault currents and AC fault currents with a pulsating direct-current component.

• Requirement for the use of a 3UF7510 ground-fault module: Use of this ground-fault module requires a SIMOCODE pro V basic unit with at least product version *E10* (from 09/2013).


External ground-fault monitoring is normally used in the following cases: - Where networks with high impedance are grounded - Where precise measurement of the ground-fault current is necessary, e.g. for the purpose of condition monitoring.




DANGER

No personnel protection or fire protection!

The 3UF75* ground-fault modules monitor devices and systems for correct functioning. They are not suitable for personnel protection or protection against fire.

Configuration error due to missing operator panel without display Normally, a missing configured operator panel results in the error message "Configuration error". "Yes" is set in the dropdown menu.

If "No" is set in the dropdown menu, the message "Configuration error" will not be displayed if the operator panel is removed during operation. Use this setting if an operator panel is connected temporarily.

Note

If the operator panel is the motor's only active control station, the motor might not shut down again.

Application (control function) Select the application (control function) for which parameters are to be set.

Note

If you modify the application (control function) at a later date, this can, under certain circumstances, result in indirect parameter changes, in other words, parameters that do not exist for the newly selected control function will be set to "not connected" or to default values.

Selection of an initialization module The device parameters, the device addressing and the identification data (I&M data) are stored in an initialization module permanently installed in the switchgear or motor control center. When the SIMOCODE pro device is started up, this data is loaded into the SIMOCODE basic unit. When parameterizing SIMOCODE pro, this data is also additionally written to the initialization module.




Diagnostics & Online 4 4.1 General information

Description SIMOCODE ES is a TIA Portal-based software tool for configuring, parameterizing, commissioning and diagnosing SIMOCODE pro switching devices.

Select Devices > Project > SIMOCODE > Online & Diagnostics in the Project navigation view.

The Diagnostics > General button contains the information on the modules and the manufacturer.

Table 4- 1 Module

Information Meaning Short code Short code of the device Order number Order number (MLFB) of the device (MLFB = Machine-readable

product designation) Hardware Corresponds to the I&M 0 value: Hardware_Revision 1) Firmware Corresponds to the I&M 0 value: Software_Revision 1) Firmware expansion Corresponds to the I&M 0 value: Software_Revision 1) Rack Rack specifications Slot Device slot

1) Manufacturer internal information

Table 4- 2 Module information

Information Meaning Device name Device designation Module name Module designation Plant identifier Plant designation Location designation Location specifications Installation date Date of installation / commissioning Additional information Additional Information

Diagnostics & Online 4.1 General information



Table 4- 3 Manufacturer information

Information Meaning Description of manufacturer Name of manufacturer Serial number Order number (MLFB) of the device (MLFB = Machine-readable

product designation) Copyright entry Copyright information 1) Profile Name of the higher-level device family, e.g. switching devices Profile details Name of the subfamily subordinate to the device family, e.g.

motor management system

1) Manufacturer internal information


Diagnostics & Online 4.2 Diagnostics status



4.2 Diagnostics status

Status of the device diagnostics Select Devices > Project > SIMOCODE > Online & Diagnostics in the Project navigation view.

The Diagnostics > Diagnostics Status button shows the status and the standard diagnostics of the general modules.

The device-specific diagnostics dialog boxes are displayed via the "Commissioning editor".

Supported diagnostics dialog boxes:

● Control/status information

● Faults/warnings/messages

● Measured values

● Service data/statistical data

● Error buffer/error protocol

● Test

● Command

● Password

● Parameter comparison

● Actual configuration

● Analog value recording

● Hardware inputs and outputs

Structure of the diagnostics dialog boxes ● Faults and warnings are indicated using colored icons.

The colors are defined according to system technology (e.g. red for fault/error).

● Messages are output in the form of lists

● Measured values/statistical data are output in the edit fields

● Recorded values are displayed in a curve control

● Faults/warnings/measured values that belong together are grouped

Diagnostics & Online 4.3 Channel diagnostics



4.3 Channel diagnostics Select Devices > Project > SIMOCODE > Online & Diagnostics > Channel Diagnostics in the Project navigation view.

Channel diagnostics indicate any device fault or configuration error. If SIMOCODE ES is installed, this information can also be viewed in the commissioning editor.

Channel diagnostics are also available if the Step7+ and SIMOCODE ES applications are installed in parallel.



Parameterization of the modules 5 5.1 Identification

5.1.1 Device The dialog box provides you with an overview of device-specific information. You can use the overview for system documentation purposes, for example.

In the Project Navigation Devices view, you call up the device data with the menu command "Project > SIMOCODE > Parameter > Identification".

Table 5- 1 Device

Information Meaning Order number Order number (MLFB) of the device (MLFB = Machine-readable product

designation) Short code Short code of the device Vendor SIEMENS AG Device family Name of the higher-level device family, e.g. switching devices Device subfamily Name of the subfamily subordinate to the device family, e.g. motor management

system

5.1.2 Marking You can freely edit the following product descriptions:

● Plant identifier

● Location designation

● Installation date

● Description.

You can use these descriptions for system documentation purposes, for example. The data is read out directly from the switching device, or from the device via online connection.

You have a total of 124 characters available.

Parameterization of the modules 5.2 Libraries



5.2 Libraries

General information Objects are stored for re-use in the libraries. Use the extensive libraries with off-the-shelf statements and objects. Programming of the statements and objects is not necessary so the likelihood of errors is reduced.

Note Supplied libraries

In the global library "SimocodeApplications", you will find ready-made device configurations for the respective application. You can transfer these to the project by dragging & dropping.

Project libraries For each project, there is a project library that is integrated into the project. The project library contains objects that can be re-used within the project.

The project library is always opened, saved and closed together with the current project.

Global libraries As well as the project library, any number of global libraries can be created independently of any specific project. The libraries are compatible with each other and can be used across project boundaries. The library elements can be copied and moved between libraries. Other users have access to global libraries stored centrally.

Procedure:

● Create templates, for example, for objects

● Insert the templates into the project library

● Develop the objects further

● Place a copy in the global library

● Make the global libraries available to the other personnel in your project

● Adapt the objects to your personal requirements.

Copy templates

The objects can be saved as copy templates and re-inserted into the project later. You can, for example, save entire devices with their contents or cover sheets as copy templates for the system documentation.

Parameterization of the modules 5.3 Application selection



5.3 Application selection

Description If you select and load a preset application (e.g. the reversing starter) in SIMOCODE ES, all protective functions, links and interlocks for the reversing starter are set up in the basic unit.

Note Supplied libraries

If you modify the preset application, you may under certain circumstances have to re-adapt many protective functions, links and interlocks manually. In the global library "SimocodeApplications", you will find ready-made device configurations for the respective application. You can transfer these to the project by dragging & dropping.

You can choose here between the following control functions depending on the basic unit used: Control function Brief description Overload relay SIMOCODE pro behaves like an overload relay. Direct starter Switching motors on and off Reversing starter Controlling the direction of rotation of motors (clockwise, counter-

clockwise) Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)

Switching a circuit breaker on and off (e.g. 3WL, 3VL)

Star-delta starter To limit the starting current, SIMOCODE pro initially starts the motor with a star-connected stator winding and then switches it to delta.

Star-delta reversing starter Star-delta starter with both directions of rotation (clockwise, counter-clockwise)

Dahlander Controlling motors with only one stator winding in two speed stages (fast, slow)

Dahlander reversing starter

Dahlander with both directions of rotation (clockwise, counter-clockwise)

Pole-changing starter Controlling motors with two stator windings in two speed stages (fast, slow)

Pole-changing reversing starter

Pole-changing starter with both directions of rotation (clockwise, counter-clockwise)

Valve Activation of a solenoid valve Positioner (1, 2, 3, 4, 5) Activation of positioners or actuators. Versions 1 to 5 Soft starter Activation of the 3RW soft starter Soft starter with reversing contactor

Activation of the 3RW soft starter including an additional reversing contactor.

Parameterization of the modules 5.3 Application selection





Libraries (Page 166)

Parameterization of the modules 5.4 Fieldbus interface



5.4 Fieldbus interface

5.4.1 Device parameters If parameters for the connected device or the actual settings are not available, they are grayed out in the display.

Station address

The addresses of all devices connected to the bus must be unique, i.e. each address can be assigned only once to a single unit.

Setting range: 1 to 126

Baud rate

Automatic baud rate detection

Applicable baud rates: 9.6 kBd / 19.2 kBd / 45.45 kBd / 93.75 kBd / 187.5 kBd / 500 kBd / 1500 kBd / 3000 kBd / 12000 kBd

Note

If you change the address and download it to the device, the new address does not take effect until • you switch the supply voltage off and on again or • you enter the "Restart" command.

Group diagnostics

You use this parameter to specify whether or not diagnostics via PROFIBUS DP (fault type) should be enabled or disabled.

Waiting for start-up parameter datasets

This bit is set directly by the Object Manager if a DPV1 is configured using STEP 7. It tells the motor starter if a data set will be transmitted. The start-up phase of the starter is interrupted until the complete data set has been transmitted

Response to CPU/master STOP

You use this device parameter to specify how the motor starter is to respond in the event of a CPU/master stop:

● Retain last value

● Switch substitute value

Note

This device parameter is only relevant in "automatic mode".




Substitute value

In the event of a bus failure, the outputs of the motor starters are controlled by a corresponding substitute process image.

Note

This device parameter is only relevant if you have parameterized "response to CPU/master STOP" as "Use substitute value"!

"0" is the only permissible substitute value for some motor starters. In this case, all input options for the substitute value are grayed out.

The substitute value comprises the following bits, which vary depending on the unit type:

Bit Meaning Bit Meaning 0.0 Motor RIGHT 1.0 Output 1 0.1 Motor LEFT 1.1 Output 2 0.2 Brake 1.2 Select active parameter set 0.3 Trip reset 1.3 0.4 Emergency start 1.4 Reduction factor - bit 0 0.5 Self-test 1.5 Reduction factor - bit 1 0.6 Creep feed 1.6 Reduction factor - bit 2 0.7 Reserved 1.7 Disable quick stop

Startup parameter block Activate this parameter with the checkbox ☑.

With this parameter, you instruct SIMOCODE pro to ignore all parameter data sent to the individual devices at startup of the DP master. The current parameter data that SIMOCODE pro has saved are not overwritten by the DP master in this case. When "Startup parameter block" is activated, you can only change the parameter data by entering new parameters with SIMOCODE ES.

Default setting:

● Activated, when parameterizing in SIMOCODE ES directly

● Not activated

– after executing the "Factory settings" command in the online "Command" dialog

– when integrating using SIMOCODE

Activated when parameterizing directly in SIMOCODE ES. Not activated after executing the "Factory settings" command in the online "Command" dialog when integrating using SIMOCODE.




Diagnostics By selecting the corresponding checkbox, you can specify which diagnostics data are to be signaled via PROFIBUS:

● Diagnostics for device faults

● Diagnostics for process faults

● Diagnostics for process warnings

● Diagnostics for process events.

Further information: Configuring the diagnostics response (Page 333)

5.4.2 PROFIBUS address

Bus parameters

NOTICE

Assigning a new address

When changing the PROFIBUS address, the online connection to PROFIBUS is interrupted. Restore the online connection after changing the address. The new address is active after downloading to the device.

DP address The addresses of all devices on the bus must be unique. Each address can only be assigned once to one device.

Note Factory settings - address 126 • A device with factory settings has the address 126 • PROFIBUS address 126 is not a valid address. • Downloading with PROFIBUS address 126 is not possible.

Change the address after prompting.

Setting range: 1 to 125.




Note Changing the address with PROFIBUS connection • Search for the device under online accesses with your PROFIBUS adapter • Change PROFIBUS address 126 in the Parameter Editor • Click on the button "Transfer online data to the hardware"

Otherwise: • Go online with the SIMOCODE pro in the project • Change address 126 • Click on the button "Transfer online data to the hardware".

Transmission rate Baud rates up to 12 Mbit/s are possible. The device automatically detects the baud rate on PROFIBUS DP.

Parameterization of the modules 5.5 Motor protection



5.5 Motor protection

5.5.1 Motor protection introduction

Description Topics and information on motor protection include:

● Overload protection (Page 174)

● Unbalance protection (Page 179)

● Blocking protection (Page 180)

● Thermistor protection (Page 181)

Schematic: The following schematic shows the "Extended Protection" function block ("Overload protection", "Unbalance protection" and "Stalled rotor protection") with optional parameter settings and events.

1) Adjustable transformation ratio when using interposing transformers with SIMOCODE pro V for the SIMOCODE pro V basic unit above version *E03*




Adjustable responses "Overload protection", "Unbalance protection" and "Stalled rotor protection" Response Prewarning level

"Overload protection" Trip level "Overload protection"

Level "Unbalance"

Level "Stalled rotor protection"

Deactivation X X X X Signaling X X X X Warning X X X X Tripping — X X X Delay 0 - 25.5 s (0.5 s) — 0 - 25.5 s (0.5 s) 0 - 25.5 s (0.5 s)

Note

Deactivate unbalance protection in SIMOCODE ES when the load type is set to single-phase!

5.5.2 Overload protection

Description of overload protection SIMOCODE pro protects three-phase or AC motors in accordance with IEC 60947-4-1 requirements. The trip class can be set to eight different settings, ranging from Class 5 to Class 40. Thus, the tripping time can be adapted precisely to the power-up behavior of the motor, improving utilization of the motor capacity. Additionally, the "Thermal motor model" and time to overload trip are calculated and made available to the control system. After an overload trip, the remaining cooling down period can be displayed. The motor current is saved in the case of an overload trip.

Depending on the control function, the set current Is is separately parameterizable for one or two speeds (Is1 and Is2).

Set current Is1 The rated motor current is usually set with the set current Is1. This value can be found on the rating plate of the motor. The overload trip characteristic is calculated based on this value.

Range: Depends on the selected current measuring module or current / voltage measuring module:

● 0.3 A to 3 A,

● 2.4 A to 3 A,

● 10 A to 100 A,

● 20 A to 25 A,

● 63 A to 630 A.




Transformation ratio active Required when using an interposing transformer, or if the main supply cable is looped several times through the current measuring module or the current/voltage measuring module. Activate the checkbox if you wish to use this option. The parameterized set current corresponds here largely to the actual rated motor current and does not have to be calculated. The transformation ratio is calculated from the ratio between the rated motor current [A] and the measured current [A] or any multiple of the ratio.

Transformation ratio - primary Enter the primary current here, with the "Transformation ratio - active" checkbox activated. Range: 0 - 8191.875.

Transformation ratio - secondary Enter the secondary current here, with the "Transformation ratio - active" checkbox activated. Range: 0 - 15.

Set current Is2 The set current Is2 is only required for motors with two speeds to guarantee the suitable overload protection for the higher speed too. Generally, Is2 should be set higher than Is1.

Range: Depends on the selected current measuring module or current/voltage measuring module:

● 0.3 A to 3 A,

● 2.4 A to 3 A,

● 10 A to 100 A,

● 20 A to 25 A,

● 63 A to 630 A.




Transformation ratio - active When using an interposing transformer, or if the main supply cable is looped several times through the current measuring module or the current/voltage measuring module, you can enter the transformation ratio of the interposing transformer. Activate the checkbox if you wish to use this option. The parameterized set current thus continues to correspond to the actual rated motor current and does not have to be converted. The transformation ratio is calculated from the ratio between the rated motor current [A] and any multiple of this ratio.

Note

This parameter is only available when using SIMOCODE pro V basic unit above version *E03*.

Transformation ratio - primary Enter the primary current here, with the "Transformation ratio - active" checkbox activated. Range: 0 - 8191.875.

Transformation ratio - secondary Enter the secondary current here, with the "Transformation ratio - active" checkbox activated. Range: 0 - 15.

Note

In the case of motors with two speeds, the same or different transformation ratios can be set for each speed, depending upon whether the same or two different interposing transformers is/are used for each speed.

Class The Class (trip class) defines the maximum time within which SIMOCODE pro must trip from cold at 7.2 times the set current Is (motor protection to IEC 60947). Please note that with startups > "Class 10", the permissible AC3 current of the contactor may have to be reduced (derated), i.e. you must select a larger contactor.

You can make the following settings: 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40.




Response to overload The SIMOCODE pro response to overload can be additionally adjusted here:

Note

With motors for EEx e applications, the response must remain set to "Tripping"!

Cooling down period The cooling down period is the amount of time that must elapse before an overload trip can be reset. This is usually 5 minutes. When this cooling down period has elapsed, the thermal memory (motor model) is deleted.

Supply voltage failures of SIMOCODE pro during this time extend the specified time correspondingly.

You can make the following settings: 60 to 6553.5 s (default: 300 s).

Thermal motor model (thermal memory) When the rated motor current (Is) is at 100%, the value of "Thermal motor model" is 87% (1/1.15 x 100%) in a steady state, and 100% at the moment of an overload trip.

"At operating temperature" state In the "at operating temperature" state, the tripping times are reduced by the factors listed in the table. These factors apply to 3-pole symmetrical loads, Class 5 to Class 40:

xIe Preload in [%] of the set current 0 20 40 60 80 100 1.15 1 1 1 1 1 1 1.5 1 0.90 0.78 0.64 0.57 0.24 2 1 0.88 0.74 0.58 0.40 0.19 4 1 0.85 0.69 0.52 0.35 0.16 6 1 0.84 0.68 0.51 0.34 0.15 7.2 1 0.84 0.68 0.51 0.33 0.15 8 1 0.84 0.67 0.51 0.33 0.15

Example:

You have operated and switched off a motor with set current 100% Is. You immediately switch the motor back on. This causes an overload trip with 2 x Is, Class 10.

Tripping time in cold state: approximately 40 s (see tripping characteristic).

Factor for tripping time with preload 100% Is: 0.19 (in accordance with table).

Reduced tripping time: 0.18 x 40 s = 7.6 s.




Pause time The pause time is the specified time for the cooling down response of the motor when tripped under normal operating conditions (not in the case of an overload trip). After this interval, the thermal memory in SIMOCODE pro is deleted and a new cold start is possible. This means that many startups can be performed in a short space of time.

Note

Both the motor and the switching devices must be dimensioned specifically for this load!

You can make the following settings: 0 to 6553.5 s.

Load type You can select whether SIMOCODE pro is to protect a 1-phase or a 3-phase load.


● The internal ground-fault detection and unbalance protection must be deactivated.


You can make the following settings: 1-phase, 3-phase.

Delay prewarning The "Delay" parameter (default: 0.5 s) determines the amount of time that the prewarning level (1.15 x Is) must be permanently exceeded before SIMOCODE pro executes the desired response. If no setting is made, there will be no response. In the event of a loss of phase or an unbalance > 50%, the prewarning level will be reached earlier, at approximately 0.85 x Ie.

Reset If the "Reset" parameter is set to "Auto", the "Overload", "Overload + Unbalance" and "Thermistor" faults will be acknowledged automatically

● When the cooling down period has expired

● When the thermistor value has dropped back down to the specified reset value.

If the "Reset" parameter is set to "Manual", the faults must be acknowledged by a reset signal:

● "Reset" button on the basic unit

● "Reset" button on the operator panel

● Standard function "Reset". For this, the "Reset - Input" (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, e.g. using reset via bus.

You can make the following settings: Manual, Auto.




WARNING Unexpected restart of the motor

The "Auto-Reset" mode must not be used for applications where an unexpected motor restart may cause personal injury or damage to property.

5.5.3 Unbalance protection

Description The extent of the phase unbalance can be monitored and transmitted to the control system. If a specified limit value is violated, a defined and delayable response can be initiated. If the phase unbalance is larger than 50%, the tripping time is also automatically reduced in accordance with the overload characteristic since the heat generation of the motors increases in asymmetrical conditions.

The phase unbalance is calculated using the following equation:

Level The level of unbalance to which SIMOCODE pro should react is set here.

Level as follows:

Level: 100 % (40 %)

Response as follows:

Deactivated, signaling, warning, tripping

Delay as follows:

Setting range: 0 - 25.5 s (0.5 s)




5.5.4 Blocking protection

Description If the motor current rises above an adjustable stalled rotor protection level (current level), a definable and delayable response can be configured for SIMOCODE pro. In this case, for example, the motor can be shut down independently of the overload protection. The stalled rotor protection is only active after the parameterized class time has elapsed, e.g. for Class 10 after 10 seconds, and prevents unnecessarily high thermal and mechanical loads as well as premature aging of the motor.

Exceeding the stalled rotor level Level as follows:

Level: 0 – 1020% of Is

Note

Intermediate values are automatically rounded.

Response to exceeding the stalled rotor level Response as follows:


Delay of the stalled rotor level The "Delay" parameter determines the amount of time that the stalled rotor level must be permanently exceeded before SIMOCODE pro executes the desired response. If no setting is made, there will be no response.

Range: 0 – 25.5 s (0.5 s)




5.5.5 Thermistor protection

Description Thermistor protection is based on a direct temperature measurement in the motor via binary PTC thermistors which can be connected to the SIMOCODE pro basic unit.

Thermistor protection is used for:

● Motors with high switching frequencies

● Converter operation

● Motors with heavy starting

● Intermittent duty and/or braking operation

● Hampered air infeed

● Speeds below the rated speed.

In this case, the sensors are mounted in the winding slot or bearing of the motor.

Schematic The following schematic shows the Thermistor logic module:

Figure 5-1 Thermistor (thermistor protection)

Response to overtemperature Here you can select how SIMOCODE pro should respond when the temperature has overshot the trip level.


Signaling, warning, tripping

Note Motors for EEx e applications

With motors for EEx e applications, the response must be set to "Tripping"!




Response to sensor fault Here you can select the SIMOCODE pro response in the case of a short-circuit or a break in the thermistor sensor cable.



Parameterization of the modules 5.6 Motor control



5.6 Motor control

5.6.1 Control stations

Description Control stations are places from which control commands are issued to the motor. The "Control stations" function block is used for administration, switching and prioritization of these different control stations.

SIMOCODE pro allows the parallel administration of up to four different control stations.

Dependent on the set control function, up to five different control commands can be transmitted from every control station to SIMOCODE pro.

Control stations: ● Local control (in the direct vicinity of the motor). Control commands via pushbuttons.

● PLC/PCS, switching commands are issued by the automation system (remote).

● PC or PC/OPC-UA [HMI], control commands are issued via an operator control station or via PROFIBUS DPV1 or OPC-UA with the SIMOCODE ES software.

● Operator panel, control commands are issued via the buttons of the operator panel in the switchgear cabinet door.

Examples of control commands:

● Motor ON (ON>), Motor OFF (OFF) for a direct starter

● Motor LEFT (ON<), Motor OFF (OFF), Motor RIGHT (ON>) for a reversing starter

● Motor SLOW (ON>), Motor FAST (ON>>), Motor OFF (OFF) for a Dahlander circuit.

The plugs of the "Control Stations" function block must be connected to any sockets (e.g. binary inputs on the basic unit, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.) for the control commands to take effect.

Up to five different control commands can come from each control station. Up to five plugs (plug ON<<, ON<, OFF, ON>, ON>>) are available on the function block for each control station. The number of active plugs depends on the control function selected. With a direct starter, for example, only the plugs "ON>" and "OFF" are active.




Control stations: ● Local:

In this case, the command devices are usually in the direct vicinity of the motor and are wired to the inputs of SIMOCODE pro. The plugs of the "Control Stations" function block must be connected to any sockets (normally the function blocks for the basic units or the digital module inputs – BU inputs, DM inputs) for the control commands to take effect.

Note

The OFF command "LC OFF" is 0-active. This ensures that SIMOCODE pro shuts the motor down safely if an open circuit occurs in the supply cable, for example. The precondition is that the control station is active.

● PLC/PCS or PLC/PCS [PN]: This control station is primarily intended for control commands from the automation system (PLC/PCS) via the cyclic receive telegram of PROFIBUS DP. The plugs of the "Control Stations" function block must be connected to any sockets (normally MIT Cyclic Receive) for the control commands to take effect.

● PC or PC/OPC-UA [HMI] This control station is primarily intended for switching commands on an arbitrary PC that, along with the automation system, is used as a second master on PROFIBUS DP or that, as a client, accesses the data made available by SIMOCODE pro, as server, via OPC-UA. The control commands are sent via the Acyclic receive telegram from PROFIBUS DPV1 or are transferred using a client-server connection via OPC-UA.

Note

If the "SIMOCODE ES Professional" or SIMATIC PDM PC software is connected to SIMOCODE pro via PROFIBUS DP, its control commands automatically take effect via the "PC [DPV1]" or "PC/OPC-UA" control station. At the same time, the enabled commands for this control station also take effect for SIMOCODE ES.

● Operator panel: This control station is primarily intended for control commands issued via the buttons on the 3UF72 operator panel, which is mounted in a switchgear cabinet door, for example. The plugs of the "Control Stations" function block must be connected to any sockets (normally to the function block for the buttons of the operator panel - OP buttons) for the control commands to take effect.

Note

Since the operator panel only has four buttons for controlling the motor feeder, one button must be used as a speed changeover button for control functions with two speeds and two directions of rotation. For this purpose, this button must be assigned to the internal control command "[OP]<>/<<>>".




Note

If the SIMOCODE ES PC software on a programming device is connected to SIMOCODE pro via the system interface, its control commands automatically take effect via the "Operator panel [OP]" control station. At the same time, the enabled commands for this control station also take effect for SIMOCODE ES.

5.6.2 Operating modes

Operating modes You can use the control stations either individually or in combination. There are four different operating modes available for selection:

● Local 1

● Local 2

● Local 3

● Remote/Automatic: In this operating mode, the system must communicate via PLC.

Not all control stations are usually connected. If more than one control station (e.g. local and PLC/PCS) is connected, it makes sense and is also mandatory to operate the control stations selectively. Four operating modes are provided for this purpose which can be selected via two control signals (mode selectors). For each individual control station in every operating mode, you can define whether "ON commands" and/or "OFF commands" are to be accepted. In multiplex mode, the operating modes are controlled in such a way that only one operating mode is active at any one time.

Example: There are three operating modes in a system:

Operating mode Description Keyswitch operation, e.g. Local 1 Only local control inputs are permitted! All other

control stations are disabled. Manual operation, e.g. Local 3 Only operator panel control commands and local

control commands can be issued. Remote operation, e.g. remote/automatic Only control commands from the PLC/PCS are

permitted.

The keyswitch must be read in via an input to select these operating modes. The remote switching operation should be controlled via the bus. Keyswitch operation has priority over all other operating modes.




5.6.3 Mode selector

Mode selector The S1/S2 mode selectors are used to switch between the operating modes "Local 1", "Local 2", "Local 3" and "Remote/Automatic".

To do this, plugs S1 and S2 must be connected to any sockets (e.g. device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits, etc.).

The table below shows the operating modes depending on the signal states of mode selectors S1 and S2:

Input Operating mode Local 1 Local 2 Local 3 Remote/Automatic S1 0 0 1 1 S2 0 1 0 1

The different operating modes for enabling the control stations can be used to specify the switch authorizations for the individual control stations

● Local control [LC]

● PLC/PCS [DP]

● PC [DPV1] or PC/OPC-UA [HMI]

● Operator panel (OP)

Only the following are active:

● The operating mode set by plugs S1 and S2 of the "Control Stations" function block and

● the enables selected there

5.6.4 Enables

Enables Enables, which must be activated, are assigned to the "ON" and "OFF" control commands for each control station in every operating mode.

This means, depending on the operating mode, you can define for every control station whether the motor may be switched on only, off only, or on and off from the control station.

The corresponding checkbox ☑ is activated in the "Control stations" dialog in SIMOCODE ES.




5.6.5 Enables and enabled control command schematic

Enables and enabled control command schematic Example for enabled commands:

The following diagram shows an example of enabled commands for the "Local 2" operating mode, "Dahlander reversing starter" control function:

In the example, the motor can only be switched on and off in the "Local 2" operating mode via the buttons (local) connected to the inputs of the basic unit and the digital module.




5.6.6 Control function

Description Control functions (e.g. direct starters, reversing starters) are used for controlling load feeders.

They are characterized by the following important features:

● Monitoring the switch-on/switch-off process

● Monitoring the ON/OFF status

● Tripping if a fault occurs.

SIMOCODE pro monitors these statuses using the "Feedback ON" auxiliary control input, which is usually derived directly from the current flow in the main circuit, via the current measuring modules.

All the necessary interlocks and logic operations for the respective applications are already implemented in the control functions.

Control functions include:

● Plugs for control commands (ON <<, ON <, OFF, ON >, ON >>) that are usually connected with the "Enabled control command" sockets.

● Auxiliary control inputs (plugs), e.g. Feedback ON

● Sockets for

– Contactor controls QE1 to QE5.

– Displays (lamp controls) QL*, QLS.

– Status, e.g. "Status - ON <<, Status - ON >>".

– Faults, e.g. "Fault - Feedback (FB) On", "Fault - Antivalence"

● Settings, e.g. interlocking time, non-maintained command mode ON/OFF, etc.

● A logic component with all necessary interlocks and connections for the control function.

● Like control functions, the motor protection with its parameters and signals is active "at a higher level in the background". Motor protection and thermistor protection are independent functions that switch off the motor when activated via the control function.




Control function schematic The schematic below shows the general representation of the control function ("Protection/Control" function block):


Application selection (Page 167)

5.6.7 Contactor controls

Description The QE contactor controls are switched dependent on the incoming control commands and taking the specified control function into consideration, including all corresponding interlocks, feedbacks, corresponding parameters and the higher-level motor protection. In general, the QE contactor controls are directly connected to the outputs of the basic unit or the digital modules, and they switch the connected contactors using relays. The number of usable QE contactor controls is directly dependent on the set control function.




5.6.8 Lamp controls and status information

Description The feeder status feedback is signaled via the status information or the QL lamp controls. They are all directly dependent on the status of the auxiliary control input "FB ON". The number of usable lamp controls and status information is directly dependent on the specified control function.

Feeder status feedback:

● Status information, e.g. "Status ON<": These are transmitted, for example, via PROFIBUS DP to the automation system and signal the status of the feeder there.

● Displays (lamp control) "Display - QLE<": These can, for example, activate a signal lamp or a pushbutton lamp for status display.

Note

If the motor is running in test operation, the indicators show a different response (e.g. flashing).

● The lamp controls "QL..." signal the following in addition to the status indicators: - Unacknowledged fault (lamp output general fault QLS flashes) - Saved changeover command (lamp outputs QLE flicker) - Lamp test: All QL outputs are activated for approx. 2 s.

● Additional (extended) status information: - Start active: If "Motor" has been selected as the load type, this signal is present during the start process of the motor for the duration of the specified class time (e.g. 10 s for Class 10). Exceptions are the "Overload relay" and "Valve" control functions. - Interlocking time running: For control functions with a change in the direction of rotation, the signal remains present until the specified interlocking time has elapsed. - Change-over pause running: For the "Dahlander", "Pole-changing starter" and "Star-delta" control functions, the signal is present after changeover until the specified time has elapsed.

● Additional (extended) status information for the control function "Positioner" or "Valve": - Feedback Closed (FC) - Feedback Open (FO) - Torque Closed (TC) - Torque Open (TO).

These feedback signals specify the present status of the corresponding limit switch and/or torque switch. The amount of usable status information is directly dependent on the selected control function.

● Additional (extended) fault messages for the "Positioner" or "Valve" control function: - Stalled positioner: The torque switch has been activated before the corresponding limit switch. The positioner may have stalled - Double 0: Both torque switches have responded - Double 1: Both limit switches have responded - End position: Positioner has left the end position without receiving a control command - Antivalence: The changeover contacts of the limit switches do not issue an antivalent signal (only for the "Positioner 5" control function).




5.6.9 Non-maintained command mode

Description ● Deactivated

The control command on the corresponding plug of the control stations "ON <, ON <<, ON >, ON >>" is saved. It can only be revoked by an "OFF" control command from the corresponding control station. An auxiliary contact for locking the contactor is not required. Motor feeders are usually operated in locking mode. Locking is preset.

● Activated Depending on the control function chosen, non-maintained command mode acts on the plugs of all control stations "ON <, ON <<, ON >, ON >>". A control command is only effective as long as there is a "high signal".

5.6.10 Saving change-over command


Commands for switching from one direction of rotation/speed to the other are only implemented via a previous "OFF" and after the interlocking time/change-over pause has elapsed. This setting is used under normal conditions and is the default setting.

● Activated Change-over commands for switching from one direction of rotation/rotational speed to the other are implemented without a previous "OFF" once the interlocking time/change-over pause has elapsed. If the selected direction/speed cannot be executed immediately due to a parameterized interlocking time/change-over pause, the selection is signaled by flickering QLE displays. Your selection can be canceled at any time with "OFF".

5.6.11 DM-F LOCAL/DM-F PROFIsafe - Separate function from control function


Safety-related tripping via the DM-F modules also affects the SIMOCODE pro control function, so that the contactor control is also always switched off. This setting is selected for applications where safety-related tripping directly affects the motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.

● Activated: Safety-related tripping via the DM-F modules does not affect the SIMOCODE pro control function, so that the contactor control is not switched off. This setting is selected for applications where safety-related tripping does not affect the motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.




5.6.12 Load type

Description You can choose between

● Motor and

● Resistive load (e.g. heater):

Since overcurrent generally does not flow during startup on a resistive load, the "Start active" status is not signaled. In this case, the start-up override does not occur for the "Signaling", "Warning" and "Tripping" functions.

5.6.13 Feedback time

Description SIMOCODE pro monitors the status of the feeder (ON or OFF) via FB ON. If the status of FB ON changes without a corresponding switching command, "Fault - Feedback (FB)" switches off the feeder. Default: 0.5 s. The feedback time can be used to suppress such "feedback faults" for a defined period of time, e.g. in the case of network switches. When the motor is switched off, SIMOCODE pro continuously checks if FB ON = 0. If the current flows longer than the set feedback time without the "ON" control command being issued, a fault message "Fault - Feedback (FB) ON" is issued. The contactor controls can only be re-connected after the fault has been rectified. When the motor is switched on, SIMOCODE pro continuously checks if FB ON = 1. If no current flows for longer than the set feedback time without the "OFF" control command being issued, a fault message "Fault - Feedback (FB) OFF" is issued. The contactor controls are deactivated.

5.6.14 Execution time

Description SIMOCODE pro monitors the switch-on and switch-off process. The switch-on or switch-off process must be completed within this time. Default: 1.0 s. After the "ON" control command is issued, SIMOCODE pro must be able to measure current in the main circuit within the execution time. Otherwise, the fault message "Fault - execution ON command" will be issued. SIMOCODE pro deactivates the contactor controls. After the "OFF" control command is issued, SIMOCODE pro must not be able to measure any current in the main circuit after the execution time has elapsed. Otherwise, the fault message "Fault - Execution STOP cmmand" is issued. The contactor controls can only be re-connected after the fault has been rectified.




5.6.15 Interlocking time

Description SIMOCODE pro prevents both contactors from switching on at the same time, in the case of reversing starters, for example. Switching from one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed via the interlocking time. Default: 0 s.

5.6.16 Change-over pause

Description In the "Dahlander" and "Pole-changing starter" control functions, switching from FAST to SLOW can be delayed by the time configured. In the "Star-delta starter" control function, the change-over pause extends the time between switching off the star contactor and switching on the delta contactor by the time configured. Default: 0.00 s.

5.6.17 Max. star time

Description With the control functions "Star-delta starter" or "Star-delta reversing starter": Time-dependent switching from star to delta. Max. star time: 0 - 255 s (default: 20 s)

5.6.18 Current measuring module built into the delta circuit or the supply cable

Description With the control functions "Star-delta starter" or "Star-delta reversing starter": The set current and the change-over levels for star-delta switching depend on the installation location of the current measuring module:

● In the delta circuit: Set current Is- is reduced to Irated x 1/√3

In supply cable: Set current Is = In (rated current of the motor).




5.6.19 Scope and application

Description Depending on the device series, the system provides the following control functions:

Control function SIMOCODE pro C pro S pro V Overload relay ● ● ● Direct starter ● ● ● Reversing starter ● ● ● Circuit breaker ● ● ● Star-delta starter — ● ● Star-delta reversing starter — — ● Dahlander — — ● Dahlander reversing starter — — ● Pole-changing starter — — ● Pole-changing reversing starter — — ● Valve — — ● Positioner 1 to Positioner 5 — — ● Soft starter — ● ● Soft starter with reversing contactor — — ●

Parameterization of the modules 5.7 Machine monitoring



5.7 Machine monitoring

5.7.1 Ground fault SIMOCODE pro acquires and monitors all three phase currents. By evaluating the summation current of the three current values, the motor feeder can be monitored for a possible fault current or ground fault.

See also Internal ground-fault monitoring ()

External ground-fault monitoring (Page 196)

5.7.2 Internal ground-fault monitoring

Description Internal ground-fault monitoring via current measuring modules or current/voltage measuring modules is only possible for motors with a 3-phase connection in networks that are either grounded directly or with low impedance. You can activate internal ground-fault monitoring by parameterization.

It covers two different operating conditions:

● Normal operation to 2x Is. The actual operating current must be less than twice the set current Is. Fault currents of > 30% of the set current ls will be detected.

● Start-up or overload operation to 2x Is. The actual operating current is greater than twice the set current Is. Fault currents of > 15% of the actual motor current will be detected.

NOTICE

False tripping in the case of internal ground-fault monitoring

False tripping can occur if you use internal ground-fault monitoring for star-delta circuits. During delta operation, the summation current is non-zero due to harmonics.




Schematic The following schematic shows the "Ground fault monitoring" function block:

Defining the response to internal ground-fault monitoring Response as follows:


Delay as follows:

Setting range: 0 - 25.5 s (0.5 s)

Activity Unless deactivated, this function is always active, regardless of whether the motor is running or not (operating state "ON").

5.7.3 External ground-fault monitoring

Description External ground-fault monitoring via a summation current transformer/residual current transformer and ground-fault module is normally used in the following cases:

● Where networks with high impedance are grounded

● Where precise measurement of the ground-fault current is necessary, e.g. for the purpose of condition monitoring.

Rated fault currents of 0.3 A / 0.5 A / 1 A can be evaluated with the 3UL22 summation current transformer. The response delay of the summation current transformer is 300 ms - 500 ms. This response delay can be additionally delayed with the relevant parameterization of SIMOCODE pro.

With the 3UL23 residual current transformer, it is possible to determine the precise fault current as a measured value, and to define freely selectable warning and trip limits in a wide range from 30 mA to 40 mA.




Principle of operation:

The main conductors and, if present, the neutral conductor to which the load is connected, are routed through the opening of the 3UL23 residual current transformer. Its secondary winding is connected to the ground-fault module. If an insulation fault occurs, for example, a residual current is created between the inflowing and outflowing currents, and this is evaluated by the ground-fault module.

Settings in the device configuration

Select here whether external ground-fault monitoring is to be used via a summation current transformer and a ground-fault module. If yes, select

● The 3UF7500 ground-fault module (in conjunction with the 3UL22 summation current transformer) or

● The 3UF7510 ground-fault module (in conjunction with the 3UL23 residual current transformer) or

● The multifunction module (only with SIMOCODE pro S basic unit in conjunction with the 3UL23 residual current transformer). The multifunction module can be used to add an input to the SIMOCODE pro S basic unit to connect a 3UL23 residual current transformer.

Note • The 3UL23 residual current transformer is suitable for detecting pure AC fault currents

and AC fault currents with a pulsating direct-current component • Requirements for using a 3UF7510 ground-fault module:

Use of this ground-fault module requires a SIMOCODE pro V basic unit, with at least product version *E10* (from 09/2013).


DANGER No personnel protection or fire protection

The 3UF75* ground-fault modules monitor devices and systems for their correct function.

Use suitable and trained personnel for fire protection.

A definable and delayable response can be parameterized in the event a ground fault is detected. A message is output if the ground fault limit is exceeded.

You can define additional trips by parameterization. If the rated fault currents are exceeded, SIMOCODE pro V responds either

● by turning off the contactor controls QE, or

● by issuing a warning.




5.7.4 Current limits

Description Monitoring of current limits is used for process monitoring independent of overload protection.

SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase monitoring of the motor current for freely selectable upper and lower current limit. The response of SIMOCODE pro can be freely configured and delayed if it reaches a prewarning or trip level.

The motor current is measured using current measuring modules or current/voltage measuring modules.

See also Current limits I> (upper limit) ()

Current limits I< (lower limit) (Page 199)

5.7.5 Current limits I> (upper limit)

Trip level, warning level When monitoring current limits I> (upper limit), two different response levels, I> (upper limit) trip level and I> (upper limit ) warning level, can be parameterized and monitored. If the current of one or more phases exceeds the response level, current limit monitoring responds.

● Trip level: 0 to 1020% of ls in 4% increments

● Warning level: 0 to 1020% of ls in 4% increments

Schematic The following schematic shows the "Current limits" function block:




Trip level activity, warning level The trip level/warning level is active only when the motor is running, the start-up procedure has been completed, and there is no test position feedback (TPF) (run+).

Defining the response to trip level overshoot Response as follows:

● Deactivated

● Signaling

● Tripping

Delay as follows:

Setting range: 0 to 25.5 s (0.5 s)

Defining the response to warning level overshoot Response as follows:

● Deactivated

● Signaling

● Warning

Delay as follows:


Setting the hysteresis for current limits I> (upper limit) Range: 0 to 15% of the level value in 1% increments (5% )


5.7.6 Current limits I< (lower limit)

Trip level, warning level When monitoring current limits I< (lower limit), two different response levels (trip level/warning level) can be parameterized and monitored. If the current of the phases (Imax) drops below the response level, the current limit monitor responds.

● Trip level: 0 to 1020% of ls in 4% increments

● Warning level: 0 to 1020% of ls in 4% increments




Schematic The following schematic shows the "Current limits" function block:


Defining the response to trip level undershoot Response as follows:

● Deactivated

● Signaling

● Tripping

Delay as follows:


Defining the response to warning level undershoot Response as follows:

● Deactivated

● Signaling

● Tripping

Delay as follows:


Setting the hysteresis for current limits I> (lower limit) Range: 0 to 15% of the level value in 1% increments (5% )





5.7.7 Voltage monitoring

Description SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase undervoltage monitoring of either a three-phase network or a single-phase network for freely selectable limits. The response of SIMOCODE pro on reaching a prewarning level or trip level can be freely parameterized and delayed. Voltage measuring is carried out using current/voltage measuring modules. This is based on the minimum voltage of all voltages Umin.

Note

Please note that only phase voltages are available with SIMOCODE pro V basic units up to version *E06*. If required, the line-to-line voltage can be calculated from the phase voltage using the logic module "Calculator 1/2" as follows: Line-to-line voltage = phase voltage * 1.73. From version *E07* onwards, either phase voltage or line-to-line voltage can be used as the basis for monitoring.

Furthermore, even when the motor is switched off, SIMOCODE pro can determine and signal the further availability of the feeder by measuring the voltage directly at the circuit breaker or at the fuses in the main circuit.

Schematic The following schematic shows the "Voltage monitoring" function block:

Trip level, warning level You can parameterize two different response levels (trip level/warning level). If the current of one or more phases undershoots the response level or the warning level, voltage monitoring responds.

● Trip level: 0 to 2040 V in 8 V increments

● Warning level: 0 to 2040 V in 8 V increments




Trip level activity, warning level Here you can specify in which motor operating states the trip level/warning level is to take effect:

● Always, except TPF (on+)

Trip level/warning level always effective, regardless of whether the motor is running or at a standstill; exception: "TPF", i.e. motor feeder is in test position

● If motor runs, except TPF (run)

Trip level/warning level only active if the motor is ON and not in the test position

● Always (on)1)

Trip level/warning level always takes effect, regardless of whether the motor is running or at a standstill

1) When using the SIMOCODE pro V basic unit (product version *E03* and higher) with a current/voltage measuring module

Defining the response to trip level undershoot Response as follows:

● Deactivated

● Signaling

● Tripping

Delay as follows:


Defining the response to warning level undershoot Response as follows:

● Deactivated

● Signaling

● Warning

Delay as follows:


Setting the hysteresis for voltage, cos phi, power Range: 0 to 15% of the level value in 1% increments (5% )

Voltage measurement - Load type for voltage, cos phi, power Here you can specify whether 1-phase or 3-phase loads are to be displayed.




5.7.8 Cos phi monitoring Cos phi monitoring monitors the load condition of inductive loads. The main field of application is for asynchronous motors in 1-phase or 3-phase networks with loads that fluctuate significantly. If the set trip level or warning level is undershot, a signal is generated or the motor is switched off, depending upon the setting.

Schematic The following schematic shows the "Cos phi monitoring" function block:

Trip level, warning level You can parameterize two different response levels (trip level/warning level) for cos phi monitoring.

● Trip level: 0 to 100%

● Warning level: 0 to 100%


Defining the response to undershooting the set trip level Response as follows:

● Deactivated

● Signaling

● Tripping

Delay as follows:


Defining the response to undershooting the set warning level Response as follows:

● Deactivated

● Signaling

● Warning

Delay as follows:





5.7.9 Active power monitoring SIMOCODE pro can indirectly monitor the state of a device or system via the active power. For example, by monitoring the active power of a pump motor, conclusions can be drawn from the active power level about the flow rate or fluid fill levels.

SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase monitoring of the active power for freely selectable upper and lower current limits. The response of SIMOCODE pro can be freely configured and delayed if it reaches a prewarning or trip level.

Active power measuring is carried out using current/voltage measuring modules.

Schematic The following schematic shows the "Active power monitoring" function block:

Trip level, warning level With active power monitoring, you can parameterize two different response levels (trip level/warning level) for the upper and lower limits:

Trip level:

● P> (upper limit) 0 to 4294967.295 kW

● P < (lower limit)

Warning level:

● P> (upper limit) 0 to 4294967.295 kW

● P < (lower limit)





Response to trip level P> (upper limit), P< (lower limit) Response as follows:

● Deactivated

● Signaling

● Tripping

Delay as follows:


Response to warning level P> (upper limit), P< (lower limit) Response as follows:

● Deactivated

● Signaling

● Tripping

Delay as follows:


5.7.10 0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase monitoring of the analog signals of a transducer (standardized 0 / 4 - 20 mA output signal). The analog signals are fed to the "0 / 4 - 20 mA (AM1) monitoring" function block via the analog module.

Schematic The following schematic shows the "0 / 4 - 20 mA (AM1) monitoring" function block:




Trip level, warning level With 0/4 - 20 mA monitoring, you can parameterize two different response levels (trip level/warning level) for the upper and lower limits:

Trip level:

● 0 / 4 - 20> (upper limit), 0 to 23.6 mA (0.0 mA)

● 0 / 4 - 20< (lower limit)

Warning level:

● 0 / 4 - 20> (upper limit), 0 to 23.6 mA (0.0 mA)

● 0 / 4 - 20< (lower limit)

Trip level activity, warning level Here you can specify in which motor operating states the trip level/warning level is to take effect:

● always (on) trip level/warning level always active, regardless of whether the motor is running or at a standstill

● always, except in the case of TPF (on+); trip level/warning level always active, regardless of whether the motor is running or at a standstill; exception: "TPF", that is, motor feeder is in test position

● if motor is running, except TPF (run) trip level/warning level only active if the motor is ON and not in the test position.

● If the motor is running, except TPF, with startup override (run+) Trip level/warning level is only active if the motor is running, the startup procedure has been completed, and no test position (TPF) is detected.

Response to trip level 0 / 4 - 20 mA> (upper limit), 0 / 4 - 20 mA < (lower limit) Response as follows:

● Deactivated

● Signaling

● Tripping

Delay as follows:





Response to warning level 0 / 4 - 20 mA> (upper limit), 0 / 4 - 20 mA < (lower limit) Response as follows:

● Deactivated

● Signaling,

● Warning

Delay as follows:


Marking The marking is saved in the device and assigned and displayed in the Faults/Warnings online dialog. Optional marking for identifying the message, e.g. "0 / 4 - 20 mA>"; range: maximum 10 characters

Hysteresis for 0 / 4 - 20 mA Here you can set the fluctuation range for the analog signal:

Hysteresis for the analog signal: 0 to 15% in 1% increments (5% )

Note

Monitoring of a second process variable via input 2 of the analog module can be done, for example, by free limit monitors.

5.7.11 Hysteresis 0 / 4 - 20 mA Here you can set the fluctuation range for the analog signal:

Hysteresis for the analog signal: 0 to 15% of the level value in 1% increments (5% ).

5.7.12 Operation monitoring

Description SIMOCODE pro can monitor the operating hours and stop times of a motor and restrict the number of start-ups in a defined time frame in order to avoid plant downtimes due to failed motors caused by running or being stopped for too long.

When an adjustable limit is violated, a message or alarm can be generated which can indicate that the corresponding motor must be serviced or replaced. After the motor has been replaced, the operating hours and stop times can be reset, for example.




To avoid excessive thermal loads and premature wear of the motor, it is possible to limit the number of motor startups for a specifiable period. The number of still possible starts is available in the SIMOCODE pro for further processing.

The limited number of possible starts can be indicated by prewarnings.

Note

Operating hours, stop times and the number of motor starts can be monitored completely in the device and/or transmitted to the automation system via PROFIBUS.

Schematic The following schematic shows the "Operation monitoring":

Response Response Operating hours

monitoring level Stop time monitoring - level

Number of starts overshoot

Number of starts prewarning

Deactivated X X X X Signaling X X X X Warning X X X X Tripping -- -- X --


Stop time monitoring (Page 209)

Number of starts monitoring motor (Page 210)




5.7.13 Operating hours monitoring The motor operating hours monitoring function enables the operating hours (service life) of a motor to be recorded so that motor maintenance prompts can be generated in good time.

Level If the operating hours exceed the set response level, the monitoring function responds.

Level: 0 - 1193046 hours


Response You can define the response to overshoot here.


5.7.14 Stop time monitoring System parts for important processes often have dual drives (A and B drives). Ensure that these are always operated alternately. This prevents long stop times and reduces the risk of non-availability.

The stop time monitoring function can be used, for example, to generate an alarm, thus initiating connection of the motor.

Level The length of the permissible stop time is stipulated here; if exceeded, the monitoring function responds.

Level: 0 - 65535 hours





Response You can define the response to overshoot of the permissible stop time here.


5.7.15 Number of starts monitoring motor Monitoring the number of motor starts can protect system parts (motor and switching devices such as soft starters and converters) from too many start processes within a parameterizable time frame and thus prevent damage. This is particularly useful for commissioning or manual control.

Schematic The schematic below illustrates the principle of monitoring the number of starts:

Permissible starts The maximum permissible number of starts is set here. The time interval "Time range for starts" commences to run after the first start. After the second to last permissible start has been executed, the "Just one start possible" prewarning is generated.

Permissible starts: 1 to 255

Time range for starts The time range for permissible start processes is set here. The maximum number of starts is only available again after the parameterized time range for starts has elapsed. The number of available starts is shown by the analog value "Permissible starts - actual value".

Time range for starts: 00:00:00 to 18:12:15 hh:mm:ss





Response to overshoot You can define the response to overshoot of the number of starts within the time range for starts here.

Response to prewarning You can define the response after the penultimate start here.

Interlocking time If a new start command is issued within the time range for starts after the last permissible start, this new start command will no longer be executed if the setting "Response to overshoot - tripping" has been set. "Fault - No. of starts >" is generated and the set interlocking time activated.

Interlocking time: 00:00:00 to 18:12:15 hh:mm:ss


5.7.16 Temperature monitoring (analog)

Description Temperature monitoring of, for example, motor windings, motor bearings, coolant and gearbox temperature, can be carried out via up to three analog temperature sensors such as NTC, KTY 83/84, PT100, PT1000. SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase monitoring for overtemperature: Separate levels for warning and tripping temperature can be set.

Temperature monitoring takes into account the highest temperature of all the sensor measuring circuits of the temperature module.

Schematic The following schematic shows the "Temperature monitoring" function block (TM1):




Settings for temperature trip level T> ● Range: - 273 °C to 65262 °C

● Response to trip level T> Defining the response when the temperature is overshot (see the following table "Response")

● Marking for trip level T> No parameter. Optional marking for identifying the message, e.g. "Temperature>"; range: Maximum. 10 characters

Settings for temperature warning level T> ● Range: - 273 °C to 65262 °C

● Response to warning level T> Defining the response when the temperature is overshot (see the following table "Response")

● Marking for warning level T> No parameter. Optional marking for identifying the message, e.g. "Temperature>"; range: Maximum 10 characters

● Hysteresis 0 to 255 °C in 1 °C increments (5 °C)

Trip level activity/warning level The trip level/warning level is always active, regardless of whether the motor is running or not (operating state "ON").

Response to overshoot of the trip level/warning level for the temperature Response to trip level T> as follows:

● Signaling

● Tripping

Response to warning level T> as follows:

● Deactivated

● Signaling

● Warning

Note

The sensor type, the number of measuring circuits in use and the response to a sensor fault must be set in the "Temperature module inputs (TM1/2 inputs)" function block if temperature monitoring is used.




Note

To monitor several sensor measuring circuits individually and independently, a suitable number of free limit monitors can be connected to the "Temperature module inputs (TM1/2 inputs)" function block and differing limits set for the individual temperature sensors, instead of the "Temperature monitoring" function block.

5.7.17 Hysteresis for temperature

Setting the temperature Here you can set the fluctuation range for the temperature:

Hysteresis for temperature: 0 to 255 °C in 1 °C increments (5 °C).

5.7.18 Monitoring interval for mandatory testing

Description Function for monitoring the interval between the connection and the tripping of the enabling circuit (actuator tripping). Each time the enabling circuit is closed, the monitoring time starts again. This function supports you in complying with test intervals that require verification. In the enabling circuit of the DM-F Local and the DM-F PROFIsafe, relay contacts perform safety-related tripping. You can only determine whether or not the relay contacts of the enabling circuit actually open by changing the switching state of the contacts.

The function "Monitoring interval for mandatory testing" supports plant operators in monitoring the time that has elapsed since the enabling circuit was last switched in. When the set limit is reached, the set response is triggered (deactivated, signaling, warning; see response). This is logged in the event memory. This monitoring function is an organizational measure that supports the system operator in detecting faults by carrying out regular tests, see information in the operating instructions on regularly testing the function of a safety device. The monitoring function itself need not be safety-related.




Schematic The following schematic shows the "Monitoring interval for mandatory testing" function block:

Response to monitoring interval for mandatory testing Defining the response when the set limit is reached:

● Deactivated

● Signaling

● Warning

Test interval: Adjustable limit for the interval for mandatory testing: 0 to 255 weeks.

Parameterization of the modules 5.8 Inputs



5.8 Inputs

5.8.1 Inputs Basic unit inputs ()

Operator panel buttons (Page 216)

Digital module inputs (Page 218)

Temperature module inputs (Page 221)

Analog module inputs (Page 223)

Cyclic receive (Page 225)

Acyclic receive (Page 226)

5.8.2 Basic unit inputs

Description SIMOCODE pro has a "BU inputs" function block with four binary inputs connected to common potential. You can connect, for example, the buttons for a local control station to the inputs. These signals can be further processed in SIMOCODE pro by internally connecting the sockets of the "BU inputs" function blocks.

The "BU inputs" function block consists of:

● Input terminals located on the outside of the basic unit, corresponding to the sockets "BU input 1" to "BU input 4"

● Sockets in SIMOCODE pro that can be connected to any plugs, e.g. to the "Control stations" function block

● A socket for the "TEST/RESET" button The function of the "TEST/RESET" button is generally dependent upon the operating state of the device:

– Reset function for the acknowledgement of pending faults

– Test function for executing device tests. In addition, other functions can be assigned to the "TEST/RESET" button (e.g. operation of the memory module and the addressing plug).

One BU inputs function block is provided.




Schematic The following schematic shows the "BU inputs" function block:

Application examples You can wire the start and stop buttons of the local control station, for example, to the inputs. These can then be assigned to the "Local control stations" function block. If assigned accordingly, the input signals also can be used to activate, for example, function blocks such as "RESET" or "External fault".

Basic unit settings ● Delay for inputs

You can set a delay time for the inputs, if required. Range: 6, 16, 26, 36 ms

5.8.3 Operator panel buttons

Description The operator panel contains buttons 1 to 4 as well as the "TEST/RESET" button. Correspondingly, the "OP buttons" function block is available in SIMOCODE pro with five sockets.

Note

The "OP buttons" function blocks can only be used if the operator panel (OP) is connected and configured in the device configuration!




Note

The operator panel with display does not have a TEST/RESET button. The allocated functions can be carried out via the operator panel menu or via softkeys. Similarly, the corresponding status signal will then be available at the "OP test/RESET button" socket.

● Buttons 1 to 4, operator panel: Buttons 1 to 4 are usually intended for input of control commands for the motor feeder. Control commands can be, for example:

– Motor ON (ON>), Motor OFF (OFF) for a direct starter

– Motor LEFT (ON <), Motor OFF (OFF), Motor RIGHT (ON >) for a reversing starter

– Motor SLOW (ON >), Motor FAST (ON >>), Motor OFF (OFF) for a Dahlander circuit.

– However, buttons 1 to 4 are not rigidly assigned to the above mentioned control commands, and can be assigned to other functions via different internal connection of the respective function block socket in SIMOCODE pro.

● "TEST/RESET" button, Operator panel: The function of the "TEST/RESET" button is generally assigned to fixed functions:

– Reset function for the acknowledgement of pending faults

– Test function for carrying out device plugs

– Operation of the memory module or the addressing plug.

– Nevertheless, the status of the "TEST/RESET" button is picked off at the corresponding socket of the function block and assigned to further functions in SIMOCODE pro.

Schematic The following schematic shows the "OP buttons" function block:




5.8.4 Digital module inputs

Description SIMOCODE pro has two "DM inputs" function blocks, each with 4 binary inputs connected to common potential. You can connect, for example, the buttons for a local control station to the inputs. These signals can be further processed in SIMOCODE pro by internally connecting the sockets of the "DM inputs" function blocks.

Note

"DM inputs" function blocks can only be used if the corresponding digital modules (DM) are connected and configured in the device configuration!

Note

When using DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe fail-safe digital modules, the input signals are available as non-safety-related information.

Each "DM inputs" function block consists of:

● Input terminals located on the outside of the digital module, corresponding to the sockets "DM input 1" to "DM input 4"

● Sockets in SIMOCODE pro that can be connected to any plugs, e.g. to the "Control stations" function block.

The following are available:

● 1 DM1 inputs function block on the SIMOCODE pro S basic unit1)

● 1 DM1 inputs function block and 1 DM2 inputs function block on the SIMOCODE pro V basic unit.

Note 1) For the SIMOCODE pro S basic unit, the DM1 inputs and the temperature input are located on the multifunction module.




Schematic (1) The following schematic shows the "DM1/DM2 inputs" function blocks:

Schematic (2) The following schematic shows the "DM1 inputs" function block as a DM-F Local fail-safe digital module:

Meaning of the inputs:

Input: 1 - "tripped" state Start: Start input state (Y33) Feedback: Feedback circuit state (Y34): 1 - closed; 0 - open Cascade: Cascade input state (1) Sensor 1: Sensor circuit 1 state (Y12) Sensor 2: Sensor circuit 2 state (Y22).




Schematic (3) The following schematic shows the "DM1 inputs" function block as a DM-F PROFIsafe fail-safe digital module:

Meaning of the inputs:

Input 1: State of IN1 (83) Input 2: State of IN2 (85) Input 3: State of IN3 (89) Input 4: Feedback circuit state FBC (91): 1 - closed; 0 - open

Application examples Digital modules allow the number of binary inputs and binary outputs on basic unit 2 to be increased in increments. SIMOCODE pro V can thus be extended to a maximum of twelve binary inputs and seven binary outputs. If assigned accordingly, the input signals can be also used to activate, for example, function blocks such as "Reset" or "External fault".




Digital module settings ● Delay for inputs

You can set a delay for the inputs, if required. Range: 6, 16, 26, 36 ms. These values apply to digital modules with a 24 V DC input supply. The values are approximately 40 ms higher for digital modules with input supplies of 110 to 240 V AC/DC.

NOTICE

Delays

Delays for the digital module inputs can only be set, or are only relevant, if "monostable" or "bistable" is set for digital module 1.

If digital module 1 is a DM-F PROFIsafe, the delay cannot be set.

If digital module 1 is a DM-F Local, the delays are set using the DIP switch of the DM-F Local on the front.

5.8.5 Temperature module inputs

Description SIMOCODE pro has a "TM1 inputs" function block with three analog sockets corresponding to the three sensor measuring circuits of the temperature module. The temperature of the three measuring circuits (K) can be read from these sockets and processed internally. An additional analog socket always supplies the maximum temperature of all three measured temperatures.

Furthermore, the two binary sockets of the function block represent the status of the sensor measuring circuits. The temperatures can be processed internally and/or transmitted cyclically to the automation system via the "Cyclic send" function blocks.

Note

The "TM1 inputs" function block can only be used if the corresponding temperature module TM1 is connected and configured in the device configuration!




Schematic The following schematic shows the "TM1 inputs" function block:

Note Wiring

You can connect up to three 2-wire or two 3-wire temperature sensors.

Application examples Among other things, you can monitor the following motor components:

● Motor windings

● Motor bearings

● Motor coolant temperature

● Motor gearbox oil temperature

The individual temperatures of the three sensor measuring circuits can also be monitored independently of each other by connecting free limit monitors.




Temperature module settings ● Sensor type:

– PT100

– PT1000

– KTY83

– KTY84

– NTC

● Response to sensor fault/out of range as follows:

– Deactivated

– Signaling

– Warning

– Tripping

● Number of active sensors:

– 1 sensor

– 2 sensors

– 3 sensors

5.8.6 Analog module inputs

Description SIMOCODE pro has an "AM1 inputs" function block with two analog sockets, corresponding to the two analog inputs of the analog module. The effective analog value of each input can be read from these sockets and processed internally.

An additional binary socket of the function block also represents the status of the analog measuring circuits. The analog values can be processed internally and/or transmitted cyclically to the automation system via the "Cyclic send" function blocks.

Note

The "AM1 inputs" function block can only be used if the analog module AM1 is connected and configured in the device configuration!




Schematic The following schematic shows the "AM1 inputs" function block:

Application examples Typical applications are, for example:

● Fill-level monitoring for implementing dry running protection for pumps

● Monitoring of pollution in a filter using a differential pressure transducer

Analog module settings ● Input signal

– 0 - 20 mA

– 4 - 20 mA

● Response to open circuit

– Signaling

– Warning

– Tripping

● Active inputs

– 1 input

– 2 inputs

Note

The value of the analog module inputs is in S7 format.




Note

The inputs of the analog module are passive inputs, i.e. to configure an analog input circuit, each input will require an additional, isolated external current source connected in series. If the output of the analog module is not being used by another application, it can also be used as a current source for an analog module input circuit. The "Start value of value range" and the "End value of value range" of the analog module output have to be set to 65535 for this. Thus, the maximum possible current will always be available via the analog module output.

5.8.7 Cyclic receive

Description With the "Cyclic receive" function block, you can specify which cyclic data from the automation system will be further processed via PROFIBUS DP in SIMOCODE pro. These will normally be PLC/PCS binary control commands. Connection with the "Control stations" function block in SIMOCODE pro will allow the motor to be controlled via PROFIBUS DP. Direct connection of the analog value with the "AM output" function block will result in, for example, the cyclic output of the value sent via PROFIBUS DP at the output of the analog module.

The "Cyclic receive" function blocks consist of:

● Eight bits each (= 2 bytes, byte 0 and byte 1 for binary information)

● Two words (= 2 bytes, byte 2 to 3 for an analog value, freely parameterizable)

A total of three "Cyclic receive" function blocks (0, 1, 2/3) are provided.




Schematic The following schematic shows the "Cyclic receive" function blocks:

Cyclic services PROFIBUS DP:

The cyclic data is exchanged between DP master and DP slave in every DP cycle. The DP master sends the cyclic receive data (Cyclic receive) to SIMOCODE pro each time. SIMOCODE pro responds by sending the cyclic send data (Cyclic send) to the DP master.

5.8.8 Acyclic receive

Description In addition to "Cyclic receive", it is possible to transfer further data acyclically to SIMOCODE pro via PROFIBUS DP.

With the "Acyclic receive" function block, you can specify which acyclic information from PROFIBUS DP will be further processed in SIMOCODE pro. For this, you only have to connect the sockets of the "Acyclic receive" function blocks to any other function blocks in SIMOCODE pro.

The "Acyclic receive" function blocks consist of:

● Eight bits each (= 2 bytes, byte 0 and byte 1 for binary information)

● One word (= 2 bytes, byte 2 to 3 for an analog value, freely parameterizable)

● One input each from PROFIBUS DP

Overall there are three "Acyclic receive" function blocks (0, 1, 2/3).




Schematic The following schematic shows the "Acyclic receive" function blocks:

Acyclic services Acyclic services will only be transferred on request. The information (4 bytes) can be found in data set 202. This data set can be read by every master (PLC or PC) that supports the acyclic services of PROFIBUS DPV1. Connection monitoring is activated every time the data set is received. The content of the data set is deleted after a 5-second time-out has elapsed.

5.8.9 Analog value recording With the "Analog value recording" function block, you record any analog values (2 bytes/1 word) in SIMOCODE pro. The recording time period can be adjusted.

SIMOCODE must be online for analog value recording.

● Establish the online connection via the LifeList. Alternatively, click on "Connect Online" in the project.

● During commissioning, open the section "Analog value recording".

Functions of analog value recording:

1. Upload values Upload the 60 recorded values and show values as graphics.

2. Save Save and export the 60 values as a csv file.

3. "Trigger event occurred" After the trigger event defined in the parameters has occurred, the display shows a green light. After the trigger event, 60 values are recorded again.

4. Graphical representation The 60 recorded values are shown in a diagram.




The recording is made direct in SIMOCODE pro, related to the motor feeder, and independently of PROFIBUS or the automation system.

Each value present at the analog output "assigned analog value" is recorded and saved. Recording starts on the basis of the edge (positive/negative) via any binary signal at the trigger input of the function block. Up to 60 values can be saved internally in the device. The time frame of the recording is indirectly determined by the selected sampling rate:

Sampling time = sampling rate [s] x 60 values The pre-trigger is used to specify how far in advance the recording should commence before the trigger signal is issued. The pre-trigger is set as a percentage of the total sampling time.

Schematic The following schematic shows the "Analog value monitoring (record)" function block:

Signal/value settings ● Trigger input

Start of analog value recording with any signal (any outputs, e.g. device inputs, current flowing)

● Assigned analog value Any value (1 word/2 bytes) in SIMOCODE pro

● Trigger edge Positive/negative

● Sampling rate 0.1 to 50 seconds in 0.1 s increments

● Pre trigger 0 to 100% in 5 % increments





Description Activate 3UF50 compatibility mode if a SIMOCODE DP device is to be used by a SIMOCODE pro device without changing the configuration. If 3UF50 compatibility mode is activated, you can operate a SIMOCODE pro V basic unit with a 3UF50 configuration. In this case, from the point of view of the PLC (master class 1) communication with SIMOCODE pro is the same as communication with SIMOCODE DP. SIMOCODE DP supports cyclic communication (basic types 1-3), diagnosis, as well as DPV1 data sets (DS 130, DS 131, DS 133).

3UF50 operating mode You can specify here whether SIMOCODE pro V is to be operated on PROFIBUS DP with DPV0 functions (standard) or DPV1 functions (including acyclic services and interrupts)

Win SIMOCODE DP converter In order for the technical functions (parameterization) of SIMOCODE DP to be integrated into the technical functions of SIMOCODE pro V, the device parameters must be adjusted accordingly. The "Win SIMOCODE DP Converter" software supports you in this process. This software enables you to convert the parameter files (smc files) created with Win SIMOCODE DP into SIMOCODE ES parameter files (sdp files).

3UF50 basic type You can set here the basic type (1, 2, or 3) used to configure the 3UF50.

Safety notices

Note

Communication with a DP master (class 2 master), e.g. with the Win SIMOCODE DP Professional software via PROFIBUS DP, is not covered by the 3UF50 compatibility mode.

Note

In the 3UF50 compatibility mode, the startup parameter block is always set, i.e. the transmission of the device parameters created using the SIMOCODE DP GSD or SIMOCODE DP cannot be integrated into SIMOCODE pro V.




Note

The 3UF50 compatibility mode supports SIMOCODE DP projects in which SIMOCODE DP is integrated via GSD SIEM8031.gs?, SIEM8069.gs? or via the SIMOCODE DP.

Parameterization of the modules 5.9 Outputs



5.9 Outputs

5.9.1 Basic unit

Description In this dialog you can connect the three inputs (plugs) to a socket. To do so, choose the appropriate socket in the scroll boxes.

SIMOCODE pro has a "BU outputs" function block with two or three relay outputs. You can, for example, switch contactors or lamps via these relay outputs. For this, the inputs (plugs) of the function block must be connected to the respective sockets (usually the QE. contactor controls of the control function).

The "BU outputs" function block consists of:

● Three plugs corresponding to the relay outputs Out1 to Out3

● Three relays

● Output terminals

One "BU outputs" function block is available for the SIMOCODE pro C, pro S and pro V basic units.

Schematic The following schematic shows the "BU outputs" function block on the SIMOCODE pro C, pro S and pro V basic units:




The following schematic shows the "BU outputs" function block on the SIMOCODE pro S basic unit:

Application examples ● Activation of the main contactor in the motor feeder:

You can, for example, define which relay output is used for controlling the motor contactor in the motor feeder. To do this, connect the desired relay output to the respective "QE." contactor control of the control function.

● Activation of lamps for displaying operating states: You can, for example, define the relay outputs via which lamps/LEDs are to be displayed (fault, ON, OFF, fast, slow...). For this purpose, connect the desired relay output with the corresponding contactor control "QE..." of the control function. These are provided specially for controlling lamps and LEDs.

In addition to the status signals, the "QL..." lamp controls automatically signal the following using a 2-Hz flashing frequency:

● Test mode (QLE.../QLA lamp outputs are flashing)

● Unacknowledged fault (lamp output general fault QLS is flashing.)

● Transfer of any other information, status information, warnings, faults, etc. to the relay outputs

● Lamp test: All QL outputs are activated for approx. 2 s.

In most cases, the outputs of the basic unit will be connected to the QE or QL outputs.

BU outputs settings ● Output 1 to 3

Activation of the "BU outputs" function block via any signal (any sockets, e.g. device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits, etc., usually from the QE contactor controls).




5.9.2 Operator panel LED

Description In this dialog, you can connect each of the seven inputs (plugs) to a socket. To do so, choose the appropriate socket in the scroll boxes.

SIMOCODE pro has an "OP LED" function block for controlling the seven freely usable LEDs. The LEDs are located in the operator panel and can be used for any status displays. For this, the inputs (plugs) of the "OP LED" function block must be connected to the respective sockets (e.g. to the sockets for the status information of the control function).

Note

The "OP LED" function block can only be used if the operator panel (OP) is connected and configured in the device configuration!

The "OP LED" function block consists of:

● Four plugs, "OP LED green 1" to "OP LED green 4", corresponding to the green LEDs. The green LEDs are assigned visually/mechanically to the buttons on the operator panel. They normally display feedback concerning the motor operating state.

● Three plugs, "OP LED yellow 1" to "OP LED yellow 3", corresponding to the yellow LEDs

● Four green LEDs

● Three yellow LEDs (not for the operator panel with display).

One "OP LED" function block is provided for BU1 and BU2.

Schematic The following schematic shows the "OP LED" function block:




Application examples ● Display of operating states:

You can, for example, define which LEDs are to be controlled to display the operating states of the motor (fault, ON, OFF, fast, slow...) For this purpose, connect the desired LED with the corresponding lamp control "QL." of the control function. In many cases, the LEDs are connected with the QL outputs.

● Transfer of any other information, status information, warnings, faults, etc. to the yellow LEDs.

Operator panel LED settings In this dialog, you can connect each of the seven inputs (plugs) to a socket. To do so, choose the appropriate socket ☑ in the scroll boxes.

● Green 1 to green 4 Activation of the "OP LED" function block with any signal (any sockets, e.g. "motor" operating state feedback)

● Yellow 1 to yellow 3 Activation of the "OP LED" function block with any signal (any sockets, e.g. displays for status, events, faults)

5.9.3 Digital module

Description In this dialog, you can connect each of the two inputs (plugs) to a socket. To do so, choose the appropriate socket in the scroll boxes.

SIMOCODE pro has two "DM1 outputs" and "DM2 outputs" function blocks, which are each equipped with two relay outputs. You can, for example, switch contactors or lamps via these relay outputs. For this, the inputs (plugs) of the "DM outputs" function blocks must be connected to the respective sockets (e.g. of the control function).

Note

"DM outputs" function blocks can only be used if the corresponding digital modules (DM) are connected and configured in the device configuration!

Each function block has:

● Two plugs, corresponding to relay outputs Out1, Out2

● Two relays

● Output terminals.





● One "DM1 outputs" function block on the SIMOCODE pro S basic unit 1)

● Two "DM1 outputs" and "DM2 outputs" function blocks on the SIMOCODE pro V basic unit.

Note 1) For the SIMOCODE pro S basic unit, the DM1 outputs are located on the multifunction module.

Schematic The following schematic shows the "DM1 outputs" / "DM2 outputs" function blocks:

Application examples ● Controlling the main contactor in the motor feeder

You can, for example, define which relay output is used for controlling the main contactor in the motor feeder. For this, connect the desired relay output to the respective "QE" contactor control of the control function.

● Controlling lamps for displaying operating states: You can, for example, define which relay outputs are to be used for controlling the lamps/LEDs that display the operating states of the motor (Fault, ON, OFF, fast, slow...). For this, connect the desired relay output to the respective "QL..." lamp control of the control function.

● Transfer of any other information, status information, warnings, faults, etc. to the relay outputs.

"DM1/DM2 outputs" settings ● Output 1 to 2

Activation of the "DM1 outputs" and "DM2 outputs" function blocks via any signal (any socket, e.g. device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits, etc., usually from the QE contactor controls).




5.9.4 Analog module

Description Analog module 1 allows you to expand basic unit 3 by one analog output. The corresponding "AM1 output" function block allows every analog value (2 bytes/1 word) in SIMOCODE pro to be output as a 0 / 4 - 20 mA signal to a connected pointer instrument, for example. By activating the function block via the "Assigned analog output value" plug with any integer value between 0 and 65535, an equivalent analog signal of 0 to 20 mA will be sent to the output terminals of the analog module.

Note

The "AM1 output" function block can only be used if the analog module (AM) is connected and configured in the device configuration!

Schematic The following schematic shows the "AM1 output" function block:

Signal/value settings ● Assigned analog output value

Any value (1 word/2 bytes) in SIMOCODE pro

● Output signal 0 - 20 mA, 4 - 20 mA

● Start value of value range 0 to 65535

● End value of value range 0 to 65535

Note

The inputs of the analog module are passive inputs, i.e. to configure an analog input circuit, each input will require an additional, isolated external current source connected in series. If the output of the analog module is not being used by another application, it can also be used as a current source for an analog module input circuit. The "Start value of value range" and the "End value of value range" of the analog module output have to be set to 65535 for this. Thus, the maximum possible current will always be available via the analog module output.




Application examples 1) Output of the effective motor current - across the entire motor current range

The motor current of a motor is within the range 0 to 8 A.

The rated current IN of the motor at rated load is 2 A.

The set current in SIMOCODE ES Is corresponds to the rated current IN (2 A). The effective phase currents or the maximum current (current IL_1, IL_2, IL_3, max. current I_max) are represented in SIMOCODE pro in accordance with the selected range as a percentage of the parameterized set current Is:

● 0 A motor current corresponds to 0% of Is


● The smallest unit for the effective motor current in SIMOCODE pro is 1%

As a result,

● The "Start value of value range" to be selected is: 0

● The "End value of value range" to be selected is: 400

When the parameterized "Output signal" = 0 - 20 mA:

● 0% motor current: 0 mA at the analog module output





2) Output of the effective motor current - only part of the motor current range (overload range) The motor current of a motor is within the range 0 to 8 A.

The rated current IN of the motor at rated load is 2 A.

The set current in SIMOCODE ES Is corresponds to the rated current IN

(2 A). However, only the overload range (2 A - 8 A) is to be displayed on an instrument via the analog module output.

The effective phase currents or the maximum current (current IL_1, IL_2, IL_3, max. current I_max) are represented in SIMOCODE pro in accordance with the selected range as a percentage of the parameterized set current Is



● The smallest unit for the effective motor current in SIMOCODE pro is 1%

As a result,

● The "Start value of value range" to be selected is: 100.

● The "End value of value range" to be selected is: 400.










3) Output of any analog value from the automation system (cyclically via PROFIBUS) One word (2 bytes) can be transmitted cyclically from the automation system to SIMOCODE pro via PROFIBUS. Any value can be output as a 0 / 4 - 20 mA signal by directly connecting this cyclic receive word from PROFIBUS to the analog module output. If the transmitted value is in S7 format (0 to 27648) this must be taken into consideration when parameterizing.

As a result,

● The "Start value of value range" to be selected is: 0

● The "End value of value range" to be selected is: 27648.


● 0: 0 mA at the analog module output





5.9.5 Cyclic send data

Description In this dialog, you can connect each of the inputs (plugs) to a socket. To do so, choose the appropriate socket in the scroll boxes.

The "Cyclic send" function blocks allow you to specify the information to be transferred cyclically to the automation system via PROFIBUS DP.

"Cyclic send" function blocks consist of

● Eight bits each (two bytes, byte 0 and byte 1 for binary information)

● Nine words (= 18 bytes, bytes 2 to 19 for nine analog values, freely parameterizable)

● One output to PROFIBUS DP each

Overall there are four "Cyclic send" function blocks (0, 1, 2/3, 2/9).




Schematic The following schematic shows the "Cyclic send" function blocks:

Cyclic PROFIBUS DP services Cyclic send data is exchanged between the DP master and the DP slave once in every DP cycle. The DP master sends the cyclic receive data to SIMOCODE pro. In response, SIMOCODE pro sends the cyclic send data to the DP master.

Cyclic send data settings ● Byte 0 to 1; bit 0 to bit 7; basic types 1*, 2

Activation of bits by any signals (any sockets, e.g. device inputs, send data, etc.)

● Byte 2/3; basic types 1*, 2

Activation of 1 word (2 bytes) by any analog values (any sockets, e.g., maximum current Imax, remaining cooling down period, actual value of timers, etc.)

● Byte 4/5, 6/7, 8/9; basic type 1 Activation of 3 words (6 bytes) by any analog values (any sockets)

*) For basic unit 2 only

Byte 0 of the send data is already preset; byte 2/3 is preset with the max. current Imax!




Cyclic send data settings ● Byte 0 to 1; bit 0 to bit 7; basic types 1*, 2, 3**

Activation of bits by any signals (any sockets, e.g. device inputs, send data, etc.)

● Byte 2/3, basic types 1*, 2, 3** Activation of 1 word (2 bytes) by any analog values (any sockets, e.g., maximum current Imax, remaining cooling down period, actual value of timers, etc.)

● Byte 4/5, 6/7, 8/9; basic type 1* Activation of 3 words (6 bytes) by any analog values (any sockets)

● Byte 10/11, 12/13, 14/15, 16/17, 18/19, basic type 3** Activation of 5 words (10 bytes) by any analog values (any sockets)

*) For basic unit 2 only

**) For basic unit 3 only

Byte 0 of the send data is already preset; byte 2/3 is preset with the max. current Imax!

5.9.6 Acyclic send data

Description In this dialog, you can connect each of the inputs (plugs) to a socket. To do so, choose the appropriate socket in the scroll boxes.

In addition to "Cyclic send" it is also possible to transfer a further 16 bits of binary information to the PLC/PC via acyclic services.

The "Acyclic Send" function blocks allow you to specify the information to be transferred acyclically to the automation system via PROFIBUS DP. The inputs (plugs) of the function blocks must be connected to the respective sockets.

"Acyclic send" function blocks consist of

● Eight bits each (= two bytes, byte 0 and byte 1 for binary information)

● One output to PROFIBUS DP each.

A total of 2 "Acyclic send" function blocks are available for the SIMOCODE pro C, SIMOCODE pro S and SIMOCODE pro V basic units.




Schematic The following schematic shows the "Acyclic send" function blocks:

Acyclic services Acyclic send data will only be transferred on request. The information (two bytes) can be found in data set 203. This data set can be read by every master (PLC or PC) that supports the acyclic services of PROFIBUS DPV1.

Acyclic send data settings ● Byte 0 - 1, bit 0 - 7

Activation of bits by any signals (any sockets, e.g. device inputs, send data, status information, events, etc.)

Parameterization of the modules 5.10 Standard functions



5.10 Standard functions

5.10.1 Test/Reset

Test/Reset description The function of the "TEST/RESET" button on the basic unit or operator panel is generally dependent upon the operating state of the device:

● Reset function: If a fault occurs

● Test function: In other operating states.

In addition to the TEST/RESET buttons, SIMOCODE pro allows internal Test/Reset tripping via the "Test" function blocks. The "Test" function block consists of one plug.

A total of two function blocks, "Test 1" and "Test 2," are provided, each function block having a slightly different function:

● Test 1: Tests/trips of the output relays

● Test 2: Does not trip the output relays (normally for testing via the bus).

Schematic The following schematic shows the general representation of the function block of a standard function:




Schematic The following schematic shows a general representation of the "TEST/RESET" function blocks:

Testing Testing can be carried out as follows:

● Via the "TEST/RESET" button on the basic unit and on the operator panel (can be deactivated), as well as via PC with SIMOCODE ES software.

● Via the plugs of the internal "Test 1" or "Test 2" function blocks

● Via the menu of the operator panel with display (e.g. the "Commands" menu item).

Testing can be terminated at any time - it does not influence the thermal motor model of the overload function, i.e. after switching off via test, the system can be shut down immediately. Tripping only occurs for the "Test 1" function block when the operating mode is set to "Remote".

Reset function Resetting can be carried out as follows:

● Via the "TEST/RESET" button on the basic unit and on the operator panel (can be deactivated), as well as via PC with SIMOCODE ES software.

● Using the "Reset input" plug of the internal function blocks via the plugs of the internal function blocks "Reset 1", "Reset 2" and "Reset 3".

● Via the menu of the operator panel with display (e.g. the "Commands" menu item).

The "Reset" function block consists of one plug.

A total of three function blocks, Reset 1 to 3, are available All reset inputs (sockets) are equal (OR function).




Test function A SIMOCODE pro function test can also be initialized via the test function.

The test function comprises the following steps:

● Lamp/LED test (test function activated for < 2 s)

● Test of the device functionality (test function activated for 2 s - 5 s)

● For "Test 1" function block only: Switching off the QE (test function activated > 5 s).

Settings for test 1 to 2 ● Input

Activation of the "Test" function block by any signal (any sockets, e.g. device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits, etc.).

● Test/Reset buttons disabled The blue Test/Reset buttons on the basic unit and the operator panel are usually intended for acknowledging faults and for carrying out a device test. The buttons can be disabled by means of "Test/Reset keys disabled". These can then be used for other purposes. On the operator panel with display, blocking is carried out via the corresponding menu function (default: not blocked)

Acknowledgment of faults Generally, the following applies to the acknowledgement of faults:

● Faults can only be acknowledged

– if the cause of the fault has been eliminated

– if there is no "ON" control command pending.

● A reset will not be possible if the cause of the fault has not been eliminated and/or if an "ON" control command is pending. The reset will be saved depending on the type of fault. Saving a reset is indicated by the "GEN. FAULT" LED on the basic unit and on the operator panel. The LED changes from flashing to continuous signal.

Automatic acknowledgement of faults Faults are automatically acknowledged in the following cases:

● A reset has been saved and the cause of the fault is no longer present (user has previously acknowledged the fault)

● Auto reset of an overload trip or thermistor trip if motor protection reset = Auto (an automatic acknowledgment is issued here after expiry of the cooling down period). The motor cannot start immediately since reset cannot be performed when an ON command is pending.

● If a configured module fails, all related faults will be acknowledged automatically. However, a configuration error will be generated (exception: operator panel, if parameterized accordingly).

● If a function or module is deactivated in the device configuration (via parameterization), all related faults are acknowledged automatically.




● If a parameter of a function is changed from "Tripping" to "Warning", or to "Signaling" or "Deactivated".

● For an external fault: With its own parameter: "Auto reset".

Settings for reset 1 to 3 ● Input

Activation of the "Reset" function block by any signal (any sockets, e.g. device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits, etc.).

● Test/Reset buttons disabled The blue Test/Reset buttons on the basic unit and the operator panel are usually intended for acknowledging faults and for carrying out a device test. The buttons can be disabled by means of "Test/Reset keys disabled". These can then be used for other purposes. On the operator panel with display, blocking is carried out via the corresponding menu function (default: not blocked).

5.10.2 Test position feedback (TPF)

Description You can carry out the "Cold run" function test using the "Test Position Feedback (TPF)" function block. For this purpose, the function block input (plug) must be connected to the respective socket. The active test position is signaled by flashing QL of the control function.

The "Test Position Feedback (TPF)" function block comprises:

● One plug

● One "Status - test position" socket. The output is set if a signal is pending at the input.

● One "Fault - test position feedback error" socket. The output is set when

– "TPF" is activated although current is flowing in the main circuit

– "TPF" is activated and current is flowing in the main circuit.

In total, one "Test Position Feedback" function block is available.

In this dialog, you can:

● Connect the input (plug) with a socket. To do so, choose the appropriate socket in the scroll boxes.

● Select the input logic (NO/NC contact) under "Type".

Note

When the test position is enabled, the QLE/QLA sockets of the control function are activated to indicate test operation of the motor feeder via a flashing button LED, for example.




Schematic The following schematic shows the "Test Position Feedback" function block:

Cold run If the motor feeder is in the test position, its main circuit is isolated from the network. However, the control voltage is connected.

The "cold run" function test is performed with the feeder in this state. This means the motor feeder is tested without a current in the main circuit.

To enable this function to be differentiated from normal operation, it must be activated via the socket on the function block.

The feedback that the motor feeder is disconnected from the line voltage on the primary current side can be made, for example, via an auxiliary contact of the main switch in the motor feeder, wired to any device input (terminal). This is then internally connected to the "Test Position Feedback (TPF) - input" plug of the function block.

When using current/voltage measuring modules, this type of auxiliary contact is entirely unnecessary. The "TPF" function block can be activated here by monitoring for undervoltage ("Voltage monitoring" function block).

"Fault - Test Position Feedback (TPF)" fault message and acknowledgement

Note

"Fault - Test Position Feedback (TPF)" will be generated if:

• "TPF" is activated, although current is flowing in the motor feeder

• "TPF" is activated and current is flowing in the motor feeder.

Acknowledge with "Reset".




Test position feedback (TPF) settings ● Input

Activation of the "Test Position Feedback (TPF)" function block by any signal (any sockets, e.g. device input)

● Type Specification of the input logic

– NO contact (1-active)

– NC contact (0-active)

5.10.3 External fault

Description The "External fault 1 to 4" function blocks can be used to monitor any statuses and/or external devices, to generate fault messages and, if necessary, to switch off the motor. To do this, the inputs (plugs) of the "External fault" function blocks must be connected to any sockets (e.g. device inputs, control bits, etc.). External faults can also be marked in SIMOCODE pro. This facilitates their allocation to the actual malfunction.

Example: monitoring the rotational speed of the motor using an external speed monitor.

The "External fault" function block consists of:

● Two plugs (one plug for setting, one plug for resetting)

● One "Event - external fault" socket. The output is set if a signal is pending at the input.


● Four "External faults 1 to 4" function blocks for the SIMOCODE pro C and SIMOCODE pro S basic units

● Six "External faults 1 to 6" function blocks for the SIMOCODE pro V basic units.




Schematic The following schematic shows the "External fault" function blocks:

Special reset options A specific reset input is also available in addition to the other reset options (remote reset, Test/Reset buttons, OFF command reset).

Furthermore, auto reset can also be activated (see "Settings").

External fault 1 to 6 settings ● Input

Activation of the "External fault" function block by the monitored signal (any sockets, e.g. device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits, etc.)

● Type Specification of the input logic:






● Activity Specify in which motor operating state the external fault is to be evaluated:

– Always:: Always evaluate, regardless of whether the motor is running or at a standstill.

– Only if motor is ON: Evaluation only if motor is switched ON

● Response Specification of the response to an external fault when activated via the input (see the "Response" table)

● Reset Acknowledge the "External fault" fault by any signal (any sockets, e.g. device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits, etc.)

● Reset also by Specification of further (common) acknowledgement options using additional reset types:

– Test/Reset buttons on the basic unit and the operator panel or, in the case of the operator panel with display, via the menu (panel reset)

– Remote reset: Acknowledgment via reset 1-3, DPV1, "Reset" command

– Auto reset: The fault resets itself after the cause has been eliminated (after removal of the activation signal)

– OFF command reset: "OFF" control command, resets the fault

● Marking No parameter. Optional marking for designating the event, e.g. "Rotational speed ", e.g. with SIMOCODE ES. Range: maximum 10 characters.

"External fault" response Response as follows:

● Fault/tripping

● Warning

● Signaling




5.10.4 Operational protection OFF (OPO)

Description The "Operational Protection OFF" (OPO) function block returns the positioner to a safe position. To do this, the input (plug) must be connected to any socket (e.g. device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits, etc.).

The "Operational Protection OFF" function block consists of:

● One plug

● One "Status - OPO" socket. The output is set if a signal is pending at the input.

● One "Fault - OPO Fault" socket. The output is set when the respective, safe end position has been reached.

Overall, there is one "Operational Protection OFF (OPO)" function block for the SIMOCODE pro V basic unit.

Schematic The following schematic shows the "Operational Protection OFF (OPO)" function block:

Operational protection OFF (OPO) settings ● Input

Activation of the "Operational Protection OFF" function block by the monitored signal (any sockets, e.g. device inputs, etc.)

● Positioner response Specification of the response for the "Positioner" control function when activated via the input:

– CLOSED: Positioner moves in "CLOSED" direction

– OPEN: Positioner moves in "OPEN" direction

● Type Specification of the input logic






Safety notices

Note

A "Fault - Operational protection OFF (OPO)" fault message is not generated if the "OPO" command attempts to run the positioner to the end position if it is approaching or has already reached this end position.

Note

No other control command (counter command or stop command) is carried out while "Operational protection OFF (OPO)" is active.

Note

The "Fault - Operational protection OFF (OPO)" fault message must be acknowledged by the open or closed control commands, depending on the present "OPO" end position.

Note

Acknowledgment is performed even if the desired end position has not yet been reached.

Note

The fault message is available as diagnosis via PROFIBUS DP.

Response to other control functions For other control functions, the following scenarios can be differentiated between for OPO:

● Motor is on: The motor is switched off with a "Fault - Operational protection OFF (OPO)" fault.

● Motor is off: Initially no fault. "Fault - Operational protection OFF (OPO)" only occurs when an "ON command" is issued.

5.10.5 Power failure monitoring (UVO)

Description The "Power failure monitoring (UVO)" function block is activated via the plug. This is carried out via an external voltage relay that is connected to the function block via the binary inputs of SIMOCODE pro.

Overall, there is one "Power failure monitoring (UVO)" function block for the SIMOCODE pro V basic unit.




Schematic The following schematic shows the "Power failure monitoring (UVO)" function block:

Power failure monitoring (UVO) settings ● Input

Activation of the "Power failure monitoring (UVO)" function block by the monitored signal (any socket, e.g. device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits, etc.)

● Type Specification of the type of power failure monitoring:

– Deactivated

– No interruption of device power supply. The SIMOCODE pro control voltage is maintained. The failure of the line voltage must be detected, for example, by a separate voltage relay.

● Power failure time Time that starts when the power fails.

If the line voltage is restored within the power failure time, all drives which were running prior to the power failure are reconnected automatically.

If the line voltage is not restored within the power failure time, the drives remain disconnected and the "Fault - power failure (UVO)" message is generated. Once the line voltage has been restored, this fault message can be acknowledged using "Reset".

Range: 0 to 25.5 s in 0.1 s increments 26 to 255 s in 1 s increments 256 to 2550 s in 10 s increments

● Restart time delay (staggered) You can set a restart time delay so that not all motors restart simultaneously (the line voltage would otherwise break down again). Range: 0 to 255 seconds.

● Activation of external power failure monitoring Activation of the "Power failure monitoring (UVO)" function block with the monitored signal (any socket, e.g. device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits, etc.)




5.10.6 Emergency start

Description Emergency start deletes the thermal memory from SIMOCODE pro each time it is activated. This allows the motor to be immediately restarted after an overload trip. This function can be used to

● Enable an immediate reset and restart after an overload trip

● Delete the thermal memory (motor model) during operation, if required.

CAUTION

Thermal overload

If emergency starts are performed too frequently this may result in thermal overloading of the motor!

An emergency start is carried out as follows:

● Using the plug of the function block. To do this, the input (plug) must be connected to any socket (e.g. device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits, etc.).

The "Emergency start" function block consists of:

● One plug

● One "Status - emergency start executed" socket. The output is set when an emergency start has been executed.

Overall, there is one "Emergency start" function block available.

Schematic The following schematic shows the "Emergency start" function block:

Emergency start settings ● Input

Activation of the "Emergency start" function block by any signal (any sockets, e.g. device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits, etc.).




5.10.7 Safety-related tripping

Safety-related tripping

Note

Please note that the information made available for further processing is in the form of non-safety-related signals.

Note

Please note that the "Safety-related tripping" function block is not itself a safety-related tripping function. The DM-F Local safety function is determined solely by the DIP switch settings on the module. The DM-F PROFIsafe safety function is implemented by the fail-safe program in the F-CPU.

Overall, there is one "Safety-related tripping" function block for SAFETY (Local) or PROFIsafe for the SIMOCODE pro V basic unit.

DM-F Local schematic The DM-F Local "Safety-related tripping" function block consists of three sockets:

● Event - DM-F LOCAL o.k.: The DM-F Local is ready for operation.

● Event - "Safety-related tripping": Safety-related tripping has been carried out.

● Status - enabling circuit closed: The enabling circuit is closed.

The following schematic shows the "Safety-related tripping" function block and the setting of the DIP switches, DM-F Local:

Schematic The following schematic shows the "Safety-related tripping" function block:




Settings of the DIP switches (DM-F Local)

Note DIP switches target setting

The target setting of the DIP switches in the SIMOCODE ES user interface (can be made using the mouse pointer) is transferred to the basic unit on download but does not affect the function of the DM-F Local. The desired function is thus saved as soon as the parameterization has been created.

You must set the effective parameterization via the DIP switches on the front of the DM-F Local (see tables below and/or the manual "Fail-safe digital modules SIMOCODE pro Safety Solutions").

The basic unit compares the target setting (from the download) with the actual setting on the DM-F Local. If these differ "Configuration deviation" is output!

DM-F Local Description with/without cross-circuit detection

Cross-circuit detection is only possible with floating sensors. The sensors must be connected between T1 - Y12, Y33 and T2 – Y22, Y34. The device expects the test signal of terminal T1 at the terminals Y12 and Y33, and the test signal of T2 at the terminals Y22 and Y34. The device detects a sensor fault if the signal at the terminals Y12, Y33 or Y22, Y34 does not agree with the test signals T1, T2. Cross-circuit detection must be deactivated if electronic sensors such as light arrays or laser scanners are connected. In this case, the DM-F LOCAL no longer monitors the sensor inputs for cross-circuits. Usually, the outputs of safety sensors (OSSD) are already monitored for cross-circuits in the sensor itself. If "Without cross-circuit detection" is set on the device, the test outputs T1, T2 are deactivated and may no longer be connected. At the Y12, Y22, Y33, and Y34 inputs, the DM-F LOCAL expects a +24 V DC signal from the same current source as the one from which the device receives its power supply (possible only in the case of DM-F LOCAL-*1AB00) or from T3 (static +24 V DC). In the case of the DM-F Local-*1AU00 device version, it is imperative to connect the T3 terminal to the floating sensor contacts due to the electrical isolation between the input circuit and the sensor power supply.

1 NC + 1 NO evaluation / 2 NC evaluation

In addition to 2-channel connection of the same types of sensor contacts (NC/NC), sensors with opposite types of contacts (NC/NO), such as are frequently used for magnetically-operated switches, can also be evaluated. Make sure that the normally closed contact is connected to Y12, and the normally open contact to Y22.

2x 1-channel / 1x 2-channel • Two sensors with one contact each (2x 1-channel) (NC/NC). It is expected that both sensors are AND-connected. Simultaneity is not monitored.

• One sensor with two contacts each (1x 2-channel) (NC/NC). It is expected that both contacts are opened simultaneously.




DM-F Local Description Delay time for sensor inputs 50 ms / 10 ms

Any change in the sensor signal during the delay time is not evaluated. • Delay 50 ms: Switch position changes of strongly bouncing contacts are suppressed

(e.g. position switches on heavy protective doors). • Delay 10 ms: The shorter delay time permits faster deactivation of bounce-free sensors

(e.g. light arrays).

Sensor input automatic start / monitored start

• Automatic start: The enabling circuits are switched to the active position as soon as the switch-on condition is satisfied at the sensor inputs Y12, Y22, Y34 and 1. The start button connection terminal Y33 is not queried.

• Monitored start: The enabling circuits are switched to the active position as soon as the switch-on condition is satisfied at the sensor inputs Y12, Y22, Y34 and 1 and the start button at the terminal Y33 has been actuated (start with the falling edge).

Cascade input automatic start / monitored start

• Automatic start: The enabling circuits are switched to the active position as soon as the switch-on condition at the cascading input 1 is satisfied, i.e. as soon as a static +24 V DC signal is present (e.g. from T3).

• Monitored start: The enabling circuits are switched to the active position as soon as the switch-on condition at the cascading input 1 is satisfied, i.e. as soon as a static +24 V DC signal is present (e.g. from T3), and the START button at terminal Y33 has been actuated (start with falling edge).


With automatic starting / without automatic starting after power failure

The parameters of the DM-F Local can be defined so that the enabling circuits switch automatically to the active position again after a power failure, i.e. without actuation of the start button Y33. Requirements: • Y12, Y22 or the cascading input 1 are set to "monitored start". • The switch-on condition at the sensor inputs and at the cascading input is satisfied. • The START button was actuated before the power failure and this was valid, i.e. the

enabling circuits were in the active position.

DM-F PROFIsafe schematic The "Safety-related tripping" DM-F PROFIsafe function block consists of three sockets:

● Event - PROFIsafe active: Fail-safe communication between the F-CPU and the DM-F PROFIsafe is active.

● Event - "Safety-related tripping": Safety-related tripping has been carried out.

● Status - enabling circuit closed: The enabling circuit is closed.




The following schematic shows the DM-F PROFIsafe "Safety-related tripping" function block:

The PROFIsafe address is set using the DIP switches on the DM-F PROFIsafe:

Settings of the DIP switches (DM-F PROFIsafe) Use the DIP switches to set the PROFIsafe address on the DM-F PROFIsafe as follows:

If a DIP switch is at ON, the respective value is active. If more than one DIP switch is at ON, the respective values must be added.

"Safety-related tripping" response Here, you set the SIMOCODE pro response to safety-related tripping via DM-F Local or DM-F PROFIsafe.

Note

The response of the modules is not influenced by this setting. If the conditions for safety-related disconnection are met, the enable circuits are always disabled!


● Tripping

● Deactivated

● Signaling

● Warning

Note

In the event that the option "DM-F LOCAL/PROFIsafe - separate function from control function" has been activated under "Motor control > Control function > Operating mode", only "Deactivated", "Signaling" or "Warning" can be set and not "Tripping".

"Safety-related tripping" reset Here, you can select manual or automatic acknowledgment of SIMOCODE pro faults caused by safety-related tripping (default: Manual).




See also Setting the safety relay functions (Page 333)

5.10.8 Watchdog (Bus monitoring, PLC/PCS monitoring)

Description The "Watchdog" function block monitors communication with the PLC via PROFIBUS DP, as well as the operating state of the PLC in the "Remote" operating mode.

Bus monitoring With this type of monitoring, the "Fault - bus" fault is generated if

● "Bus monitoring" is active

● Cyclic data transfer between the PLC and SIMOCODE pro is interrupted in the "Remote" operating mode (mode selector S1=1 and S2=1), e.g. as a result of interruption of the PROFIBUS DP connection.

● "Status - bus o.k." can always be evaluated. If SIMOCODE pro is cyclically exchanging data with the PLC, "Status - bus o.k." is set to "1".

PLC/PCS monitoring With this type of monitoring, the "Fault - PLC/PCS" message is generated if

● "PLC/PCS monitoring" is activated

● The PROFIBUS DP switches to the "CLEAR" status when in the "Remote" operating mode (mode selector S1=1 and S2=1).

● "Status - PLC/PCS in Run" can always be evaluated. If the PROFIBUS DP is in the "CLEAR" state, "Status - PLC/PCS in Run" is set to"0".

If the "PLC/PCS monitoring - input" is connected primarily to the "Cyclic receive - bit 0.7" bit, the status of the PLC is deduced from this bit only.

Schematic The following schematic shows the "Watchdog" (PLC/PCS monitoring) function block:




Note PROFIBUS DP

"Bus monitoring" and "PLC/PCS monitoring" can only be effective if the DP slave watchdog function is activated in the DP master system.

Watchdog settings ● Monitoring PLC/PCS input

Activation of the "Watchdog" function block by the monitored signal (any sockets , e.g. PROFIBUS DP control bits, etc.)

● Bus monitoring

– Activated: If a bus fault occurs, the "Fault - bus" message is generated and must be acknowledged.

– Deactivated: No fault message; however, the "Status - bus o.k." information can be evaluated at any time.

● PLC/PCS monitoring

– Activated: If a PLC fault occurs, the "Fault - PLC/PCS" message is generated and must be acknowledged

– Deactivated: No fault message; however, the "Status - PLC/PCS in Run" information can be evaluated at any time.

● Bus/PLC fault - reset You can select whether faults are to be acknowledged automatically or manually. Range: Manual/Auto

"Fault bus"/"Fault PLC/PCS" response Response as follows:

● Fault

● Deactivated

5.10.9 Time stamping

Description SIMOCODE pro V can timestamp up to eight digital signals with high temporal precision (10 ms). In the process, every change in the state of the digital signal will be recorded.




Possible areas of application are:

● Precise chronological recording of faults in a process plant



Precondition To use SIMOCODE pro V time stamping, the DP master being used must support time synchronization functions via Profibus (e.g. DP master connections for SIMATIC S7-400), or a master clock must be used (e.g. SICLOCK).

Process in Step 7 Time-of-day synchronization for SIMOCODE pro V is activated in the STEP 7 device configuration in the slave properties under "Time Synchronization".

Note

The set synchronization interval must correspond to the configuration of the clock master.

For SIMOCODE pro, transmission of timestamped information is analogous to transmission with SIMATIC S7 IM 153-2. Therefore, the "FB 62 TIMESTMP" function block can be used for further processing of time stamped information in the CPU to transmit time stamped messages from the "Standard Library > Miscellaneous Blocks" library.

Note

The "LADDR" parameter contains the diagnostics address of the DP slave from the STEP 7 device configuration.

In the DP mode "DPV1" of the DP master - integrated via SIMOCODE pro - LADDR2 contains the diagnostics address of Slot 2 of SIMOCODE pro. For all other configurations, LADDR2 will contain the same address as LADDR.

In the DP mode "DPV1" of the DP master - integrated via SIMOCODE pro - LADDR2 contains the diagnostics address of Slot 2 of SIMOCODE pro. For all other configurations, LADDR2 will contain the same address as LADDR.

In contrast to the STEP 7 Online Help of FB 62, when integrating via GSD, the slot number of the module is transmitted with Slot 1 for signal messages, and with Slot 0 for special messages.

For further information on FB 62, refer to the STEP 7 Online Help system.




Schematic The following schematic shows the "Time stamping" function block:

Parameterization of the modules 5.11 Logic modules



5.11 Logic modules

5.11.1 Truth table 2I/1O

Description The truth table 2I/1O consists of:

● Two plugs


● One socket.


In total, two truth tables (7 to 8) are available for the SIMOCODE pro S and SIMOCODE pro V basic units.

Schematic The following schematic shows the "Truth table 2I/1O" logic modules:



● Three plugs


● One socket.






● Three truth tables (1 to 3) for the SIMOCODE pro C basic unit

● Four truth tables (1 to 4) for the SIMOCODE pro S basic unit

● Six truth tables (1 to 6) for the SIMOCODE pro V basic unit

Schematic The following schematic shows the "Truth table 3I/1O" logic modules:

Settings for truth table 1 - 9 3I/1O ● Input 1 to 3

Activation of the truth table by any signal (any sockets, e.g. device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits, etc.).






● Five plugs


● Two sockets.


Overall, there is one truth table (9) for the SIMOCODE pro V basic unit.

Schematic The following schematic shows the "Truth table 5I/2O" logic module:

Truth table 9, 5I/2O settings ● Input 1 to 5

Activation by any signal (any sockets, e.g. device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits, etc.)




5.11.4 Counter

Description Counters are integrated in the SIMOCODE pro system. These are controlled via the plugs "+" or "-".

The counter output switches to "1" when the preset limit is reached. The counter is reset with "Reset".

The current actual value is available as a socket for further internal processing and can also be transmitted to the automation system.

● Plug +: Increase actual value by 1 (maximum: limit).

● Plug -: Reduce the actual value by 1 (minimum: 0)

● Reset: Resets the actual value to 0.


● Three plugs (input +, input -, reset)


● One socket



● Two counters (1 to 2) for the SIMOCODE pro C basic unit

● Two counters (1 to 2) for the SIMOCODE pro S basic unit

● Four counters (1 to 4) for the SIMOCODE pro V basic unit

Schematic The following schematic shows the "Counter" logic modules:




Note

The time between the events to be counted depends on • The input delay • The device cycle time.

Note

The actual value remains the same • During parameterization or failure of the supply voltage • If there are simultaneous input signals at input + and input -.

Note

The output is always 0 if a reset is pending.

Settings of counters 1 to 4 ● Input +

Increase actual value by 1. Activation by any signal (any sockets, e.g. device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits, etc.).

● Input - Reduce actual value by 1. Activation by any signal (any sockets, e.g. device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits, etc.).

● Reset Reset actual value to 0 (count value and output) Activation by any signal (any sockets, e.g. device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits, etc.).

● Limit The maximum value that can be reached when counting and where the counter issues an output signal. Range: 0 to 65535




5.11.5 Timer

Description The timer consists of:


● One socket


The current actual value is available as a socket for further internal processing and can also be transmitted to the automation system.

If an input signal is pending, the timer issues an output signal according to the chosen timer type:



● With off delay

● With fleeting closing.


● Two timers (1 to 2) for the SIMOCODE pro C basic unit

● Two timers (1 to 2) for the SIMOCODE pro S basic unit

● Four timers (1 to 4) for the SIMOCODE pro V basic unit

Schematic The following schematic shows the "Timer" logic modules:

Note





Note

The response of the inputs of all timers (input, reset) has been completely changed to level-active for the SIMOCODE pro C basic unit from version *E05* or the SIMOCODE pro V basic unit from version *E03*. Use of an unchanged parameter file utilizing integrated timers may thus result in a different response if such basic units are used. For example, if "Fixed level - '1'" is set at the timer input, the timer function is automatically restarted after the timer reset occurs. However, in timers with the parameterized type = "Fleeting closing" there is no change in the response.

Settings of timers 1 to 4 ● Input

Activation by any signal (any sockets, e.g. device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits, etc.).

● Reset Reset actual value to 0. Activation by any signal (any sockets, e.g. device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits, etc.).

● Type Different output responses Range: With closing delay, closing delay with memory, with opening delay, with fleeting closing

● Value Time during which the timer provides an output signal when activated, depending on the output response (type). Range: 0 to 65535, unit 100 ms

5.11.6 Signal conditioning

Description If an input signal is pending, the signal conditioning issues an output signal according to the selected signal conditioning type:

● Non-inverting

● Inverting



You can set the output response.




The signal conditioning consists of:



● One socket. The following are available:

● Two signal conditioners (1 and 2) for the SIMOCODE pro C basic unit

● Four signal conditioners (1 to 4) for the SIMOCODE pro S basic unit

● Four signal conditioners (1 to 4) for the SIMOCODE pro V basic unit.

Schematic The following schematic shows the "Signal conditioning" logic modules:

Note





Settings of signal conditioning 1 to 4 ● Input

Activation by any signal (any sockets, e.g. device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits, etc.).

● Reset Reset signal conditioning to 0. Activation by any signal (any sockets, e.g. device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits, etc.).

● Type Different output responses;

● Range:

– Level not inverted

– Level inverted

– Edge rising with memory

– Edge falling with memory

5.11.7 Non-volatile element

Description Non-volatile elements behave like signal conditioners. However, these output signals are retained after a power supply failure.

If an input signal is pending, the signal conditioning issues an output signal according to the selected signal conditioning type:

● Non-inverting

● Inverting



You can set the output response.




● One socket.


● Two non-volatile elements (1 and 2) for the SIMOCODE pro C basic unit

● Two non-volatile elements (1 and 2) for the SIMOCODE pro S basic unit

● Four non-volatile elements (1 to 4) for the SIMOCODE pro V basic unit




Schematic The following schematic shows the "Non-volatile elements" logic modules:

Note


Settings of non-volatile elements 1 to 4 ● Input

Activation by any signal (any sockets, e.g. device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits, etc.)

● Reset Reset signal conditioning to 0. Activation by any signal (any sockets, e.g. device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits, etc.)

● Type Different output responses; Range:

– Level not inverted

– Level inverted

– Edge rising with memory

– Edge falling with memory




5.11.8 Flashing

Description If an input signal is pending, the "Flashing" logic component issues an output signal with a fixed frequency of 1 Hz between binary 0 and 1. This makes the LEDs on the operator panel flash.

The logic module consists of:

● One plug


● One socket.

A total of three logic modules, "Flashing" (1 to 3), are available.

Schematic The following schematic shows the "Flashing" logic modules:

Flashing 1 to 3 settings ● Input

Activation by any signal (any sockets, e.g. device inputs, signals, status, etc.)




5.11.9 Flicker

Description You can use the "Flicker" logic modules to assign the "Flicker" function to the operator panel LEDs.

If an input signal is pending, the "Flicker" logic module issues an output signal with a frequency of 4 Hz.

The logic module consists of:

● One plug


● One socket.

A total of three logic modules, "Flicker" (1 to 3), are available.

Schematic The following schematic shows the "Flicker" logic modules:

Settings of flicker 1 to 3 ● Input

Activation by any signal (any sockets, e.g. signals, etc.)




5.11.10 Limit monitor

Description With the limit monitor, any analog values (2 bytes/1 word) can be monitored for limit overshooting or limit undershooting.

The limit monitor issues the "Limit" signal at its socket. In addition, limit monitors can be "marked" according to their function.

Example: Monitoring the individual sensor measuring circuits of the temperature module (temperature 1-3) for overtemperature.

The limit monitor consists of:

● One analog plug


● One socket.

Overall, there are four limit monitors (1 to 4) for the SIMOCODE pro V basic unit.

Schematic The following schematic shows the "Limit monitor" logic modules:

Response for limit 1 to 4 Response as follows:

● Signaling

● Delay Range: 0 to 25, 5 s (0.5 s)




Functional principle The limit signal issued depends on

● The operating state of the motor

● The TPF function

● The parameterized "activity":

– on

– on+

– run

– run+.

Limit monitor settings ● Input

Analog plug of the limit monitor for linking to the analog value to be monitored (2 bytes), e.g. maximum current Imax, remaining cooling down period, actual value of timers, etc.)

● Type Specifies if the limit has to be monitored for overshooting or undershooting.

● Activity Determines in which motor operating state the limit monitor is to be evaluated:

– on, i.e. always evaluate, regardless of whether or not the motor is running

– on+, i.e. always evaluate, regardless of whether or not the motor is running. Exception: "TPF", i.e. motor feeder is in test position;

– run, i.e. evaluate only if the motor is in the ON state and not in the test position (TPF).

– run+, i.e. evaluate only if the motor is running and the start-up procedure is finished (i.e. the "Start active" message is no longer active) and there is no test position feedback (TPF); example: Cos phi monitoring

● Limit Monitor response value. The return value is always determined by the "Limit monitor - delay" parameter. Range: 0 to 65535

● Delay Specifies the time period for which the limit must be constantly overshot before the "Event - limit" output is set. Range: 0 to 25.5 s (0.5 s)

● Marking No parameter. Optional marking for identifying the message, e.g. "Limit>"; range: max. 10 characters.

Note

When using limit monitors, always ensure that the correct range and unit are used for the analog value connected to the limit input. These always have a direct influence on the unit of the limit to be set.




Examples of typical units and ranges in SIMOCODE pro: Unit Range Temperatures (e.g. max. temperature) 1 K 0 to 65535 Operating hours 1 s 0 to 1193046 Stop time 1 h 0 to 65535 Active power 1 W 0 to 4294967295 Apparent power 1 VA 0 to 4394967295 Timer actual value 100 ms 0 to 65535 Currents (e.g. max. current_Imax) 1% ls 0 to 66535 Analog module inputs -- 0 to 27648 (S7 format)

Thus, for example, a limit of 473 (K) must be parameterized for a limit monitor to monitor a maximum temperature of 200 °C.

5.11.11 Calculators

5.11.11.1 Calculator 1

Description The two logic modules "Calculator 1" and "Calculator 2" integrated in basic unit 2 are capable of the standard calculation modes and enable all analog values featured in SIMOCODE pro to be adapted, calculated, and converted, e.g.

● Conversion of the measured temperature from K (Kelvin) to °F or °C

● Conversion of the motor current from [%] to [A]

● Conversion of the 0 / 4 - 20-mA signals of the analog module directly into fill levels, pressures and flow rates.

The analog value (2 bytes/1 word) present at the analog sockets is calculated using a defined formula and using freely-selectable parameters (numerators, denominators, operators, offsets). The result of the calculation is output as an analog value (2 bytes/1 word) at the analog socket of the logic module for further processing.








Schematic The following schematic shows the "Calculator 1" logic module:

Settings Calculator 1 Description Input Any value (2 bytes/1 word)

Range: 0 to 65535 Output Calculated value (2 bytes/1 word)

Range: 0 to 65535 Numerator Range: -32768 to +32767, increment 1 Denominator Range: 0 to 255, increment 1 Offset Range: -32768 to +32767, increment 1




Formula

Output: Calculated value (2 bytes/1 word): Range: 0 - 65535

Example 1: Calculator




Example 2: Calculator Conversion of the maximum temperature of the temperature module from K to °F

Example 3: Calculator

5.11.11.2 Calculator 2

Description The two logic modules "Calculator 1" and "Calculator 2" integrated in basic unit 2 are capable of the standard calculation modes and enable all analog values featured in SIMOCODE pro to be adapted, calculated, and converted, e.g.

● Conversion of the measured temperature from K (Kelvin) to °F or °C

● Conversion of the motor current from [%] to [A]

● Conversion of the 0 / 4 - 20-mA signals of the analog module directly into fill levels, pressures and flow rates.

The analog value (2 bytes/1 word) present at the analog sockets is calculated using a defined formula and using freely-selectable parameters (numerators, denominators, operators, offsets). The result of the calculation is output as an analog value (2 bytes/1 word) at the analog socket of the logic module for further processing.








Schematic The following schematic shows the "Calculator 2" logic module:

Operating mode 1 and operating mode 2 The mode of the "Calculator 2" logic module can be changed via the "Operating mode" parameter:

● Operating mode 1 The analog value at input 1 is combined with the analog value at input 2 using a predefined formula and taking into account the specified parameters (numerators, denominators, offsets, operators).

● Operating mode 2 The analog values at input 1 and input 2 are processed together as a double word. Input 1 represents the high word and input 2 the low word. The result is calculated by means of the formula defined for this operating mode using the specified parameters (numerators, denominators, offsets) and is output by the function block as 1 word/2 bytes. In operating mode 2, it is also possible to process double words (e.g. active power, apparent power) and to map them (2 bytes/1 word).




Settings Calculator 2 Description Input 1 Any value (2 bytes/1 word)

Range: 0 to 65535 Input 2 Any value (2 bytes/1 word)

Range: 0 to 65535 Output Calculated value (2 bytes/1 word)

Range: 0 to 65535 Numerator 1 Range: -128 to +127, increment 1 Denominator 1 Range: 0 to 255, increment 1 Numerator 2 * Range: 0 to 255, increment 1 Denominator 2 *

Range: -128 to +127, increment 1

Offset Range: -2147483648 to +2147483647, Increment 2

Operating mode

1 or 2

Operator * +, - , * , / * Only relevant for operating mode = 1

Equations ● Operating mode 1: Both inputs of word type.

● Operating mode 2:

Both inputs 1 and 2 correspond to a D word input.

● Offset value range: - 2147483648 to 2147483647, increment 1.

● Output - calculated value: 2 bytes/1 word. Range 0 to 65535.

Parameterization of the modules 5.12 3UF50 compatibility mode



5.12 3UF50 compatibility mode

5.12.1 3UF50 compatibility mode - diagram of the data

Diagram of receive and send data

Table 5- 2 Control

Basic type 1 SIMOCODE

DP


pro V


DP


pro V


DP


pro V

0 Receive data

Cyclic receive bit 0 ... 1.7

0 Receive data

Cyclic receive bit 0 ... 1.7

0 Receive data

Cyclic receive bit 0 ... 1.7 1 1 1

2 Not supported

2 Not supported

2 Not supported 3 3 3

Table 5- 3 Send


DP


pro V


DP


pro V


DP


pro V

0 Send data Cyclic send bit 0.0 .. 1.7

0 Send data Cyclic send bit 0.0 .. 1.7

0 Send data Cyclic send bit 0.0 .. 1.7 1 1 1

2 Motor current Specified: Max. current I_max

2 Motor current Specified: Max. current I_max

2 Cyclic send bit 0.0 ... 1.7 3 3 3

4 Number of starts

Number of starts (bytes 0 ... 3)

5 6 7 Counter 1

value Counter 1 value - actual value

8

9 Counter 2 value

Counter 2 value - actual value

10

11 Sensor value TM - max. temperature




Diagram of diagnostics data The following table shows the diagnostics data in 3UF50 compatibility mode:

Byte,

bit Structure of 3UF50 device-

specific diagnostics in accordance with the DP

standard of SIMOCODE-DP

Byte, bit

Structure of 3UF50 device-specific diagnostics in accordance with DPV1

SIMOCODE-DP

Equivalent in SIMOCODE pro V

6 0x0B Same as 3UF50 diagnostics 7 0x81 8 0x04 6 0x0E 9 0x00 7.0 Free 10.0 Free 7.1 Event: DP block 10.1 Event: DP block Event - startup parameter block active 7.2 Event: Emergency start 10.2 Event: Emergency start Status - emergency start executed 7.3 Event: HW test o.k. 10.3 Event: HW test o.k. • No fault - HW fault basic unit

• No fault - module fault • No fault - temporary components

7.4 Free 10.4 Free --- 7.5 Event: Ext. event 1 10.5 Event: Ext. event 1 Event: external fault 5 7.6 Event: Ext. event 2 10.6 Event: Ext. event 2 Event: external fault 6 7.7 Event: Ext. event 3 10.7 Event: Ext. event 3 --- 8.0 Warning: Ext. warning 11.0 Warning: Ext. warning Warning: external fault 3 8.1 Warning: Unbalance > 40% 11.1 Warning: Unbalance > 40% Warning. Unbalance 8.2 Event: Failure PLC-CPU 11.2 Event: Failure PLC-CPU Status - PLC/PCS (inverted) 8.3 Warning: Sensor short circuit 11.3 Warning: Sensor short circuit Warning - thermistor short circuit 8.4 Event: Cooling down period

active 11.4 Event: Cooling down period

active Status - cooling down period active

8.5 11.5 Status: TPF Status - test position (TPF) 8.6 Free 11.6 Free --- 8.7 Free 11.7 Free --- 9.0 Warning: Ground fault 12.0 Warning: Ground fault • Warning - Int. ground fault

or • Warning - Ext. ground fault

9.1 Warning: Overload 12.1 Warning: Overload Warning: Overload 9.2 Warning: Overload + unbalance 12.2 Warning: Overload +

unbalance Warning: Overload + phase failure

9.3 Warning: I1 response level overshot


Warning - Warning level I>

9.4 Warning: I1 response level undershot


Warning - Warning level I<



---



---




Byte, bit

Structure of 3UF50 device-specific diagnostics in

accordance with the DP standard of SIMOCODE-DP

Byte, bit


SIMOCODE-DP


9.7 Warning: Thermistor 12.7 Warning: Thermistor • Warning - thermistor overload • Warning - thermistor open circuit • Warning - TM warning T> • Warning - TM sensor fault • Warning - TM out of range

10.0 Trip: Ground fault 13.0 Trip: Ground fault • Fault - Int. ground fault or

• Fault - Ext. ground fault

10.1 Trip: Overload 13.1 Trip: Overload Fault - overload 10.2 Trip: Overload + unbalance 13.2 Trip: Overload + unbalance Fault - overload + phase failure 10.3 Trip: I1 response level overshot 13.3 Trip: I1 response level

overshot Fault - trip level I>

10.4 Trip: I1 response level undershot


Fault - trip level I<

10.5 Trip: I2 response level overshot 13.5 Trip: I2 response level overshot

---



---

10.7 Trip: Thermistor 13.7 Trip: Thermistor • Warning - thermistor overload • Warning - thermistor short circuit • Warning - thermistor open circuit • Warning - TM warning T> • Warning - TM sensor fault • Warning - TM out of range

11.0 Trip: FB ON 14.0 Trip: FB ON Fault - feedback ON 11.1 Trip: FB OFF 14.1 Trip: FB OFF Fault - feedback OFF 11.2 Trip: Stalled rotor 14.2 Trip: Stalled rotor Fault - stalled rotor 11.3 Trip: Stalled positioner 14.3 Trip: Stalled positioner Fault - stalled positioner 11.4 Trip: Double 0 14.4 Trip: Double 0 Fault - double 0 11.5 Trip: Double 1 14.5 Trip: Double 1 Fault - double 1 11.6 Trip: End position 14.6 Trip: End position Fault - end position 11.7 Trip: Antivalence 14.7 Trip: Antivalence Fault - antivalence 12.0 Trip: ESB 14.0 Trip: ESB Fault - external fault 4 12.1 Trip: OPO 15.1 Trip: OPO Fault - Operational Protection Off (OPO) 12.2 Trip: UVO 15.2 Trip: UVO Fault - undervoltage (UVO) 12.3 Trip: external fault 1 15.3 Trip: external fault 1 Fault - external fault 1 12.4 Trip: external fault 2 15.4 Trip: external fault 2 Fault - external fault 2 12.5 Trip: TPF fault 15.5 Trip: TPF fault Fault - cold start (TPF) fault 12.6 Trip: Runtime On 15.6 Trip: Runtime On Fault - execution ON command




Byte, bit

Structure of 3UF50 device-specific diagnostics in

accordance with the DP standard of SIMOCODE-DP

Byte, bit


SIMOCODE-DP


12.7 Trip: Runtime OFF 15.7 Trip: Runtime OFF Fault - execution STOP command 13.0 Trip: Parameter fault 0 16.0 Trip: Parameter fault 0 Fault - parameterization 13.1 Trip: Parameter fault 1 16.1 Trip: Parameter fault 1 --- 13.2 Trip: Parameter fault 2 16.2 Trip: Parameter fault 2 --- 13.3 Trip: Parameter fault 3 16.3 Trip: Parameter fault 3 --- 13.4 Trip: Parameter fault 4 16.4 Trip: Parameter fault 4 Fault - configuration error 13.5 Trip: Parameter fault 5 16.5 Trip: Parameter fault 5 --- 13.6 Trip: Parameter fault 6 16.6 Trip: Parameter fault 6 --- 13.7 Trip: Parameter fault 7 16.7 Trip: Parameter fault 7 Fault - HW fault basic unit 14 ... 15

Number of overload trips Number of overload trips

16 ... 17

I of the overload trip [%/IE] Last trip current

18 ... 19

Operating hours [10 h] Motor operating hours



Commissioning 6 6.1 Control/status information

Controlling the feeder

The feeder is controlled with "ON<<, ON<, OFF, ON>, ON>>". The number of buttons depends on the control function selected. The buttons are not present on the overload relay. On the direct starter, only "OFF" and "ON" are shown. The buttons are only effective if

● The operator enables for the operator panel [OP] are set when the connection is made via the system interface

● The operator enables for PC [DPV1] are set when the connection is made via the fieldbus.

Acknowledging faults

Faults are acknowledged and the device is made ready for operation again with "Reset".

Hardware test

A hardware test is initiated with "Test".

Note

The different messages are indicated by the lamp symbols.

See also Diagnostics via LED display (Page 325)

Commissioning 6.2 Faults



6.2 Faults

Displaying faults

Different fault messages concerning the following topics are indicated by lamp symbols:

● Control system

● Protection

● Safety technology

● Monitoring

● Other - General

Control system Display Meaning/possible fault cause/acknowledgment/fault correction Execution ON command The motor feeder could not be turned on after an ON command was issued. Possible causes of

the fault: • Main circuit is interrupted (fuse, circuit breaker) • The motor contactor or contactor control is defective • "Execution time" parameter too short. Acknowledge with "Reset" or OFF command/counter-command.

Execution Off command The motor feeder could not be turned off after an OFF command was issued. Possible causes of the fault: • The contactor contact is welded • "Execution time" parameter too short • The "OPEN" end position has not been reached during the parameterized runtime (only for

the "Positioner" and "Valve" control functions). Acknowledge with "Reset" or a counter-command.

Feedback (FB) ON Current is flowing in the motor feeder without the motor feeder being switched on. Possible causes of the fault: • Contactor contacts have been manually activated • Contactor was not activated using the corresponding SIMOCODE QE output • The "CLOSED" end position has not been reached during the parameterized runtime (only

for the "Positioner" and "Valve" control functions). Acknowledge with "Reset" or a counter-command.

Feedback (FB) OFF The current flow in the motor feeder has been interrupted without the motor feeder being turned off. The positioner may be blocked. Possible causes of the fault: • The main circuit has been interrupted (fuse, circuit breaker, main switch) • The motor contactor or contactor control is defective. Acknowledge with "Reset".

Test position feedback Current is flowing in the motor feeder although the motor feeder is in the test position (TPF). The main circuit is not interrupted in test operation. Acknowledge with "Reset".




Display Meaning/possible fault cause/acknowledgment/fault correction Power failure (UVO) The power failure lasted longer than the set power failure time.

Acknowledge with "Reset". Stalled positioner "Positioner" control function:

The torque switch has activated before or without the respective limit switch. Possible cause of the fault: The positioner is blocked. Acknowledge by "releasing" with the counter-command "OPEN/CLOSED". Please check the positioner application and the limit switches.

Double 0 "Positioner" control function: If both torque switches respond simultaneously (TO=0 and TC=0), the positioner is switched off immediately with the fault message 'Fault - double 0'. Possible causes of the fault: • Open circuit torque switch • Torque switch is defective.

Double 1 "Positioner" control function: If both limit switches respond simultaneously (FO=1 and FC=1), the positioner is switched off immediately with the fault message 'Fault - double 1'. Possible cause of the fault: Limit switch is defective.

End position "Positioner" control function: Positioner/valve has left the end position without a command being issued. The motor feeder has been turned off. Acknowledge by "releasing" with the counter-command "OPEN/CLOSED".

Antivalence "Positioner" control function: The limit switches are not reporting any antivalent signals. Possible cause of the fault: Limit switch open circuit. Please check the positioner application and the limit switches. Acknowledge with the counter-command "OPEN/CLOSED"

Protection Display Meaning/possible fault cause/acknowledgment/fault correction Overload The motor feeder has been overloaded.

Please check the motor and the application that is being driven by the motor. The motor can be switched on again after the cooling down period has expired or after an emergency start. Acknowledge with "Reset", if auto reset is not active. Further information: See Overload protection (Page 174).

Overload + phase failure The motor feeder has been overloaded. Possible cause: Phase failure. Check the motor and the motor feeder. The motor can be switched on again after the cooling down period has expired or after an emergency start. Acknowledge with "Reset", if auto reset is not active. Further information: See Overload protection (Page 174) and Unbalance protection (Page 179).




Display Meaning/possible fault cause/acknowledgment/fault correction Unbalance The unbalance level has been exceeded.

Check the motor and the motor feeder. The motor can be switched on again after the cooling down period has expired or after an emergency start. Acknowledge with "Reset", if auto reset is not active. Further information: See Unbalance protection (Page 179).

Stalled rotor The maximum motor current has exceeded the threshold for stalled rotor protection. Possible cause of the fault: The motor is blocked. Please check the application that is being driven by the motor. Acknowledge with "Reset". Further information: See Blocking protection (Page 180).

Thermistor trip level Thermistor protection has activated. The temperature of the motor is too high. Please check the motor and the application that is being driven by the motor. The motor cannot be switched on again until the temperature has reached the reset point of the thermistor. Acknowledge with "Reset", if auto reset is not active. Further information: See Thermistor protection (Page 181).

Safety technology Display Meaning/possible fault cause/acknowledgment/fault correction DM-F safety-related tripping

The DM-F has tripped the enabling circuit for safety reasons. The motor cannot be switched on again until the enabling circuits of the DM-F are reclosed. Acknowledge with "Reset", if auto reset is not active. Further information: See Safety-related tripping (Page 254).

DM-F wiring

A wiring error has occurred on the DM-F (short-circuit to ground in the sensor/feedback circuit). Check the wiring of the sensor circuits/feedback circuit and correct the fault. Acknowledge with "Reset". Further information: See Safety-related tripping (Page 254).

DM-FL cross circuit

A cross-circuit fault has occurred in the sensor circuit of the DM-F Local. Check the wiring of the two sensor circuits for cross-circuit faults and correct the fault. Acknowledge with "Reset". Further information: See Safety-related tripping (Page 254).




Monitoring Display Meaning/possible fault cause/acknowledgment/fault correction Trip level I> The maximum current has overshot the trip level.

Please check the application that is being driven by the motor. Further information: See Current limits I> (upper limit) (Page 198).

Trip level I< The maximum current has undershot the trip level. Please check the application that is being driven by the motor. Further information: See Current limits I< (lower limit) (Page 199).

Internal ground fault Internal ground-fault monitoring has activated. An impermissibly high fault current is flowing. Please check the motor connection cable for damage. Acknowledge with "Reset". Further information: See Internal ground-fault monitoring (Page 195).

External ground fault External ground-fault monitoring has activated. An impermissibly high fault current is flowing. Please check the motor connection cable for damage. Acknowledge with "Reset". Further information: See External ground-fault monitoring (Page 196).

Trip level P> The active power of the motor has overshot the trip level. Please check the application that is being driven by the motor. Further information: See Active power monitoring (Page 204).

Trip P< The active power of the motor has undershot the trip level. Please check the application that is being driven by the motor. Further information: See Active power monitoring (Page 204).

Trip level U< The voltage in the motor feeder has undershot the trip level. Possible causes: • Undervoltage in the network • Fuse has tripped. Check the motor feeder. Further information: See Voltage monitoring (Page 201).

Trip level cos phi< The power factor cos phi has undershot the trip level. Possible cause: The motor is being operated without a load. Please check the application that is being driven by the motor. Further information: See Cos phi monitoring (Page 203).

Trip level 0 / 4 - 20 mA>

The measured value at the analog input has overshot the trip level. Check the measuring station. Further information: See 0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring (Page 205).

Trip level 0 / 4 - 20 mA<

The measured value at the analog input has undershot the trip level. Check the measuring station. Further information: See 0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring (Page 205).




Display Meaning/possible fault cause/acknowledgment/fault correction No. of starts > The permissible number of starts in the monitoring timeframe has already been exceeded. The

next start should not be carried out until the interlocking time has expired. Further information: See Number of starts monitoring motor (Page 210).

Temperature at trip level T>

The temperature warning level has been exceeded. Check the temperature measuring station. Further information: See Temperature monitoring (analog) (Page 211).

Other - General Display Meaning/possible fault cause/acknowledgment/fault correction External fault 1 to 6 A signal is pending at the input (socket) of the "External fault 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6" standard function.

Check the motor feeder. Acknowledgment depending on parameterization. Further information: See External fault (Page 247).

Bus PROFIBUS DP communication has been interrupted or is interrupted. Check the PROFIBUS connection (plugs, cables, etc.). Acknowledge with "Reset", if auto reset is not active. Further information: See Watchdog (Bus monitoring, PLC/PCS monitoring) (Page 258) and Diagnostics via LED display (Page 325).

PLC/PCS The PLC that controls the feeder was or is in STOP mode. Check the operating state of the PLC. Acknowledge with "Reset", if auto reset is not active. Further information: See Watchdog (Bus monitoring, PLC/PCS monitoring) (Page 258).

Hardware fault basic unit

The SIMOCODE pro basic unit hardware is defective. Replace the basic unit. Further information: See Replacing the basic unit (Page 334) and Diagnostics via LED display (Page 325).

Module fault At least 1 SIMOCODE pro module is not ready for use. Possible causes: • Connecting cable defective or incorrectly connected • Module defective. Replace the module. Acknowledge with "Reset". Further information: See Replacing the basic unit (Page 334) Replacing the expansion module (Page 334) Replacing the current measuring module and the current/voltage measuring module (Page 335) Diagnostics via LED display (Page 325).

Temporary components

Fault - temporary components (addressing plug, memory module or PC cable). Replace the defective components. Acknowledge with "Reset".




Display Meaning/possible fault cause/acknowledgment/fault correction Configuration error The configured device configuration does not match the actual configuration.

Measures: • Check whether all the configured components are available • Check the actual configuration with "Configuration". Acknowledge with "Reset". Further information: See Actual configuration (Page 309).

Analog modules 1/2 open circuit

An open circuit has occurred in the analog value measuring circuit. Check the measured value sensor and the measuring circuit. Acknowledge with "Reset". Further information: See Analog module (Page 236).

Thermistor short circuit A short circuit has occurred in the thermistor sensor cable. Check the thermistor sensor cable and the thermistor. Acknowledge with "Reset" after correcting the fault. Further information: See Thermistor protection (Page 181).

Thermistor open circuit An open circuit has occurred in the thermistor sensor cable. Check the thermistor sensor cable and the thermistor. Acknowledge with "Reset" after correcting the fault. Further information: See Thermistor protection (Page 181).

Temperature module 1/2 sensor fault

Either a short circuit or an open circuit has occurred in the temperature sensor circuit. Check the temperature sensor and the sensor cable. Acknowledge with "Reset".

Temperature module 1/2 out of range

Temperature sensor is delivering impermissible values. Check the temperature sensor. Acknowledge with "Reset".

Parameterization Incorrect parameters: 1. Set new parameters 2. Switch the control voltage off and on again.

Test trip The motor feeder has been checked and switched off by a test trip. Acknowledge with "Reset".

Operational protection OFF (OPO)

An "Operational protection OFF (OPO)" signal is pending. A switched-on motor feeder has been switched off. The feeder cannot be switched on while the OPO signal is active. Further information: See Operational protection OFF (OPO) (Page 250).

Commissioning 6.3 Warnings



6.3 Warnings

Displaying warnings

Different warnings concerning the following topics are indicated by lamp symbols.

● Protection

● Safety technology

● Monitoring

● Other - General

Protection Display Meaning/possible fault cause/acknowledgment/fault correction Prewarning overload (I>115%Is) The motor feeder is in overload operation. If this condition continues to persist, the

motor feeder will trip within a short period of time due to overload. Please check the motor and the application that is being driven by the motor.

Unbalance The unbalance level has been exceeded. Check the motor and the motor feeder. The motor can be switched on again after the cooling down period has expired or after an emergency start. Further information: See Unbalance protection (Page 179).

Overload The motor feeder has been overloaded. Please check the motor and the application that is being driven by the motor. The motor can be switched on again after the cooling down period has expired or after an emergency start. Further information: See Overload protection (Page 174).

Overload + phase failure The motor feeder has been overloaded. Possible cause: Phase failure. Check the motor and the motor feeder. The motor can be switched on again after the cooling down period has expired or after an emergency start. Further information: See Overload protection (Page 174) and Unbalance protection (Page 179).

Stalled rotor The maximum motor current has exceeded the threshold for stalled rotor protection. Possible cause of the fault: The motor is blocked. Please check the application that is being driven by the motor. Further information: See Blocking protection (Page 180).

Thermistor trip level Thermistor protection has activated. The temperature of the motor is too high. Please check the motor and the application that is being driven by the motor. The motor cannot be switched on again until the temperature has reached the reset point of the thermistor. Further information: See Thermistor protection (Page 181).




Safety technology Display Meaning/possible fault cause/acknowledgment/fault correction Monitoring interval for mandatory testing

The enabling circuits of the DM-F Local / DM-F PROFIsafe have not been opened and closed again within the configured time period. The function of the enabling circuit relay contacts can only be tested when they are switched. Further information: See Monitoring interval for mandatory testing (Page 213).

DM-F safety-related tripping The DM-F has tripped the enabling circuit for safety reasons. The motor cannot be switched on again until the enabling circuits of the DM-F module are reclosed. Further information: See Safety-related tripping (Page 254).

DM-FL simultaneity The DM-F Local has detected a discrepancy error in the two-channel sensor circuit. Check the switching elements in the sensor circuit.

DM-F feedback circuit The DM-F has detected a fault in the feedback circuit. The feedback circuit must be closed at the time of switching on the enabling circuit. Check the feedback circuit of the DM-F Local or DM-F PROFIsafe.

Monitoring Display Meaning/possible fault cause/acknowledgment/fault correction Warning level I> The maximum current has overshot the warning level.

Please check the application that is being driven by the motor. Further information: See Current limits I> (upper limit) (Page 198).

Warning level I< The maximum current has undershot the warning level. Please check the application that is being driven by the motor. Further information: See Current limits I< (lower limit) (Page 199).

Internal ground fault Internal ground-fault monitoring has activated. An impermissibly high fault current is flowing. Please check the motor connection cable for damage. Further information: See Internal ground-fault monitoring (Page 195).

External ground fault External ground-fault monitoring has activated. An impermissibly high fault current is flowing. Please check the motor connection cable for damage. Further information: See External ground-fault monitoring (Page 196).

Warning level P> The active power of the motor has overshot the warning level. Please check the application that is being driven by the motor. Further information: See Active power monitoring (Page 204).

Warning level P< The active power of the motor has undershot the warning level. Please check the application that is being driven by the motor. Further information: See Active power monitoring (Page 204).




Display Meaning/possible fault cause/acknowledgment/fault correction Warning level U< The voltage in the motor feeder has undershot the warning level.

Possible causes: • Undervoltage in the network • Fuse has tripped. Check the motor feeder. Further information: See Voltage monitoring (Page 201).

Warning level cos phi < The power factor cos phi has undershot the warning level. Possible cause: The motor is being operated without a load. Please check the application that is being driven by the motor. Further information: See Cos phi monitoring (Page 203).

Warning level 0 / 4 - 20 mA> (analog module 1/2)

The measured value at the analog input has overshot the warning level. Check the measuring station. Further information: See 0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring (Page 205).

Warning level 0 / 4 - 20 mA< (analog module 1/2)

The measured value at the analog input has undershot the warning level. Check the measuring station. Further information: See 0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring (Page 205).

No. of starts > The permissible number of starts in the monitoring timeframe has already been exceeded. The next start should not be carried out until the interlocking time has expired. Further information: See Number of starts monitoring motor (Page 210).

Just one start possible The start after the next one should not be carried out until the interlocking time has expired.

No start permitted The permissible number of starts in the monitoring timeframe has been attained. The next start should not be carried out until the interlocking time has expired.

Motor operating hours > The configured limit value for motor operating hours monitoring has been exceeded. Please apply the maintenance measures intended for the feeder.

Stop time > The configured limit value for stop time monitoring has been exceeded. Please apply the maintenance measures intended for the feeder. If possible, switch on the feeder.

Warning level T > The temperature warning level (temperature module 1/2) has been exceeded. Check the temperature measuring station. Further information: See Temperature monitoring (analog) (Page 211).

DM-F test requirement The enabling circuits of the DM-F Local / DM-F PROFIsafe have not been opened and closed again within the configured time period. The function of the enabling circuit relay contacts can only be tested when they are switched. Please apply the maintenance measures prescribed for this scenario.




Other - General Display Meaning/possible fault cause/acknowledgment/fault correction External fault 1 to 6 A signal is pending at the input (socket) of the "External fault 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6" standard

function. Check the motor feeder. Further information: See Auto-Hotspot.

Analog modules 1/2 open circuit

An open circuit has occurred in the analog value measuring circuit. Check the measured value sensor and the measuring circuit. Further information: See Analog module (Page 236).

Thermistor short circuit A short circuit has occurred in the thermistor sensor cable. Check the thermistor sensor cable and the thermistor. Further information: See Thermistor protection (Page 181).

Thermistor open circuit An open circuit has occurred in the thermistor sensor cable. Check the thermistor sensor cable and the thermistor. Further information: See Thermistor protection (Page 181).

Temperature module 1/2 sensor fault

Either a short circuit or an open circuit has occurred in the temperature sensor circuit. Check the temperature sensor and the sensor cable.

Temperature module 1/2 out of range

Temperature sensor is delivering impermissible values. Check the temperature sensor.

See also Motor protection (Page 173)

Machine monitoring (Page 195)

Commissioning 6.4 Messages



6.4 Messages

Display of messages

Display Meaning/possible fault cause/acknowledgment/fault correction Startup parameter block active The startup parameter block prevents transfer of SIMOCODE pro parameters

that can be saved in the DP master. The block must be set if SIMOCODE ES or SIMATIC PDM is used for parameterization. The block must not be set if SIMOCODE pro C/pro V is integrated into STEP 7 via SIMOCODE pro, or if SIMOCODE pro C has been parameterized via the GSD.

Configuration error The configured device configuration does not match the actual configuration. • Check whether all the configured components are available • Check the actual configuration with "Configuration".

Required function is not supported At least one parameterized function is not supported by the version of the basic unit. • Activate only the functions that are supported by the version of the basic

unit. For example, SIMOCODE pro V basic units with the version E01 do not support voltage measurement, the temperature module or the analog module.

Wrong parameter The parameter data transferred to the unit is incorrect. Errors in the parameter data can occur, for example, if the device has not been parameterized with SIMOCODE ES or SIMATIC PDM. • Check the parameter data (data sets 130 - 133) that has been transmitted

to the device for the correct content.

Parameter changes not allowed in the current operating state

You attempted to change at least one parameter that cannot be changed in the current operating state. Many parameters can only be changed if the motor feeder is switched off and not in "Remote" mode.

Password wrong The SIMOCODE pro parameters are protected by a password. An attempt has been made to change the parameters without entering the password. • Please use the correct password for changing the parameters. If you do not

know the password, new parameters can only be entered after the factory settings have been restored.

Further information: See Restoring factory settings (Page 330). DM-F safety-related tripping The DM-F Local / DM-F PROFIsafe has tripped the enabling circuits for safety

reasons. The motor cannot be switched on again until the enabling circuits of the DM-F module are reclosed. Further information: See Safety-related tripping (Page 254).

Monitoring interval for mandatory testing The enabling circuits of the DM-F Local / DM-F PROFIsafe have not been opened and closed again within the configured time period. The function of the enabling circuit relay contacts can only be tested when they are switched. Further information: See Monitoring interval for mandatory testing (Page 213).

Commissioning 6.4 Messages



Display Meaning/possible fault cause/acknowledgment/fault correction DM-F Local o.k. The DM-F Local is ready for operation. PROFIsafe active The DM-F PROFIsafe is in the "PROFIsafe active" status. DM-F Local configuration mode The DM-F Local is in "Configuration mode" status.

Complete the configuration. DM-F Local Actual and set configuration are different

The actual configuration of the DM-F Local does not correspond to the parameterized set configuration. Check whether the effective configuration actually agrees with the parameterized set configuration, and if necessary, correct the effective configuration by setting the DIP switches or the parameterized set configuration.

DM-F Local waiting for start-up test The DM-F Local is in the "Waiting for start-up test" status. DM-F incorrect PROFIsafe address or incorrect PROFIsafe parameters

The parameter settings of the PROFIsafe profile are incorrect or the set PROFIsafe address is not identical to the configured address. Check the PROFIBUS/PROFIsafe parameters of SIMOCODE pro that were set on the DP master system. (Modify text)

Status - enabling circuit closed The enabling circuits of the DM-F Local / DM-F PROFIsafe are closed. No module voltage Supply voltage on the DM-F is either too low or there is no voltage.

Check whether the terminals are correctly wired. The DM-F module is possibly defective. Replace the module.

Initialization module write-protected The initialization module is completely write-protected. Deactivate write protection of the initialization module.

Initialization module write-protected, parameter changes not allowed

The initialization modules is completely or partially write-protected. Reparameterization of SIMOCODE pro is denied because the initialization module is write-protected. Deactivate write protection of the initialization module.

Initialization module identification data write-protected

The device addressing and the I&M data in the initialization module are write-protected. Parameterization will only be accepted by SIMOCODE if the new parameter set is identical to the data stored in the initialization module at that time. • Select a parameterization with identical addressing and I&M data • Deactivate the partial write protection of the initialization module.

Initialization module read in The parameters of the initialization module were read into SIMOCODE. Initialization module programmed The reparameterization was accepted in the initialization module. Initialization module deleted The initialization module was deleted and is now back in the as-delivered state. Memory module read in The parameters of the memory module were read into SIMOCODE. Memory module erased The memory module was deleted and is now back in the as-delivered state. Memory module programmed The reparameterization was accepted in the memory module. Memory module write-protected The memory module is completely write-protected.

Deactivate write protection of the memory module.

Commissioning 6.5 Measured values



6.5 Measured values

Displaying measured values

Current Range Unit Max. current I_max 0 to 65535 % Is Current I_L1 0 to 65535 % Is Current I_L2 0 to 65535 % Is Current I_L3 0 to 65535 % Is Last trip current 0 to 65535 % Is Phase unbalance 0 to 100 % (100% corresponds to the failure of one phase)

Voltage Range Unit Voltage U_L1 0 to 65535 V Voltage U_L2 0 to 65535 V Voltage U_L3 0 to 65535 V

For voltage measurements, you require SIMOCODE pro V with a current/voltage measuring module.

Thermal motor model Range Unit Thermal motor model (Page 174)

0 to 255 %, related to the symmetrical trip level; Representation in 2% increments in bits 6 to 0 (value range 0 to 254%); Bit 7 indicates unbalance (fixed level 50%)

Remaining cooling down period

0 to 65535 s

Time to trip 0 to 65535 s (The motor is currently not in an overload situation. However, under the current load conditions, the motor will be switched off in x seconds due to overload.)

Power/power factor Range Unit Active power P 0 to 4294967.295 kW Apparent power S 0 to 4294967.295 kVA Cos phi 0 to 100 % (power factor is 100% if the motor current is flowing

or no voltage is measured.)

For power considerations, you require SIMOCODE pro V with a current/voltage measuring module.

Commissioning 6.5 Measured values



Temperature module 1/2 Range Unit Max. temperature - 273 to 65262 °C Temperature 1 - 273 to 65262 °C Temperature 2 - 273 to 65262 °C Temperature 3 - 273 to 65262 °C

For temperature measurements, you require SIMOCODE pro V with a temperature module and the corresponding temperature sensor.

Analog module 1/2 Range Unit Analog module - input 1 0 to 27648 S7 format: 0/4 mA = 0, 20 mA = 27648 Analog module - input 2 0 to 27648 S7 format: 0/4 mA = 0, 20 mA = 27648 Analog module - output 0 to 27648 S7 format: 0/4 mA = 0, 20 mA = 27648

Commissioning 6.6 Service data - statistical data



6.6 Service data - statistical data

Displaying statistical data Motor Range Motor operating hours 0 to 1193046 h Motor operating hours > See Warnings (Page 294) Number of overload trips 0 to 65535 Number of starts 0 to 4294967295 Permissible starts - actual value 0 to 255 Just one start possible See Warnings (Page 294) No start permitted See Warnings (Page 294) Stop time 0 to 65535 h Stop time > See Warnings (Page 294) Consumed energy 0 to 4294967295 kWh Time until test required 0 to 255 w (weeks) Test required See Warnings (Page 294), DM-F test range (Page 294)

For example, via "Motor operating hours" and "Number of starts", you can decide whether the motor and/or the motor contactors should be replaced. You can modify these values by entering a new value in the right input field and then clicking on "Set". The value is adopted by the device.

Basic unit Range Meaning Device operating hours 0 to 1193046 Specifies for how long the power supply of the

SIMOCODE pro was switched on. You can find further information under Fault memory (Page 304).

Module time: • Date • Time

Time information for the unbuffered real-time clock (only in conjunction with SIMOCODE pro S basic unit). The real-time clock can be synchronized using an NTP server or via Target system -> Command (Page 306).

Time shift UTC + h Configured time difference between the module time and UTC (Universal Time Coordinated) (only in conjunction with SIMOCODE pro S basic unit)

Int. number of parameter settings

0 to 65535

Commissioning 6.6 Service data - statistical data



Setting ranges for timers, counters and calculators ● Timer 1-6 - actual value

Range: 0 to 6554 s

● Counter 1-6 - actual value Range: 0 to 65535

● Calculators 1-4 - output Range: 0 to 65535

Commissioning 6.7 Error buffer/error protocol



6.7 Error buffer/error protocol

Description Timestamping in the error buffer is based on the operating hours (resolution: 1 s) of SIMOCODE pro.

The "Error/Fault" and "Power - On" events are logged. Each of these events is given a time stamp.

● Error/Fault The last 21 errors are stored in a ring buffer, whereby the incoming error (rising edge) is always logged. An outgoing error (falling edge) will not be logged.

● Power - On: If the most recent entry is "Power - On", this is not logged multiple times. Instead, the error number is used as a power-on counter. Thus, the error buffer cannot be deleted by frequent on/off operations.

Entry 1 is the most recent entry and entry 21 the oldest.

When using a DM-F, the events "Enabling circuit closed" and "Enabling circuit open" are logged for the DM-F Local and/or the DM-F PROFIsafe in a separate window:

● Time

● Event: "Enabling circuit closed" or "Enabling circuit open"

● Number: - Line 1: 200 or 202 - Line 2: 201 or 203

● Text: - Line 1: "DM-F Local enabling circuit 0 → 1" or "DM-F PROFIsafe enabling circuit 0 -> 1" - Line 2: "DM-F Local enabling circuit 1 → 0" or "DM-F PROFIsafe enabling circuit 1 → 0".

The current DIP switch position of the "DM-F Local" and/or "DM-F PROFIsafe" is displayed under "DIP switch position DM-F during the last event".

Commissioning 6.8 Test



6.8 Test

Testing functions To test the functions, proceed as follows:

1. Select the device-internal outputs (sockets) and display the logic states.

2. Select the device-internal inputs (plugs) and set their input signals to 0 or 1 by clicking on the corresponding buttons.

3. Display the logic states of the device-internal inputs (plugs).

4. Use this procedure to test, for example, the functioning of the truth tables.

Schematic

Note

The input can only be set in the test position, that is, the standard function "Test position feedback (TPF)" must be active!


Commissioning 6.9 Command



6.9 Command

Sending commands to SIMOCODE pro

Note

The command is executed immediately!

Command Meaning Addressing plug - adopt DP address

Reading of the DP address from the addressing plug. The addressing plug must be plugged into the system interface for this purpose.

Program memory module Parameters are transferred to the memory module. The memory module must be plugged into the system interface for this purpose.

Clear memory module Parameters in the memory module are deleted. The memory module must be plugged into the system interface for this purpose.

Read memory module Transfer of the parameters from the memory module to the basic unit. The memory module must be plugged into the system interface for this purpose.

Memory module write protection on

All contents of the memory module are write-protected. This prevents any inadvertent changes to the contents of the memory module and any parameter changes to the connected SIMOCODE pro S basic unit. Inadvertent changing of parameters for a motor feeder is thus prevented. SIMOCODE pro signals the successful execution of the command with the event "Memory module write-protected".

Memory module write protection off

With this command you can cancel the write protection of the memory module.

Initialization module write protection on

All contents of the initialization module are write-protected. This prevents any inadvertent changes to the contents of the initialization module and any parameter changes to the connected SIMOCODE pro S basic unit. Inadvertent changing of parameters for a motor feeder is thus prevented. SIMOCODE pro signals successful execution of the command with the "initialization module write-protected" event.

Initialization module write protection off

With this command, you can remove the write protection of the initialization module.

Commissioning 6.9 Command



Command Meaning Initialization module write protection for identification data in

(Identification & Maintenance) are write-protected. With this command, you can • prevent inadvertent changes to the parameters (e.g. device names)

and the I&M data for the motor feeder. • continue to make parameter changes in the initialization module as

well as in the SIMOCODE pro S basic unit if the address data and I&M data are identical to the data already contained in the device when parameters are downloaded.

SIMOCODE pro signals the successful execution of the command with the "initialization module identification data write-protected" event.

Initialization module identification data write protection off

With this command, you can remove the write protection of the identification data of the initialization module.

Clear initialization module With this command • all contents of the initialization module are deleted • The initialization module is reset to the as-delivered state. SIMOCODE pro signals the successful deletion with the "Initialization module cleared" event. On startup with an empty initialization module, the basic unit signals "Fault - parameterization". The "General Fault" LED of the basic unit flashes red. Reparameterization of the device, e.g. with SIMOCODE ES, writes valid parameters to the basic unit and the initialization module again. You can then acknowledge the fault message.

Cold restart Initialization of SIMOCODE pro. New start. Factory setting All parameters have their factory setting again, except for the

password. Only possible if password protection is not active or the password is known.

Set time (= PC time) If an NTP server address has not been configured or a server was not found on the network, you can set the time of day here. The system time of the PC is then calculated and transferred to the device in the format "NTP clock". If a valid time of day is available (either synchronized by NTP or set via SIMOCODE ES), the entries in the error buffer/error protocol (i.e. log) will be additionally displayed with the time of day. In addition, the "Clock set (NTP)" and "Clock synchronized (NTP)" messages are displayed.

Test Execute (Page 242) test function. Same function as "Test/Reset" button on the basic unit and operator panel.

Reset Performing a reset operation. Acknowledging faults. Same function as "Test/Reset" button on the basic unit and operator panel.

Commissioning 6.10 Password



6.10 Password Assign a password for SIMOCODE pro. This allows the protection in the basic unit to be activated or deactivated. Only if protection is deactivated can parameters be saved in or exported to the basic unit.

Note

If the password is not known, parameter changes can only be carried out after "Establish factory settings with Test/Reset on the basic unit"!

The current device parameters (including the password) are thus restored to the factory settings.

See also Restoring factory settings (Page 330)

6.11 Parameter comparison SIMOCODE ES compares parameters from the connected device (online value) with the parameters in the project (offline value). The values that differ from each other are displayed.

Commissioning 6.12 Actual configuration



6.12 Actual configuration

Read in actual configuration ● Establish a connection with SIMOCODE pro.

● Read in the existing configuration.

● Establish whether or not the set device configuration agrees with the actual device configuration. This is shown by the following symbols:

Symbol Description Module available and ready for operation Module not available Module faulty

● Check DIP switch position (if DM1 = DM-F Local or DM-F PROFIsafe)

The "Actual configuration" shows the actual DIP switch position from data set 105 (see System Manual),

The configured DIP switch position comes from data set 130 (see System Manual).

You will find additional information on the Internet at: System manuals (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/20369671/133300).


Commissioning 6.13 Analog value recording



6.13 Analog value recording With the "Analog value recording" function block, you record any analog values (2 bytes/1 word) in SIMOCODE pro. The recording time period can be adjusted.

SIMOCODE must be online for analog value recording.

● Establish the online connection via the LifeList. Alternatively, click on "Connect Online" in the project.

● During commissioning, open the section "Analog value recording".

Functions of analog value recording:

1. Upload values Upload the 60 recorded values and show values as graphics.

2. Save Save and export the 60 values as a csv file.

3. "Trigger event occurred" After the trigger event defined in the parameters has occurred, the display shows a green light. After the trigger event, 60 values are recorded again.

4. Graphical representation The 60 recorded values are shown in a diagram.

The recording is made direct in SIMOCODE pro, related to the motor feeder, and independently of PROFIBUS or the automation system.

Each value present at the analog output "assigned analog value" is recorded and saved. Recording starts on the basis of the edge (positive/negative) via any binary signal at the trigger input of the function block. Up to 60 values can be saved internally in the device. The time frame of the recording is indirectly determined by the selected sampling rate:

Sampling time = sampling rate [s] x 60 values The pre-trigger is used to specify how far in advance the recording should commence before the trigger signal is issued. The pre-trigger is set as a percentage of the total sampling time.




Schematic The following schematic shows the "Analog value monitoring (record)" function block:

Signal/value settings ● Trigger input

Start of analog value recording with any signal (any outputs, e.g. device inputs, current flowing)

● Assigned analog value Any value (1 word/2 bytes) in SIMOCODE pro

● Trigger edge Positive/negative

● Sampling rate 0.1 to 50 seconds in 0.1 s increments

● Pre trigger 0 to 100% in 5 % increments



Working with continuous function charts (CFCs) for SIMOCODE 7 7.1 Description

The graphic editor is an optional, graphical expansion to the SIMOCODE ES parameterization and service software.

It is not mandatory for parameterizing SIMOCODE pro. However, it facilitates and accelerates parameterization via the graphical user interface. It is specially designed for combining function blocks (e.g. timers, truth tables, etc.). Plugs are connected with sockets by dragging & dropping.

Before the device is parameterized with the graphic editor, the following definitions have been made since these are only possible directly from the "SIMOCODE ES" software:

1. Identification > Marking (Page 165) (if required)

2. Device configuration (Page 157) (always required)

3. Device parameters > Bus parameters (Page 171) (if required)

4. Device parameters > 3UF50 compatibility mode (Page 282) (if required).

Working with continuous function charts (CFCs) for SIMOCODE 7.2 Overview - Toolbar - Menu commands



7.2 Overview - Toolbar - Menu commands The following table shows the different Toolbar buttons and the associated commands:

Button Command

Transfer online data to the hardware Transfer online data to the offline project Position blocks according to data flow Grid on/off Insert text field Highlight for signal flow View > Show all View > Zoom in View > Zoom dialog View > Zoom out

Show/hide unused connections Monitoring On/Off Plans folder Start graphic editor Delete

7.3 Calling the graphic editor There are two methods of opening the graphic editor:

1. Go to Project view and open your project. Click in the project navigation window on "SIMOCODE > Plans > Plan_1" to open the graphic editor.

2. Alternatively, change to the "Portal view (lower left corner of the screen) > Control devices configuration > Plan_1".

Note Starting the graphic editor with Basic, Standard or Premium License

The graphic editor is always installed. • With the BASIC License, the information that the suitable license for starting the graphic

editor is not available is shown. • The graphic editor can only be started with a Standard or Premium License.

Working with continuous function charts (CFCs) for SIMOCODE 7.4 Functions



7.4 Functions

7.4.1 Connecting

Drawing a connection You can connect function block terminals with each other. To do so, proceed as follows:

Step Description 1 Move the cursor over an unconnected input. It is then highlighted. 2 • Press the left mouse button and keep it pressed.

• Keep the mouse button pressed and draw a connection to the output until it is highlighted in blue.

3 Release the mouse button. 4 A connection is established between the two terminals.

Note: You can also draw the connection from the output to the input.

Rules for drawing connections: ● Several connections can originate from one output.

● Only one connection can be connected to an input.

● Binary outputs can only be connected to binary inputs, and analog outputs can only be connected to analog inputs.

Marking the function block or connection You can use the mouse to mark both function blocks and connections. Multiple selection is possible with Ctrl. + click.

Moving the function block or connection Keep the mouse button pressed to move function blocks and connections. When function blocks are moved, the start and end points of connections are fixed, since they are linked to the terminals of function blocks.




Deleting the function block or connection If you delete function blocks, all connections emanating from the function block will also be deleted. Deleting a function block means it will not be used in the current plan; in other words, all inputs and outputs of the function block are not connected.

See also Select all ()

7.4.2 Selecting a function block or connection block and using it in the plan You can drag & drop function blocks and blocks to the plan and then interconnect them. The function blocks are stored hierarchically in directories. The graphics symbol shows the function block that can be inserted into the plan or that is already used in the plan.

Alternatively, you can transfer function blocks and blocks to the plan by double-clicking.

7.4.3 Select all You can mark all function blocks, connections and comments with the menu command "Edit" > "Select all", or with the key combination "Ctrl.+A".

Alternatively, you can draw a rectangle over all objects with the mouse.

The marked elements can then be moved or deleted.

7.4.4 Move plan The view of the plan can be moved up, down, to the right, and to the left using the scroll bars.




7.4.5 Monitoring With the "Monitoring" function, you can monitor the inputs and outputs of function blocks online.

● Change to "Project navigation > Devices > SIMOCODE_1 > Plans > Plan_1".

● Click the "Monitoring on/off" button to switch the function on. The objects interconnected in the plan are monitored online according to their settings and specifications. Display of the connecting lines:

– Connecting lines of logic values are shown in light green ("TRUE") throughout.

– Blue broken connecting lines are "FALSE".

● Set the properties for "General" and "Parameters" for monitoring in the inspector window. Selection by activating checkboxes.

● Select individual inputs, outputs or objects.

● In the shortcut menu, select "For Test" to monitor the connection or the object. The value of the connection is displayed next to the connection

7.4.6 Representations

7.4.6.1 Position blocks according to data flow Click on the "Position blocks according to data flow" button in the graphic editor. The function blocks and connections arrange themselves automatically. This function is executed when the graphic editor is first called for existing parameterization.

The following rules are observed when automatically arranging function blocks and connections:

● No overlapping of function blocks.

● Function blocks are displayed in a regular column grid

● Function blocks containing exclusively outputs are placed in the column on the extreme left

● Function blocks containing exclusively inputs are placed in the column on the extreme right

● Function blocks with inputs and outputs are arranged so as to result in minimum feedback

● By using the three last-named rules, a signal flow from left to right is achieved

● The page layout is automatically adapted. The required number of pages is set automatically. It is also ensured that no function blocks are placed on page margins.




7.4.6.2 Set colors

Setting the colors of the interconnection lines

In the CFC, the interconnection lines are color-coded depending on the data type. Different color adaptations are possible. The colors can be modified later.

The colors are assigned to the interconnection lines using the menu command "Options > Settings > General > Plans > CFC > General".

The data type of the data source is always relevant to the color shown. With interconnections to operands with undefined data type, the standard value "black" is used.

Define in the menu the colors of the interconnection lines for data type:

● Bool

● Byte

● Word / DWord

● Int / Dint

● Real

● Times

Note Changes in color assignment

Color assignments have an immediate effect on the display of the interconnection lines in an opened CFC.

The color settings are stored and are available for further sessions. They apply for all projects.

With the "Standard values" button, you restore the settings to the standard values.

7.4.6.3 Switching the grid on and off Click on the "Grid on/off" button to switch the grid on/off in the plan. For manual optimization of the graphical display, objects are aligned with the grid or with other objects.

Working with continuous function charts (CFCs) for SIMOCODE 7.5 Functions of the toolbar



7.5 Functions of the toolbar

7.5.1 Transferring the online data to the hardware Click on the button to transfer the online data to the hardware.

Note Parameterization changes

In test mode, changes to the input/output parameters of the blocks and instructions are transferred direct to the device and also adopted into the project.

Such changes do not necessitate renewed loading.

7.5.2 Transferring the online data to the offline project Click on the button to transfer the online data to the offline project.

During commissioning or when testing a CFC, it is possible to execute and test different parameter changes online in the device.

When these changes have been successfully tested, they can be read back to the offline program.

Note Reading back parameterization changes

Prerequisites: • Online mode is activated. • Parameter changes were made in online mode.

7.5.3 Insert text field Click the button to insert a text field.

● Open a text frame at any point in the plan while holding the left mouse key pressed

● Left-click on the text field and enter your comment.

Moving the text field

● Select the text field

● Press and hold the left mouse button to position the text field at the desired location in the plan.




Changing the size of the text field

The size of the text frame can be adjusted to suit the available space in the plan.


● Press and hold the left mouse key to drag the handles of the text frame and set the desired size.

Copying and inserting a text field


● Press the right mouse button and select "Copy Ctrl.+C" in the shortcut menu

● Press the right mouse button and select "Insert Ctrl.+V" in the shortcut menu

● Press and hold the left mouse button to move the text field to the desired location in the plan.

Edit text field

● Click on the text field for write mode

● Enter, change or delete the text.

Delete text field


● Press the right mouse button and select "Delete Del." in the shortcut menu. Alternatively you can delete the selected text field with the "Del" key.

7.5.4 Highlight signal flow Click the button to highlight the signal flow.

The following objects are indicated in color:

● All blocks and connections that indirectly send signals to an input of the selected block (signal flow on the input side)

● All blocks and connections to which the signals of all outputs of the selected block are sent directly or indirectly (signal flow on the output side).

Display of the data flow deactivates following:

● Selection of another function block in the plan

● Deletion of a function block in the highlighted plan

● Selection or deletion of a connection

● Click the button.




7.5.5 Select view Select a button to structure the desired view of the plan.

Buttons

Selection:

● Zoom in

● Show all

● Adapting the selection to the size of the work area

● Zoom out

7.5.6 Zoom in Click the button to zoom into the view of the plan.

The zoom factor is increased or decreased by a fixed value.

Otherwise:

● Key combination "Ctrl." + "+" on the numerical keypad

● Hold the "Ctrl." key pressed and operate the mousewheel.

7.5.7 Show all Click on the button to adapt the plan to the size of the work area.

In the "Show all" view, all pages/plans pertaining to the project are shown.

7.5.8 Adapting the selection to the size of the work area Click the button to select an area of the plan.

● Hold the left mouse button pressed and draw a rectangle over the desired objects of the plan. The selection is marked.

● Click the button. The selection is adapted to fit the work area.




7.5.9 Zoom out Click the button to zoom out of the view of the plan.

The zoom factor is increased or decreased by a fixed value.

Otherwise:

● Key combination "Ctrl." + "-" on the numerical keypad

● Hold the "Ctrl." key pressed and operate the mousewheel.

7.5.10 Show/hide unused connections Click on the "Show/hide unused connections" button. All unused connections are hidden. A second click on the button shows the connections again.

7.5.11 Activate/deactivate monitoring Click the "Monitoring on/off" button to switch the function on and off. The blocks interconnected in the plan are monitored online according to their settings and specifications.

7.5.12 Delete Use the menu command "Edit > Delete" to delete one or more selected objects and connections.

Otherwise:

● Press the "Del" button

● Click the symbol

● "Right mouse button > Delete"

● "Right mouse button > Del key"

Note

By deleting an object, you delete all connections or open connections leading to this block.



Migrating a SIMOCODE pro project 8 8.1 Migrating projects

Migrating project data from SIRIUS ES classic ● Existing project files can be migrated from SIRIUS ES classic (Version 2007 and higher).

The project data is converted to a TIA project. The converted project data can be further processed in the SIRIUS ES Client (initially only SIMOCODE ES).

● The migration supports only classic project files for one device but no group files. If the device is not supported in the TIA Client, information is displayed in the inspector window and the migration is canceled.

Note

If, for example, a specific module is not supported for the SIMOCODE header module, only this component is not migrated. All other supported modules are migrated. Information is displayed.

Migrating a SIMOCODE pro project 8.2 Launching the migration



8.2 Launching the migration The migration can be launched using two commands.

1. Portal view

2. Project view

You select the project file from SIRIUS ES classic via both versions. An appropriate file filter for *.sdp files (SIRIUS Engineering Files) is registered for this purpose.

After selecting the sdp file, the migration begins. This always involves the creation of a new project.

Note • Direct import to an existing TIA project is not possible. • Information on progress and status is displayed during the migration. • On completion of the migration, you will find the information "Migration finished" in the

inspector window.

You can also find more information in the general Help of the TIA Information System: Migrating projects in a TIA portal project (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/56314959)

http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/56314959



Additional information 9 9.1 Service

9.1.1 Active control stations, contactor controls and lamp controls The SIMOCODE pro PROFIBUS system manuals can be found at the following link: System manuals (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/20369671/133300)

9.1.2 Diagnostics via LED display

Diagnostics via LED display on the basic unit and on the operator panel (PROFIBUS) The basic units and the operating panel have three LEDs for displaying specific device states:

LED Status Display Description Corrective measures for faults Device Device status Green Device ON —

Green flickering Internal error Send back the basic unit Yellow Memory module or addressing plug

recognized, Test/Reset buttons control the memory module or addressing plug

—

Yellow flashing Memory module / addressing plug read in; factory settings restored (duration: 3 s)

—

Yellow flickering Memory module programmed (duration: 3 s)

—

Red Parameterization incorrect (also Gen. Fault on)

Parameterize again and switch the control voltage off and on again

Basic unit defective (also Gen. Fault on)

Replace the basic unit!

Red flashing Memory module, addressing plug, expansion modules defective (also Gen. Fault on - flashing)

Reprogram/replace the memory module, replace the expansion modules

Off Supply voltage too low Check whether the supply voltage is connected/switched on


Additional information 9.1 Service



LED Status Display Description Corrective measures for faults Bus Bus status Off Bus not connected or bus fault Connect the bus or check bus

parameters Green flashing Baud rate recognized / communication

with PC / programming device —

Green Communication with PLC/PCS — Gen. Fault

Fault status Red Fault pending; reset has been saved Rectify fault, e.g. overload Red flashing Fault pending; reset has not been

saved Rectify fault, e.g. overload

Off No error —

Diagnostics via LED display on the basic unit and on the operator panel The basic unit and the operating panel have LEDs for displaying specific device states:

LED Status Display Description Corrective measures for faults Device Device

status Green Device ON - Green flickering Internal error Send back the basic unit Yellow Memory module recognized,

TEST/RESET buttons control the memory module

—

Yellow flashing Memory module read in; factory settings configured (duration: 3 s)

—

Yellow flickering Memory module programmed (duration: 3 s)

—

Red Device defective (also Gen. Fault on) Replace the basic unit! Red flashing Memory module or expansion modules

defective (also Gen. Fault on - flashing)

Reprogram/replace the memory module, replace the expansion modules

Off Supply voltage too low Check whether the supply voltage is connected/switched on

Green flashing PE energy saving mode active — Bus Bus status

Off No communication with the

IO Controller of the PLC/PCS Connect the bus or check parameters (IP parameters, device name)

Green Communication with the IO Controller of the PLC/PCS is active

—

Gen. Fault Fault status

Red Fault pending; reset has been saved Rectify fault, e.g. overload Red flashing Fault pending; reset has not been

saved —

Off No error —




LED Status Display Description Corrective measures for faults PORT1 (only on basic unit)

Bus status

Green Ethernet connection available — Off No Ethernet connection available Check the Ethernet connection and

the wiring Flashing Station flash test for device location

active —

PORT2 (only on basic unit)

Bus status

Green Ethernet connection available — Off No Ethernet connection available Check the Ethernet connection and

the wiring Flashing Station flash test for device location

active —

Diagnostics via LEDs on DM-F Local The DM-F Local has more than 10 LEDs that display specific device states:

LED display Color Meaning READY OFF

Green Green flashing

System interface not connected/supply voltage too low/device defective Device ON/system interface OK Device ON/system interface not active or not OK

DEVICE OFF Green Green flashing Yellow Yellow flashing Red

Supply voltage too low Device ON Self-test Configuration mode Error in configuration Device defective or faulty

OUT OFF Green Green flashing

Safety-related output not active Safety-related output active Feedback circuit not closed although start condition satisfied

IN OFF Green Green flashing

Input not active Input active Fault detected (e.g. cross-circuit at input, sensor simultaneity not fulfilled)

1 OFF Yellow Yellow flashing Yellow flickering

Cross-circuit detection off Cross-circuit detection ON Configuration mode, waiting for confirmation Error in configuration


NC contact/NO contact NC contact/NC contact Configuration mode, waiting for confirmation Error in configuration




LED display Color Meaning 3 OFF

Yellow Yellow flashing Yellow flickering

2 x single-channel 1 x two-channel Configuration mode, waiting for confirmation Error in configuration


Delays Y12, Y22, Y34 approx. 50 ms Delays Y12, Y22, Y34 approx. 10 ms Configuration mode, waiting for confirmation Error in configuration


Sensor circuit, automatic start Sensor circuit, monitored start Configuration mode, waiting for confirmation Error in configuration


Cascading input 1, automatic start Cascading input 1, monitored start Configuration mode, waiting for confirmation Error in configuration


With start-up testing Without start-up testing Configuration mode, waiting for confirmation Error in configuration


Automatic starting after power failure No automatic starting after power failure Configuration mode, waiting for confirmation Error in configuration




Diagnostics via LEDs on DM-F PROFIsafe The DM-F PROFIsafe has more than 10 LEDs that display specific device states:

LED display Color Meaning OFF READY OFF

Green Green flashing

System interface not connected/supply voltage too low/device defective Device ON/system interface OK Device ON/system interface not active or not OK

DEVICE OFF Green Green flashing Red

Supply voltage too low Device ON Self-test Device defective or faulty

OUT OFF Green Green flashing

Safety-related output not active Safety-related output active Feedback circuit not closed although start condition satisfied

SF OFF Red

No group fault Group fault (PROFIsafe not active, incorrect PROFIsafe address, wiring error, device defective)

1 Yellow PROFIsafe address 1 2 Yellow PROFIsafe address 2 3 Yellow PROFIsafe address 4 4 Yellow PROFIsafe address 8 5 Yellow PROFIsafe address 16 6 Yellow PROFIsafe address 32 7 Yellow PROFIsafe address 64 8 Yellow PROFIsafe address 128 9 Yellow PROFIsafe address 256 10 Yellow PROFIsafe address 512




9.1.3 Restoring factory settings With the factory settings, all parameters are reset to the factory values.

Restoring the factory settings with the Test/Reset button on the basic unit

Proceed as follows:

1. Switch off the supply voltage for the basic unit.

2. Press the Test/Reset button on the basic unit and keep it pressed.

3. Switch on the supply voltage for the basic unit. The Device LED is yellow.

4. Release the Test/Reset button after approx. two seconds.

5. Press the Test/Reset button again after approx. two seconds.

6. Release the Test/Reset button after approx. two seconds.

7. Press the Test/Reset button again after approx. two seconds.

8. The factory setting is restored.

Note

If any of the steps are not carried out correctly, the basic unit will revert to normal operation.

Note

This function is always active, independent of the "TEST/RESET keys disabled" parameter.

Restoring the factory settings with the SIMOCODE ES software Prerequisites: SIMOCODE pro is connected to the PC/PG via PROFIBUS DP or via the system interface, and SIMOCODE ES is started.

Proceed as follows:

1. In the Project navigation view, select "Online accesses > COM [Sirius PtP] > Update accessible stations > SIMOCODE > Commissioning > Command".

2. Click on the "Factory settings" button. The factory settings are restored.

3. "Factory settings OK" is displayed in the inspector window.




9.1.4 Setting the PROFIBUS DP address

Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via the addressing plug Proceed as follows:

1. Set the desired valid address on the DIP switch. The switches are numbered. Example: Address 21: Put the "16"+"4"+"1" switches in the "ON" position.

2. Plug the addressing plug into the system interface. The "Device" LED is yellow.

3. Briefly press the Test/Reset button. The address you set is now stored. The "Device" LED flashes yellow for approx. 3 seconds.

4. Remove the addressing plug from the system interface.

5. After transferring the data to the basic unit, you will receive the message "Download to device successfully accomplished".

Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via SIMOCODE ES Proceed as follows:

1. Plug the PC cable into the system interface.

2. In the Project navigation Devices view, select "Online accesses > COM [Sirius PtP] > Update accessible stations > SIMOCODE > Parameters > Fieldbus interface".

3. Enter the DP address. After entering a new DP address, the button "Transfer online data to the hardware" becomes active.

4. Click on the button. The online data is transferred to the hardware. The DP address is set.

Settings of the PROFIsafe address, DM-F PROFIsafe





9.1.5 Backing up and saving parameters Always save the parameters in the memory module or in the project. This particularly applies if you replace a basic unit, or if you wish to transfer data from one basic unit to another.

Saving parameters from the basic unit to the memory module Proceed as follows:

1. Plug the memory module into the system interface. The "Device" LED lights up yellow for approx. 10 seconds. During this time, press the "TEST/RESET" button for approx. 3 seconds. The parameters will be saved in the memory module. After successful data transfer, the "Device" LED flickers yellow for approx. 3 seconds.

2. If necessary, unplug the memory module from the system interface

Saving parameters from the basic unit to the project Proceed as follows:


2. Start SIMOCODE ES.

3. Select the menu command Online > Download from device. The parameters are loaded into the main memory from the basic unit.

4. Open the menu command Project > Save as .... The parameters are saved from RAM to the project.

Saving parameters from the memory module to the basic unit Proceed as follows:

1. Plug the memory module into the system interface. The "Device" LED lights up yellow for approx. 10 seconds. During this time, briefly press the "TEST/RESET" button. The parameters will be transferred to the basic unit. After successful data transfer, the "Device" LED flashes yellow for approx. 3 seconds.

2. If necessary, unplug the memory module from the system interface

Note

If the memory module is plugged in, the parameters will be transferred from the memory module to the basic unit when the supply voltage is switched on.




Saving parameters from a project to the basic unit Proceed as follows:


2. Start SIMOCODE ES.

3. Select the menu command Online > Download from device. The parameters are loaded into the project from RAM.

4. Select the menu command Online > Load to device. The parameters will be saved to the basic unit from RAM.

9.1.6 Configuring the diagnostics response

Description In SIMOCODE pro, you can set which diagnostic events trigger the transmission of diagnostics data or alarms to the PLC:

● Diagnostics for device faults, e.g. parameterization errors, hardware faults

● Diagnostics for process faults: For events labeled "S" in table B-8: Data set 92 - Diagnostics in the column headed "DP diagnostics", diagnostics data or alarms are transferred to the PLC.

● Diagnostics for process warnings: For events labeled "W" in table B-8: Data set 92 - Diagnostics" in the column headed "DP diagnostics", diagnostics data or alarms are transferred to the PLC.

● Diagnostics for process events: For events labeled "M" in table B-8: Data set 92 - Diagnostics" in the column headed "DP diagnostics", diagnostics data or alarms are transferred to the PLC.

You can find the system manual for SIMOCODE pro PROFIBUS on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/20369671/133300).

See also Data set 92 - Device diagnostics (Page 336)

9.1.7 Setting the safety relay functions See Safety-related tripping (Page 254).





9.1.8 Replacing SIMOCODE pro components

9.1.8.1 Replacing the basic unit

Replacing SIMOCODE pro C, pro S and pro V basic units Proceed as follows:

1. Save the parameters (Page 332).

2. Switch off the main power for the unit feeder and the power supply for the basic unit.

3. Withdraw the PC cable if necessary, then remove the cover or the connecting cable from the system interface.

4. Withdraw the removable terminals. You do not need to detach the wiring.

5. Dismantle the basic unit.

6. Withdraw the removable terminals from the new basic unit.

7. Mount the new basic unit.

8. Connect the wired, removable terminals.

9. Connect the cables to the system interfaces.

10. Switch on the supply voltage for the basic unit.

11. Save (Page 332) the parameters to the basic unit.

12. Switch on the main power for the unit feeder.

9.1.8.2 Replacing the expansion module Proceed as follows:


2. Withdraw the PC cable if necessary, then remove the cover or the connecting cable from the system interface.

3. Withdraw the removable terminals. You do not need to detach the wiring.

4. Dismantle the expansion module.

5. Withdraw the removable terminals from the new basic expansion module.

6. Mount the new expansion module.

7. Connect the wired, removable terminals.

8. Connect the cables to the system interfaces.






9.1.8.3 Replacing a DM-F See manual "Fail-safe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro Safety (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50564852)".

9.1.8.4 Replacing the current measuring module and the current/voltage measuring module

Safety notices

WARNING Replacing current measuring modules and current/voltage measuring modules

The main power for the feeder and the supply voltage for the basic unit must be switched off before replacing current measuring modules and current/voltage measuring modules.

Note

Please observe the information contained in the operating instructions!

Note

It is not necessary to detach the wiring from the removable terminals to replace the components!

Proceed as follows:


2. Pull out the connecting cable from the system interface.

3. Withdraw the removable terminal from the module as illustrated below (current/voltage measuring modules only).

4. Disconnect the 3 cables of the 3 phases of the main circuit.

5. Replace the module.

6. Connect the 3 cables of the main circuit, running them through the feed-through openings.

7. Plug the removable terminals onto the module (current/voltage measuring modules only).

8. Connect the cable to the system interface.



http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50564852

Additional information 9.2 Data sets



9.2 Data sets

9.2.1 Data set 92 - Device diagnostics

Data set 92 - Device diagnostics See SIMOCODE pro System Manuals (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/20369671/133300).

9.2.2 Data set 94 - Measured values

Data set 94 - Measured values See SIMOCODE pro System Manuals (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/20369671/133300).

9.2.3 Data set 95 - Service and statistical data See SIMOCODE pro System Manuals (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/20369671/133300).




Additional information 9.3 Examples



9.3 Examples

9.3.1 Examples for the conversion factor

Example 1: Rated motor current 700 A A 3UF18 68-3G current transformer (205 to 820 A) is used as interposing current transformer (transformation ratio 820 : 1) and the secondary side is executed once by a current measuring module 0.3 to 3 A.

Transformation ratio for Is = 820 : 1; Is = 700 A

Settings:

Set current Is1: 700 A

Is1 - conversion factor - numerator: 820 Is1 - conversion factor - denominator: 1

Example 2: Rated motor current is 225 A A 3UF18 68-3G current transformer (205 to 820 A) is used as interposing current transformer (transformation ratio 820 : 1) and the secondary side is executed twice by a current measuring module 0.3 to 3 A. Transformation ratio for Is = 820 : 2; Is = 225 A

Settings:

Set current Is1: 225 A


Example 3: Rated motor current is 0.25 A The motor cable is 2x by a current measuring module 0.3 to 3 A for a motor with rated current 0.25 A: transformation ratio for Is = 1 : 2; Is = 0.25 A

Settings:

Set current Is1: 0.25 A


Note

In the case of motors with two speeds, the same or different transformation ratios can be set for each speed, depending upon whether the same or two different interposing transformers is/are used for each speed.




9.3.2 Limit monitor example

Example ● The temperature sensors of the temperature module (TM) are to be monitored

individually. If the temperature exceeds 60 °C, the limit monitor is to generate a message.

Note

Please note that the measured values of the temperature sensors are in Kelvin. For this reason, 273 must be added.

Settings ● Limit monitor - input

TM - temperature 1

● Type Overshoot, undershoot

● Limit value 333 (temperature available in Kelvin, for this reason, add 273)

9.3.3 Calculator examples

Example 1 ● Conversion of the maximum temperature of the temperature module from K to °C.




Example 2 ● Conversion of the maximum temperature of the temperature module from K to °F

Example 3 ● Conversion of motor current Imax from % to A (e.g. set current Is= 3.36 A)



Index

" "At operating temperature" state, 177 "TEST/RESET" button, operator panel, 217

0 0/4 - 20 mA monitoring, 206

3 3UF50 basic type, 229 3UF50 compatibility mode, 229 3UF50 operating mode, 229

A Active power monitoring, 204 Acyclic receive, 226 Acyclic send, 240 AM1 output, 236 Analog value recording, 227, 310 Application selection, 159 Auto reset, 249

B Basic unit

SIMOCODE pro C, 157 SIMOCODE pro V, 157 SIMOCODE pro V (PN), 157

Blocking protection, 180 BU outputs, 231 Bus monitoring, 258

C Calculators, 276 Class, 176 Configuration error, 159 Contactor controls, 189 Control stations

Local, 184 Operator panel, 184

PC or PC/OPC-UA [HMI], PLC/PCS or PLC/PCS [PN], 184

Cos phi monitoring, 203 Counter, 265 Cyclic receive, 225 Cyclic send, 226, 238

D Delay of the stalled rotor level, 180 Delay prewarning, 178 Delays, 221 Description of overload protection, 174 Diagnostics

Basic unit (PROFIBUS), 325 Basic unit (PROFINET), 326 DM-F Local, 327 DM-F PROFIsafe, 329

DM inputs, 218 DM1 outputs, 234

E EEx e applications, 181 Emergency start, 253 Exceeding the stalled rotor level, 180 External fault, 247 External ground-fault monitoring, 196

F Faults/warnings/messages, 288 Flashing, 272 Flicker, 273

G Group diagnostics, 169

H Hysteresis, 202

for voltage:cos phi:power, 202 Hysteresis for 0/4 - 20 mA, 207

Index



I Internal ground-fault monitoring, 195

L Lamp controls, 190 LEDs for device diagnostics

Basic unit / Operator panel, 325 Limit monitor, 274 Load type, 178

M Mode selector, 186 Modules, 157

Analog module 1/2, 157 Analog module 2, 157 Digital module 1, 157 Digital module 2, 157 Ground-fault module, 157 Temperature module 1/2, 157 Temperature module 2, 157

Monitoring interval for mandatory testing, 214 Motor control

Non-maintained command mode, 191 Motor runtimes, 207 Motor stop times, 207

N Non-volatile elements, 270 Number of starts monitoring motor, 210

O OFF command reset, 249 OP LED, 233 Operating hours monitoring, 209 Operating modes, 185 Operation monitoring, 208 Operator panel, buttons 1 to 4, 217 Overtemperature, 181

P Pause time, 178 Phase unbalance, 179 PLC/PCS monitoring, 259 Power failure monitoring, 252

R Remote reset, 249 Reset, 178 Response to CPU/master STOP, 169 Response to overload, 177 Restoring factory settings

with the SIMOCODE ES software, 330 with the Test/Reset button, 330

S Sampling time, 228, 310 Saving parameters from a SIMOCODE ES file to the basic unit, 333 Saving parameters from the basic unit to a SIMOCODE ES file, 332 Saving parameters from the basic unit to the memory module, 332 Saving parameters from the memory module to the basic unit, 332 Sensor fault, 182 Set current Is1, 174 Set current Is2, 175 Signal conditioning, 268 Stalled rotor level, 180 Startup parameter block, 229 Stop time monitoring, 209

T Temperature monitoring, 211 Test position feedback (TPF), 245 Test/Reset, 249 TEST/RESET, 242 Thermal motor model (thermal memory), 177 Thermistor

Motor protection with PTC (binary), 157 Thermistor protection, 157 Thermistor sensor, 157

Thermistor protection, 181 Time stamping, 261 Timer, 267 Transformation ratio - active, 176 Transformation ratio - primary, 175 Transformation ratio - secondary, 175, 176 Transformation ratio active, 175 Trip level, 181, 202, 203 Truth table 2I/1O, 262 Truth table 3I/1O, 262 Truth table 5I/2O, 264

Index



W Waiting for start-up parameter datasets, 169 Warning level, 202, 203 Watchdog, 258 Win SIMOCODE DP converter, 229

Index



Parameterization of the 5 SIMOCODE ES V12 Online Help · SIMOCODE ES V12 Online Help Programming...

Documents

Transcript of Parameterization of the 5 SIMOCODE ES V12 Online Help · SIMOCODE ES V12 Online Help Programming...